Home

Pioneer AVIC 7100 NEX Operation Manual

1. button Touch to mute Touch again to unmute 2 Displays the main sound volume 3 Adjusts the guidance volume alert sound volume Each touch of or increases or de creases the volume level O You cannot adjust the volume of the main sound on the screen Touch the VOL button to adjust the volume of the main sound O The volume menu is displayed for four sec onds If the screen disappears touch the VOL button again The screen reap pears Using MirrorLink mode When you connect a MirrorLink device with compatible applications installed you can control the applications for the mobile device directly from this product MirrorLink mode You can view and operate the compatible ap plications via the display with multi touch ges tures like tapping dragging scrolling and flicking O Multi touch gestures may be disabled de pending on the MirrorLink device that is connected 140 En Using the touch panel keys App control side bar 2 O OoON SO Displays the source list gt For details refer to Selecting a front source on the source list on page 25 2 Displays the launcher application screen 3 Displays the previous screen O Depending on the type of MirrorLink device this key is not available 4 Displays the menu screen O Depending on the type of MirrorLink device this key is not available Displays the Phone menu screen gt For details refe
2. 4 Touch SiriusXM Settings The following screen appears A System Tune Start Parental Control Alert List i Team Settings Featured Favorites 5 Touch SiriusXM Reset The SiriusXM Reset screen appears 6 Touch Restore The settings are restored to the default The source is turned off and the Bluetooth connection is disconnected before the pro cess starts J Storing song information to an iPod iTunes Tagging gt For details refer to Storing song information to an iPod iTunes Tagging on page 221 Using the SiriusXM satellite radio Operating with the hardware buttons Press the TRK button You can move up or down the preset channels when the current channel is displayed You can skip files forward or backward when the play time indicator is displayed Press and hold the TRK button You can move up or down channels by holding down the button when the current channel is displayed You can perform fast reverse or fast forward by holding down the button when the play time indicator is displayed Chapter OIPEs 33111872S GINXSNLIS 94 Huisn En 171 Chapter 28 Using an HDMI source CALU ONIDS TALONS NBA You can display the video image output by the device connected to this product This section describes operations for an HDMI source O A High Speed HDMI Cable sold sepa rately is required for connection For details of the connection method ref
3. x pu ddy Graphic EQ 202 DVD DivX Setup Fader Balance 194 Subtitle Language 213 Balance 194 Audio Language 213 Mute Level 195 Menu Language 214 Source Level Adjuster 195 Multi Angle 214 Rear Speaker 198 TV Aspect 215 Subwoofer 198 Parental 215 Speaker Level 199 DivX VOD 216 Crossover 198 DVD Auto Play 217 Subwoofer Settings 198 Time Per Photo Slide 120 Listening Position 199 Video Signal Setting Time Alignment 200 AV 176 Auto EQ amp TA 203 AUX 174 A EQ amp TA Measurement 204 Camera 218 ASL 202 en 257 Appendix MD Append SSSC C S SSSC lt CSC Bluetooth menu Bluetooth Connection Auto Connect Visibility 7 PIN Code Input Device Information Connection 74 Auto Connect 16 Visibility 77 PIN Code Input 77 Device Information 78 Auto Answer 85 Ring Tone 85 Invert Name 85 Bluetooth Memory Clear 78 BT Software Update 78 Bluetooth Version Information 79 258 En Appendix Appendix OS Specifications GPS antenna a ANTENNA cssesscesscssessesssesseeeees Micro strip flat antenna General right handed helical polari Rated power SOULCE wees 14 4V DC zation allowable voltage range Antenna cable wsesseceeceees 3 00 mi it Tin 10 8V to 15 1 V DC Dimensions W x H x D gt Grounding SYSTEM nvs Negative type naaaatanaatssnnntssnnnsssanssssssssssnonn 33mm x 14 7mm x 36mm B Maximum current consumption 1 1 4in x 1 2in x D EEEE E A 10 0A 1 3 8 i
4. 134 En our iPhone or smartphone applications O If you connect your device while an AppRadio Mode compatible application is already running the application operation screen will appear on this product 6 Touch the desired application icon The desired application is launched and the application operation screen appears 7 Operate the application 8 Press the HOME button to go back to the Top menu screen For iPhone with a Lightning connector users 1 Register your iPhone and connect it to this product via Bluetooth wireless technol ogy O The registered device must be selected as the priority device gt For details refer to Registering your Bluetooth devices on page 74 2 Unlock your iPhone 3 Connect your iPhone O The cable connection method varies de pending on your device gt For details of the connections refer to the Installation Manual 4 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 5 Touch APPS The AppRadio app is launched and the AppRadio Mode screen Application menu screen appears our iPhone or smartphone applications O If you connect your device while an AppRadio Mode compatible application is already running the application operation screen will appear on this product 6 Touch the desired application icon The desired application is launched and the application operation screen appears 7 Operate the application 8 Press the HOME button to go back to
5. Playback screen page 2 b4 Drive it Pioneer O The Best g Pops 2 0 oO O Displays the source list gt For details refer to Selecting a front source on the source list on page 25 2 Displays the Time and date setting screen gt For details refer to Setting the time and date on page 221 3 Displays the Setting menu screen 4 Recalls equalizer curves gt For details refer to Using the equalizer on page 202 5 Selects a file from the list gt For details refer to Selecting files from the file name list on page 155 6 Displays the Phone menu screen gt For details refer to Displaying the phone menu on page 80 D Switches to the next or previous page of touch panel keys Skips files forward or backward Uses Sound Retriever function gt For details refer to Setting the Sound Retriever function on page 222 J ejd oipne yz oo an g e bulsn en 153 Chapter 26 Using a Bluetooth audio player Plays files in random order gt For details refer to Playing files in ran dom order on page 155 di Sets a repeat play range gt For details refer to Setting a repeat play range on page 155 2 Switches between playback and pause Reading the screen Drive it amp Pioneer The Best g Pops lt lt Current time and date 2 File number indicator Shows the file number currently playing when available 3 Play time indicator Shows
6. Playingadiss O g You can play a normal music CD Video CD or Using the touch panel keys DVD Video using the built in drive of this pro duct This section describes these operations for video Example DVD A CAUTION Playback screen page 1 For safety reasons video images cannot be viewed while your vehicle is in motion To view video images you must stop in a safe place and apply the parking brake Using the touch panel keys for audio Example CD dsip e BulAeld Playback screen page 1 ORORO D o o D B Playback screen page 2 Displays the source list gt For details refer to Selecting a front source on the source list on page 25 2 Displays the Time and date setting Track 01 screen gt For details refer to Setting the time and date on page 221 3 Displays the Setting menu screen 4 Recalls equalizer curves gt For details refer to Using the equalizer on page 202 Selects a track from the list gt For details refer to Selecting files from the file name list on page 106 6 Displays the Phone menu screen gt For details refer to Displaying the phone menu on page 80 D Switches to the next or previous page of touch panel keys Skips files forward or backward J 9 Changes the playback point by dragging the key gt For details refer to Operating the time bar on page 27 Switches the media file type gt For details refer to Switc
7. ing order ac The Theme screen appears 3 Touch Illumination The following screen appears Illumination Theme O You can also change the screen for settings by touching Theme Background or Clock on this screen Background 4 Touch the color you want e Colored keys Selects the desired preset color custom Displays the screen to customize the illumi nation color gt For details refer to Creating a user de fined color on page 209 rainbow Shifts through the rainbow of colors grada tionally O You can preview the Top menu screen or the AV operation screen by touching Home or AV respectively Chapter Thememenu 9 Creating a user defined color You can create a user defined color The cre ated color is stored and you can select the color when setting the illumination color the next time 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order ka gt Cd The Theme screen appears 3 Touch Illumination The following screen appears Illumination Theme Background a x O You can also change the screen for settings by touching Theme Background or Clock on this screen 4 Touch the following key Displays the screen to create a user de fined color and store it to memory 5 Touch the following keys Adjusts the brightness and the level of red green and blue to create
8. 1 Display the AV source selection screen gt For details of the operations refer to Dis playing the AV operation screen on page 24 2 Touch HD Radio on the AV source se lection screen The HD Radio screen appears 3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen to control the radio gt For details refer to Using the touch panel keys on page 97 Selecting a band Touch the following key Switches between the following FM bands FM1 FM2 and FM3 O This function is convenient for preparing different preset lists for each band m Switches to AM band Manual tuning Touch the following keys to tune manu ally O This function is convenient for preparing different preset lists for each band Moves down one step at a time Moves up one step at atime Seek tuning Touch and hold one of the following keys for about one second and then re lease Scans frequencies until it finds a broad cast strong enough for good reception You can cancel seek tuning by touching either key briefly If you keep holding either key you can skip broadcasting frequencies Seek tuning will start when you release the key O When an analog station is being received only analog broadcasts can be tuned up or down If a digital broadcast is not being received yet tuning up or down seeks the next or previous analog station Analog FM Analog FM Digital FM 1ch Digital
9. Changing the speed of audiobook playback The playback speed can be changed while playing an audiobook Touch the following key bal Changes the playback speed Ba default Plays back in normal speed Plays back faster than normal speed xe Plays back slower than normal speed The icon does not change when using this function with an iPhone 6 Plus iPhone 6 iPhone 5s iPhone 5c iPhone 5 or iPod touch 5th generation The setting changes as follows when the icon is touched even though the icon does not change Faster gt Slower gt Normal gt Faster m m Chapter CUsinganiPod CS Displaying lists related to the song currently playing link search O This function is not available while playing iTunes Radio 1 Touch the artwork to open a list of the names of songs on the album currently playing 2 Touch the name of the song you want to play to start playing that song O If part of the recorded information is not displayed a scroll key appears on the right side of list Touch the scroll key to scroll m Operating with the hardware buttons Press the TRK button You can skip songs or videos forward or back ward O The skip back key is not available while playing iTunes Radio When a song or video with chapters is played you can skip a chapter forward or backward Press and hold the TRK button You can perform fast reverse or fast for ward m Playing back music
10. KD Basic operation 4 Touch the following key The source keys can be moved 5 Drag the source key to the desired posi tion 6 Touch the following key Returns to the previous screen O Ifthe source key is moved the source icons displayed on the Top menu screen and the AV source screen are also moved m Using the touch panel You can operate this product by touching the marks and items touch panel keys displayed on the screen directly with your fingers O To protect the LCD screen from damage be sure to touch the touch panel keys only with your finger and do so gently Using the common touch panel keys Navigation info window Y AV App Guide Mode M Returns to the previous screen 2 Closes the screen Basic operation Operating list screens History Touching an item on the list selects the item or narrows down the options 2 Appears when all characters are not displayed on the display area If you touch the key the rest of the characters are scrolled for display 3 Appears when items cannot be displayed on a single page only Drag the slider bar to view any hidden items Also you can drag the list to view any hidden items Operating the time bar 0304 You can change the playback point by drag ging the key O Playback time corresponding to the po sition of the key is displayed while drag ging the key O This function is not a
11. T Multi Angle TV Aspect 4 Touch TV Aspect The pop up menu appears 5 Touch the item you want to set e 16 9 default Displays the wide screen image 16 9 as it is initial setting e Letter Box Makes the image in the shape of a letterbox with black bands on the top and bottom of the screen e Pan Scan Cuts the image short on the right and left sides of the screen O When playing discs that do not have a pan scan system the disc is played back with Letter Box even if you select the Pan Scan setting Confirm whether the disc package bears the mark O The TV aspect ratio cannot be changed for some discs For details refer to the disc s instructions m Setting parental lock Some DVD Video discs let you use parental lock to set restrictions so that children cannot watch violent or adult oriented scenes You can set the parental lock level in steps as de sired O This setting is available only when Disc is selected as the source O When you set a parental lock level and then play a disc featuring parental lock code number input indications may be dis played In this case playback will start when the correct code number is input Setting the code number and level When you first use this function register your code number If you do not register a code number the parental lock will not operate 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the followin
12. Up to 40 characters can be entered for a eed hint ay Nelbp E 7T Input Output Settings 8 Touch Go Camera settings The Password Confirmation screen ap pears The Anti theft Setting Menu screen ap O If you want to change the password cur pears rently set enter the current password and 4 Touch Clear Password then enter the new one A message confirming whether to delete the 9 Check the password and then touch password appears OK l i 5 Touch Yes The Anti theft Setting Menu screen ap The password setting screen appears pears A message confirming a password hint ap pears Entering the password 6 Touch OK On the password input screen you must enter The Password Entry screen appears the current password 7 Enter the current password 1 Enter the password Chapter BET Other functions 8 Touch Go A message indicating that the security setting is canceled appears Forgotten password Contact the nearest authorized Pioneer Ser vice Station Restoring this product to the default settings You can restore settings or recorded content to the default settings Various methods are used to clear user data Method 1 Remove the vehicle battery Resets various settings registered to this pro duct Method 2 Touch the item you want to initialize on the System screen gt For details refer to Restoring the default set tings on page 226 Me
13. 237 Appendix ED Appendix Conditions likely to cause e Ifyou drive in zigzags noticeable positioning errors For various reasons such as the state of the road you are traveling on and the reception status of the GPS signal the actual position of your vehicle may differ from the position dis played on the map screen e Ifyou make a slight turn e Ifthe road has a series of hairpin bends A eoooeeeeeee e f there is a parallel road d e f there is a loop or similar road configura gt P tion e fthere is another road very nearby such as in the case of an elevated freeway e f you take a ferry e If you take a recently opened road that is If you are driving on along straight road or not on the map a gently curving road 238 En Appendix Appendix OS If you are on a steep mountain road with many height changes A M If you enter or exit a multi storey parking lot or similar structure using a spiral ramp If your vehicle is turned on a turntable or si milar structure If your vehicle s wheels spin such as on a gravel road or in snow If you put on chains or change your tires for ones with a different size If trees or other obstacles block the GPS signals for a considerable period x pu ddy If you drive very slowly or in a start and stop manner as in a traffic congestion If you join the road after driving arou
14. 7100NEX 1 Press the 4 button The following screen appears EN E VE x C48 En 2 Touch the following key abe Opens the LCD panel 3 Insert an SD memory card into the SD card slot Insert it with the label surface face up and press the card until it clicks and completely locks 4 Press the 4 button The LCD panel closes Ejecting an SD memory card HONS TABA 1 Press the 4 button The following screen appears iC aL 2 Touch the following key is Opens the LCD panel 3 Press the middle of the SD memory card gently until it clicks The SD memory card is ejected 4 Pull the SD memory card out straight 5 Press the 4 button The LCD panel closes Chapter Basic operation 02 Connecting and disconnecting Startup and termination an iPod 1 Start the engine to boot up the system Connecting your iPod After a short pause the splash screen comes For details of the connections refer to the on for a few seconds Installation Manual 2 Turn off the vehicle engine to termi l nate the system Disconnecting your iPod This product is also turned off Pull out the cables after confirming that no data is being accessed uol e1ado diseg On first time startup Plugging and unplugging a USB When you use this product for the first time storage device select the language that you want to use O This product may not achieve optimum per 1 Start the engine to boot up the
15. Fuel Enables or disables the online gas price op tion and sets up the gas type gt For details referto Fuel settings on page 69 Trip Monitor Turns automatic trip log saving on or off and checks the current size of the trip data base gt For details refer to rio Monitor set tings on page 69 AVICSYNC Displays the connection method for AVICSYNC O The setting value is fixed Use this pro duct as it is Online Services Enables or disables the connected services gt For details refer to Online Services set tings on page 69 Usage Reports Enables or disables the collection of usage information and GPS logs that may be used for improving the application and the qual ity and coverage of maps gt For details refer to Usage Reports set tings on page 70 Start Configuration Wizard Chapter Customizing preferences of the navigation dH Modifies the basic software parameters Information on each option used during the initial setup process i Pr amp doo of Settings Starts the synchronization tool which Route Preferences settings makes it possible to update your maps gt For details refer to Getting the map up date on page 73 Vehicle You can set the type of vehicle you will be using on the route O The route is planned based on the selected Restoring the default settings vehicle type You can restore settings or recorded content Route plan
16. O For AVIC 6100NEX and AVIC 5100NEX this function becomes effective only when the additional map data is in stalled Chapter Customizing preferences of the navigation dH e 3D Terrain This setting shows or hides the 3D eleva tion of the surrounding terrain e Track Logs You can turn on or off track log saving which saves the sequence of the locations you go through on your journeys e Place Markers You can select which POI icons to show on the map while navigating O When a large number of POI icons exist on a map display maps and POI icons become hard to see Io maintain map and POI visibility reduce the displayed categories as much as possible Data Fields You can choose to have different values dis played for when navigating a route to a select destination and for when just cruising around without any particular destination gt For details refer to Browsing the data field on page 35 First Second and Third selects items displayed in the data fields shown when the route exists Without Route selects the items displayed in the data fields shown when a route does not exist Route Progress Bar You can turn on the route progress bar to dis play the current route as a straight line located on the right side of the map The arrow repre sents your Current position and moves up the line as you travel along the route Waypoints and traffic event markers are also displayed on the
17. refer to Registering your Bluetooth de vices on page 74 3 Display the AV source selection screen gt For details of the operations refer to Dis playing the AV operation screen on page 24 4 Touch aha on the AV source selection screen 5 Use the touch panel keys on the screen to control Aha Radio gt For details refer to Using the touch panel keys on page 146 For iPhone with a Lightning connector users 1 Unlock your iPhone 2 Connect your iPhone 8100NEX 7100NEX 6100NEX gt Connect via USB Bluetooth or HDMI and Bluetooth oipey eyy buisn en 147 Chapter ED Using Aha Radio For details of the Bluetooth connection refer to Registering your Bluetooth de vices on page 74 O The cable connection method varies de pending on your device gt For details of the connections refer to the Installation Manual 5100NEX Connect via USB or Bluetooth gt For details of the Bluetooth connection refer to Registering your Bluetooth de vices on page 74 O The cable connection method varies de pending on your device gt For details of the connections refer to the Installation Manual 3 Display the AV source selection screen gt For details of the operations refer to Dis playing the AV operation screen on page 24 4 Touch aha on the AV source selection screen When you touch aha this product will start establishing a Bluetooth connection After the connection is successfully
18. screen a 52 En 4 Touch the following key Displays the shortcuts 5 Touch Edit The Select Location to Edit screen appears 6 Touch the item you want to delete and touch Delete a Home and Work cannot be deleted The location can be set again T Ifyou touch and then touch Delete All all entries including the home and workplace locations can be deleted A message will appear asking you to confirm the deletion 7 Touch OK 8 Touch Done The Saved Location screen appears O You can also delete the stored location with out using the Saved Location screen When the Map Location screen is dis played after scrolling the map place the cursor on a stored location which you want to delete and open the shortcuts and then touch Remove Saved Location Storing a route in Saved Routes Storing your favorite routes in Saved Routes allows you to save the time and effort used on re entering this information 1 Seta route to your destination gt For details refer to Chapter 5 2 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 3 Touch the following key I Displays the navigation menu on the Map screen Chapter 4 Touch Route Summary 8 Touch the item you want to rename The Route Summary screen appears and touch Rename 5 Touch the following key 9 Enter the name and then touch EEI Ahad Displays the
19. 2 1 kg 4 6 lbs Audio AVIC 6100NEX ceeseesssssesees 1 8 kg 4 0 Ibs Maximum power output 50W x 4 AVIC 51OONEX cesssssssseee 1 8kg 4 0 Ibs Continuous power output 22W x 4 60 Hz to 15 kHz NAND flash memory 5 THD 4Q LOAD Both AVIC 81 OONEX weescsssessstsees 16GB Channels Driven AVIC 7100NEX ooa 8GB Load impedance Aancadnccvana AQ 4Q to 8Q allowable AVIC 61OONEX essssssssesen 8GB Preout output level max 4 0V AVIC 5100NEX essssssssesen 8GB Equalizer 13 Band Graphic Equalizer FreQUENCy ssecventctusctoceateniens 50 H2 80 Hz 125 Hz 200 Hz Navigation 315 Hz 500 Hz 800 Hz GPS receiver 1 25 kKH2 2 KHz 3 15 kHz SySteEM a L1 C Acode GPS 5 kKHz 8 kHz 12 5 kHz SPS Standard Positioning GAl ctaitachastertectasmsletaaninitods 12 qB Service HPF Reception system e 50 channel multi channel Nicole gt gion gerne mmr tre 50 H2 63 Hz 80 Hz 100 Hz reception system 125 Hz 160 Hz 200 Hz Reception frequency 1575 42 MHz SOPE aeta ie 6 dB oct 12 dB oct Sensitivity sssssssseersssnrresnre 140 dBm typ 18 dB oct Position update frequency Subwoofer mono EE A EET Approx once per second FREQUENCY stsinsininominine D0 HZ 63 Hz 80 Hz 100 Hz 125 Hz 160 Hz 200 Hz En 259 Appendix MD Appendx SOC CS 7 7 3ETSC lt CS S Region NUMDETr ecssesssesseeseesseees Usable diSCS wietiseweudustatectcart Frequency response nsus Signal to noise ratio s s s Output level VIEO rma nun Number of chann
20. Advanced Audio Distribution Profile Only playing back songs on your audio player is possible A DP and AVRCP Audio Video Remote Control Profile Playing back pausing selecting songs etc are possible O Since a number of Bluetooth audio players are available on the market operations with your Bluetooth audio player using this product vary considerably in range Please refer to the instruction manual that came with your Bluetooth audio player as well as this manual while operating your player on this product 1 While you are listening to songs on your Bluetooth audio player please refrain trom operating your cellular phone as much as possible If you try operating your cellular phone the signal may cause noise for song playback O Even if you switch to another source while listening to a song on your Bluetooth audio player song playback may continues O Depending on the Bluetooth audio player you connected to this product operations on this product to control the player may differ from those explained in this manual O When you are talking on a cellular phone connected to this product via Bluetooth wireless technology song playback from your Bluetooth audio player connected to this product may be paused O You cannot use Bluetooth audio player when the connecting cable for using AppRadio Mode is connected Using the touch panel keys Playback screen page 1 Drive it Pioneer O TheBestH Pops
21. After Continue Without Route is touched the current position map appears Restoring the current position as the starting position 1 Touch Route Planner or My Route 2 Touch Current GPS Position The pop up menu appears 3 Touch Back to GPS position and then touch Delete Start Point The starting position for route calculation re turns to the current position Adding waypoints 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 2 Touch the following key Displays the navigation menu on the Map screen 3 Touch Add Waypoint 4 Search for a location 5 Touch Select as Waypoint The route is recalculated and the Route Summary screen appears When the way point is already set the My Route screen ap pears Touch Show Route and proceed to the next step 6 Touch Start Navigation Your navigation system starts the route gul dance Checking route alternatives You can select another route and compare dif ferent route alternatives 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 2 Touch the following key Displays the navigation menu on the Map screen 3 Touch Detours amp Alternatives 4 Touch Alternative Routes The Alternative Routes screen appears 3 NO4 UdIIND y HulAyipow pue BunDpP YD Chapter KD Checking and modifying the current route 5 Touch any of the conditions you want to display on the map You can see the approximate time requ
22. DVD DivX Setup menu For details refer to Setting the angle icon display on page 214 PS Selecting the audio output When playing DVDs recorded with LPCM audio you can switch the audio output Touch the following key repeatedly until the desired setting appears Changes the audio output setting T e L R Left and right e Left Left e Right Right Confirms the selected item dsip e bulKeld Chapter ED Playingadse O O o gt e Mix Mixing left and right O This function is not available when disc playback has been stopped O The appearance of this key changes accord ing to the current setting a Operating with the hardware buttons Press the TRK button You can skip tracks or chapters forward or backward Press and hold the TRK button You can perform fast reverse or fast for ward m 410 En Chapter Playing compressed audio files You can play compressed audio files stored in a disc or an external storage device USB SD using the built in drive of this product This section describes how gt For details refer to Media compatibility chart on page 245 Using the touch panel keys Example USB Playback screen page 1 2 4 Drive it S Aki The Best N Rock A D O 2 W D O Playback screen page 2 Drive it Aki O The Best N amp Rock 0 8 DY 0O O Displays the source list gt For de
23. Displaying the phone menu O Connect acellular phone to this product for using hands free phoning gt For details refer to Chapter 11 O The Phone icon is displayed on the follow ing screens lop menu screen AV operation screen On the App control side bar on the AppRadio Mode and MirrorLink mode screens Touch the following key 3 Displays the Phone menu screen O The Phone Book screen appears when using this function for the first time The screen of the last used function appears from the next time 80 En ED Using hands free phoninc Touch panel keys Phone Book Andy Q OO amp OC Displays the preset dial screen 2 Switches to the phone book list 3 Switches to the missed received and dialed call lists 4 Switches the mode to enter the phone num ber directly Switches to the voice recognition function 6 Displays the Setting menu screen D Closes the screen Displays entries in the list by the initial charac ter Reading the screen 000 pmen Menu title Name of the connected cellular phone Battery status of the cellular phone Reception status of the cellular phone Indicates that a Bluetooth telephone is con nected The list number of the connected device is dis played List display area m OSON Chapter Using hands free phoninc Cz Making a phone call You can make a phone call in many different ways
24. For details refer to Selecting a channel from a list of all channels on page 160 gt For details refer to Selecting a channel from the category list on page 160 7 Switches between the Live screen and the Replay screen es gt For details refer to Using the Replay function on page 161 Displays the Phone menu screen gt For details refer to Displaying the phone menu on page 80 9 Switches to the channel broadcasting the traffic and weather information for the se lected city gt For details refer to Checking the update Traffic and Weather information on page 163 Memorizes the current channel gt For details refer to Memorizing the cur rent contents on page 165 Stores song information to an iPod gt For details refer to Storing song informa tion to an iPod iTunes Tagging on page 221 di Selects a channel directly gt For details refer to Selecting a SiriusxM channel directly on page 159 2 Performs manual tuning gt For details refer to Manual tuning on page 159 3 Plays back the songs from the music channels stored as presets in the current band gt For details refer to Using TuneMix on page 162 Displays the preset channels gt For details refer to Selecting a preset channel from the preset channel list on page 159 5 Scans all the songs for the music chan nels found in the current preset band gt For details refer to Using TuneScan on page 162 the
25. O There is a limit to map scaling in 83D map view mode If the map scale is zoomed out further the map is zoomed out in 2D map gt For details refer to Switching between 2D 8D and 2D North up views on page Se 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 2 Pinch or expand the map to zoom out or in Touch anywhere on the map during naviga tion 3 Touch the following key The map returns to the current po sition O If you press the MAP button the map re turns to the current position O For information on the controls when the scrolled map is displayed refer to Contro keys on the scrolled map on page 33 Smart Zoom Your navigation system features Smart Zoom that works in two ways e When the route is set When approaching a turn Smart Zoom will zoom in and raise the view angle to en able you to easily recognize your maneuver at the next junction If the next turn is ata distance it will zoom out and lower the view angle to be flat so you can see the road in front of you e When the route is not set Smart Zoom will zoom in if you drive slowly and zoom out when you drive at high speed 32 En EKD How to use the map Switching between 2D 3D and 2D North up views You can switch how the map is displayed For 2D map view mode you can select between Heading up and North up e Heading up The map display always shows the vehicle s direction as proceeding to
26. TEL 905 479 4411 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087 Keetberglaan 1 B 9120 Melsele Belgium Belgique TEL 0 3 570 05 11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE LTD 253 Alexandra Road 04 01 Singapore 159936 TEL 65 6472 7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY LTD 5 Arco Lane Heatherton Victoria 3202 Australia TEL 03 9586 6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S A de C V Blvd Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col Lomas de Chapultepec Mexico D F 11000 TEL 55 9178 4270 SoS AY A BRD E Bb rh PN AA em CER 40 8E Had 886 0 2 2657 3588 cH ET Be AAA STL BE Se EB 909 BEDE 2015 PIONEER CORPORATION Bay 852 2848 6488 All rights reserved lt KTSZ15A gt lt CRB4514 A gt UC
27. and then turn off the ignition switch ACC OFF Subse quently turn the ignition switch to on ACC ON again e Update the iPod software version Connect the cables correctly Use the iPod to change the audio output di rection Action Retry after re entering the range for service Perform the connection process Action A black screen is displayed While operating an application the application was ended on the smart phone side The smartphone OS may be await ing screen operation The screen is displayed but op An error has occurred eration does not work at all Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen Stop the vehicle in a safe place and check the screen on the smartphone e Park your vehicle in a safe place and then turn off the ignition switch ACC OFF Subse quently turn the ignition switch to on ACC ON again e When an Android device is connected dis connect the Bluetooth connection from this product and then reconnect it Appendix Symptom Cause The smartphone was not charged Charging stopped because the tem perature of the smartphone rose due to prolonged use of the smart phone during charging More battery power was consumed than was gained from charging Error messages Action Disconnect the smartphone from the cable and wait until the smartphone cools down This problem may be resolved by stopping any unnecessary ser
28. cast frequencies under the preset tuning keys 1 to 6 and once stored there you can tune into them with the touch of a key O Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may replace broadcast frequencies you have already saved O Previously stored broadcast frequencies may remain stored if the number of strong broadcast frequencies stored has not reached the limit 1 Touch the preset channel list display key The preset channel list appears 2 Touch BSM to start a search A message appears While the message is dis played the six strongest broadcast frequen cies will be stored under the preset tuning keys 1 to 6 in the order of their signal strength When this is complete the message will disappear Ifyou touch Cancel the storage process is canceled m Tuning into strong frequencies Local seek tuning allows you to only tune Into those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception O This setting is available only when HD Radio is selected as the source 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen Chapter HD Radio reception 15 2 Touch the following keys in the follow Sets the level of sensitivity for AM to level 1 ing order e Level2 O The FM Level4 AM Level2 setting al lows reception of only stations with the The System screen appears allow reception of those with weaker sig nals m Sets the level of sensitivi
29. ity If a microphone for acoustical measurement sold separately is not placed in an appropri ate location the measurement tone may be come loud and measurement may take a long time resulting in battery drainage Be sure to place the microphone in the specified loca tion Before operating the Auto EQ function Perform Auto EQ in as quiet a place as pos sible with the vehicle engine and air condi tioning switched off Also cut power to car phones or cellular phones in the vehicle or remove them from the vehicle before per forming Auto EQ Sounds other than the measurement tone surrounding sounds engine sound telephones ringing etc may prevent correct measurement of the vehicle s acoustics Be sure to perform Auto EQ using the mi crophone for acoustical measurement sold separately Using another micro phone may prevent measurement or result in incorrect measurement of the vehicle s acoustics To perform Auto EQ the front speakers must be connected When this product is connected to a power amp with input level control Auto EQ may be impossible if the power amp s input level is set below the standard level When this product is connected to a power amp with an LPF low pass filter turn the LPF off before performing Auto EQ Also set the cut off frequency for the built in LPF of an active subwoofer to the highest fre quency The distance has been calculated by a computer to provide optimum del
30. refer to Registering your Bluetooth de vices on page 74 The cable connection method varies de pending on your device gt For details of the connections refer to the Installation Manual 5100NEX O Connect via Bluetooth gt For details of the Bluetooth connection refer to Registering your Bluetooth de vices on page 74 The cable connection method varies de pending on your device gt For details of the connections refer to the Installation Manual 3 Display the AV source selection screen gt For details of the operations refer to Dis playing the AV operation screen on page 24 Chapter Streaming Pandora CE 4 Touch Pandora on the AV source selec tion screen When you touch Pandora this product will start establishing a Bluetooth connection After the connection is successfully estab lished the touch panel key on the Pandora screen is activated C Ifthe AVICSYNC App function is not turned off a message confirming whether to turn off the AVICSYNC App function appears for smartphones connected with HDMI or Bluetooth selected for Connection in Smartphone Setup 5 Use the touch panel keys on the screen to control the Pandora application gt For details refer to Using the touch panel keys on page 142 Selecting a Pandora station from the list Touch the following key Displays the list of Pandora sta tions The following screen appears Station Lis
31. sold separately is required to use this function This function is available only when SiriusXM is selected as the source 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ka gt EE The System screen appears 3 Touch AV Source Settings The following screen appears Tt System MIXTRAX Settings Radio Settings SinusXM Settings Tag Forwarding Bluetooth Audio 4 Touch SiriusXM Settings The following screen appears TS System Tune Start Parental Control SY Alert List Team Settings Featured Favorites Chapter OIPEs 9 1 2 ES GINXSNLIS 34 Huisn Chapter Usin the SiriusxM satellite radio 5 Touch City Setting The City screen appears 6 Touch the desired city O A check mark appears for the selected item e Ifyou touch No City Selected the check mark will be removed from the selected city e If you remove the check mark from the se lected city acheck mark automatically ap pears for No City Selected Setting parental lock The SiriusXM Parental Control feature allows you to control access to channels that you consider inappropriate for younger listeners When enabled the Parental Control feature re quires you to enter a passcode to tune into the locked channels Setting the passcode O This function is available only when SiriusXM is selected as the source
32. the Top menu screen For smartphone users CHRON HG TALONS ONRAN 1 Register your smartphone and connect it to this product via Bluetooth wireless technology O The registered device must be selected as the priority device gt For details refer to Registering your Bluetooth devices on page 74 2 Unlock your smartphone 3 Connect your smartphone to this pro duct via the separately sold App Connectiv ity Kit CD AH200 1 The cable connection method varies de pending on your device gt For details of the connections refer to the Installation Manual 4 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 5 Touch APPS The AppRadio app is launched and the AppRadio Mode screen Application menu screen appears 4 5 Tue Contacts Calendar Photos CarMediaPlay er O If you connect your device while an AppRadio Mode compatible application is already running the application operation screen will appear on this product 6 Touch the desired application icon The desired application is launched and the application operation screen appears 7 Operate the application 8 Press the HOME button to go back to the Top menu screen Using the keyboard CAUTION For your safety the keyboard functionality is only available when the vehicle is stopped and the parking brake is engaged O This function is only available in AppRadio Mode on the iPhone This function may not be available depend ing on y
33. the list disappears and the preset tuning keys are displayed m Storing broadcast channels With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys 1 to 6 you can easily store up to six broadcast channels for later recall also with the touch of a key O The broadcast channel may not be stored depending on the broadcast channel O This function is not available in Featured band 1 Select the channel that you want to store in memory 2 Touch and hold a preset tuning key 1 to 6 The selected channel is memorized The next time you touch the same preset tun ing key 1 to 6 the channel is recalled from memory O Up to 18 channels six for each of the three SiriusXM bands can be memorized Selecting a SiriusXM channel directly You can select a broadcast channel directly by entering the desired channel number 1 Touch the channel number on the SiriuSXM screen The following screen appears Chapter OIPEs 33111872S GINXSNLIS 34 Huisn Chapter Usin Caliente Juanes Loco De Amo j Tune Mix d cH 1 2 Touch 0 to 9 to input the desired channel number O To delete the entered numbers one by one touch C 3 Touch the following key e Selects the SiriusXM channel of the entered number 4 Touch the following key Returns to the previous screen Selecting a channel from a list of all channels You can select a channel from any of the avail a
34. then turn the engine off If the engine is left running engine noise may prevent correct Auto EQ O If driving restrictions are detected during measurement measurement is canceled 2 Fix the microphone for acoustical mea surement sold separately in the center of the headrest of the driver s seat facing for ward The Auto EQ may differ depending on where you place the microphone If desired place the microphone on the front passenger seat and perform Auto EQ JN r 3 Disconnect the iPhone or smartphone device 4 Turn on the ignition switch ACC ON If the vehicle s air conditioner or heater is turned on turn it off Noise from the fan in the air conditioner or heater may prevent correct Auto EQ 5 Switch the AV source to OFF gt For details of the operations refer to Dis playing the AV operation screen on page 24 6 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 7 Touch the following keys in the follow D The Audio screen appears 8 Touch A EQ amp TA Measurement The A EQ amp TA Measurement screen ap pears 9 Connect the microphone for acoustical measurement sold separately with this product MONTES CAN Plug the microphone into the microphone input jack on this product 6100NEX 5100NEX Connect the microphone with the mini jack ex tension cable and then plug it into the auxili ary input jack on this product gt For details of the operatio
35. y JO SadUdAaJaI1d Hulziwio sny5 Chapter ED Customizing preferences of the navigation Online Traffic You can enable or disable the online traffic ser vice Online Weather You can enable or disable the online weather forecast Service Online Parking You can enable or disable the online parking service Online Fuel Prices You can enable or disable the online gas price Service Online Search You can enable or disable the online search Service Usage Reports settings Application Usage Information You can enable or disable the collection of anonymous statistical information on using this navigation system for later development purposes O The collected data is used for improving the user interface and the program work flow The data is processed anonymously and no one will be able to track any perso nal information GPS Tracks You can set to enable or disable collecting anonymous track logs for later development purposes O The collected data is used for improving the quality and coverage of maps The data is processed anonymously and no one will be able to track any personal in formation 70 En Setting the alert point warnings You can set an alert for the different alert point categories individually 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 2 Touch the following key I Displays the navigation menu on the Map screen 3 Touch to show the next page
36. you must stop in a safe place and put on the parking brake O Some information regarding traffic regula tions depends on the time when the route calculation is performed Thus the infor mation may not correspond with a certain traffic regulation when your vehicle actually passes through the location in question Also the information on the traffic regula tions provided applies for a passenger vehi cle and not for a truck or other delivery vehicles Always follow the actual traffic regulations when driving 1 Destination from Phone and Online Search on the New Route to screen can be used when the AVICSYNC App con nection is established gt Be sure read Expanding the use of the navigation functions page 71 before using the AVICSYNC function Searching for a location by address The most frequently used function is Ad dress in which the address is specified and the location is searched O Depending on the search results some steps may be skipped 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 2 Touch the following key Displays the navigation menu on the Map screen 3 Touch New Route The New Route to screen appears 4 Touch Address The Find Address screen appears Enter City or ZIP Code Enter Street Name 5 Touch the following text box and set the destination you are looking for e Country By default your navigation system proposes the country
37. your device because of irregu lar resolution Failed to launch the application If your MirrorLink device is The MirrorLink device is locked locked please unlock it when it is safe and lawful for you to do so There was a communication error Action e Disconnect the cable from the smartphone and then connect the smartphone again after a few seconds e Turn the ignition switch to OFF and then to ON If the error message is still displayed after per forming the above action reset the smart phone If the error message is still displayed after per forming the above action please contact your dealer or an authorized Pioneer Service Sta tion Install MirrorLink compliant applications to your MirrorLink device e Disconnect the cable from the smartphone and then connect the smartphone again after a few seconds e Turn the ignition switch to OFF and then to ON If the error message is still displayed after per forming the above action reset the smart phone If the error message is still displayed after per forming the above action please contact your dealer or an authorized Pioneer Service Sta tion Try again The size of the images transferred from the device exceeds 800 x 480 Unlock the MirrorLink device xipusddy Appendix MD Append SC C C SSSSC lt C S S Positioning technology Positioning by GPS The Global Positioning System GPS uses a network of
38. 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ka gt EE The System screen appears 3 Touch AV Source Settings The following screen appears System MIXTRAX Settings Radio Settings SinusXM Settings Tag Forwarding Bluetooth Audio 164 En 4 Touch SiriusXM Settings The following screen appears System Tune Start Parental Control Alert List r Team Settings Featured Favorites 5 Touch Parental Control The Parental Control screen appears 6 Enter the passcode O The default passcode is 0000 7 Touch the following key Displays the Locked Channel Screen 8 Touch Edit Code The Edit Code screen appears 9 Enter the passcode you want to set O To delete the entered numbers one by one touch C 10 Touch the following key e Displays the Locked Channel Screen Locking the channel O This function is available only when SiriusXM is selected as the source 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow Am Usin The System screen appears 3 Touch AV Source Settings The following screen appears A System MIXTRAX Settings Radio Settings SinusXM Settings f Tag Forwarding Bluetooth Audio 4 Touch SiriusXM Settings The following screen appears T
39. 3 Recalls equalizer curves Shows the title of the album of the cur rent file when available No Title is displayed if there is no corresponding information For details refer to Using the equalizer 2 Current time and date on page 202 3 Album artwork 4 Displays the Phone menu screen Album art of the current song is displayed if it gt For details refer to Displaying the phone is available 4 Playback condition indicator Indicates the current playback condition menu on page 80 Skips files forward or backward O Operations may vary depending on the Setting the shuffle play application used on the Android Auto compatible device Indicator Meaning 6 Switches between playback and pause YY KAA JA P Jq zedwo 2 o ny pioIpuy y Wo nd zno dIsnw Hulke d Plays all files in the current re peat play range in random order Chapter ED Playing music output from the Android Auto compatible device Setting a repeat play range Indicator Meaning Repeats all songs in the se cS lected list LTA Repeats just the current song O Playback condition indicators may not be displayed depending on the Android device Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time within the current file m Starting procedure 1 Start up Android Auto gt For details refer to Using Android Auto on page 138 2 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 3 T
40. 3 Touch Camera settings The following screen appears A System Camera View Back Camera Input 2nd Camera Input r Reverse Gear Setting Parking Assist Guide 4 Touch 2nd Camera Reverse video re peatedly until the desired setting appears e Off default Does not reverse the second camera images e On Reverses the second camera images m Turning off the demo screen If the demo screen appears perform the fol lowing procedure to turn off the demo screen En s6ul asS W JZS S 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order ka gt EE The System screen appears 3 Touch Demo Mode repeatedly until the desired setting appears e On default Displays the demo screen e Off Hides the demo screen m Selecting the system language The system language can be selected O The languages used in the program and voice guidance can be set on the Regio nal screen gt For details refer to Customizing the na vigation settings on page 62 e The language can be changed for the fol lowing The Audio screen The System screen The Video Setup screen The Bluetooth screen Language for messages Some operations on this product are prohibited from use while driving or re quire careful attention when operated In such cases a caution message will appear on the displa
41. 4 Touch Settings The Settings screen appears 5 Touch Warnings The Warnings screen appears 6 Touch Alert Points The Alert Points screen appears 7 Touch Alert Point Warnings to turn it on 8 Touch Alert Types The Select Alert Types screen appears 9 Touch any of the items to change the setting The warning setting screen of the selected ca tegory is shown 10 Touch Warning Type and then touch one of the options The following alert types are available e Disabled The system does not warn you of the alert points for this category e Audio and Visual You will receive audible and visible warn ings while you are approaching the points in this category e Visual You will receive a visible warning while you are approaching the points in this category Chapter Customizing preferences of the navigation dH O Ifyou select Audio and Visual in the warning type setting you can change the reception timing of the audio alert If you select Only When Speeding the audio alert is only played when you exceed the given speed limit If you select When Ap proaching the audio alert is always played when approaching one of these alert points In order to draw your attention the alert is different when you exceed the speed lim it m Expanding the use of the navigation functions You can expand the use of the navigation func tions to iPhone or smartphones if you
42. Appendix Appendix OS Troubleshooting If you have problems operating your navigation system refer to this section The most common problems are listed below along with likely causes and solutions If a solution to your problem cannot be found here contact your dealer or the nearest authorized Pioneer service facility Problems with the AV screen g Symptom Cause Action Reference s CD or DVD playback is not pos The disc is inserted upside down Insert the disc with the label upward 2 sible The disc is dirty Clean the disc a The disc is cracked or otherwise da Insert a normal round disc maged The files on the disc are in an irregu Check the file format lar file format The disc format cannot be played Replace the disc back The loaded disc is a type this pro Check what type of disc it is Page 242 duct cannot play The screen is covered by a cau The parking brake lead is not con Connect the parking brake lead correctly and tion message and the video can nected or applied apply the parking brake not be shown The parking brake interlock is acti Park your vehicle in a safe place and apply vated the parking brake No video output from the con The AV Input setting is incorrect Correct the settings Page 180 nected equipment The audio or video skips This product is not firmly secured Secure this product firmly No sounds are produced Cables are not connected correctly Connect the cabl
43. Corporation O Itis not possible to play DVD Audio discs This DVD drive may not be able to play all discs bearing the marks shown above AVCHD recorded discs This unit is not compatible with discs recorded in AVCHD Advanced Video Codec High Defi nition format Do not insert AVCHD discs If inserted the disc may not be ejected Playing DualDisc e DualDiscs are two sided discs that have a recordable CD for audio on one side anda recordable DVD for video on the other e Playback of the DVD side is possible with this product However since the CD side of DualDiscs is not physically compatible with the general CD standard it may not be pos sible to play the CD side with this product e Frequent loading and ejecting of a DualDisc may result in scratches to the disc e Serious scratches can lead to playback pro blems on this product In some cases a DualDisc may become stuck in the disc loading slot and will not eject To prevent this we recommend you refrain from using DualDisc with this product e Please refer to the manufacturer for more detailed information about DualDiscs Dolby Digital This product will down mix Dolby Digital sig nals internally and the sound will be output in stereo O Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D sym bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories 242 En DOLBY DIGITAL Detailed information for playable media Compatibility Common not
44. Dis playing the AV operation screen on page 24 2 Insert the disc you want to play into the disc loading slot The source changes and then playback will start gt For details refer to nserting and ejecting a disc on page 17 O If the disc is already set touch Disc on the source list or on the AV source selection screen gt For details refer to Selecting a front source on the source list on page 25 gt For details refer to Selecting a front source on the AV source selection screen on page 25 3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen to control the disc gt For details refer to Using the touch panel keys on page 111 m Starting procedure for USB SD 1 Display the AV source selection screen gt For details of the operations refer to Dis playing the AV operation screen on page 24 2 Insert the SD memory card into the SD card slot or plug the USB storage device into the USB connector gt For details refer to Plugging in a USB sto rage device on page 19 gt For details refer to nserting and ejecting an SD memory card on page 18 3 Touch USB or SD on the AV source selection screen The source changes and then playback will start 4 Use the touch panel keys on the screen to control the external storage device USB SD gt For details refer to Using the touch panel keys on page 111 O Playback is performed in order of folder numbers Folders are skipped if they con tain no playable fi
45. Edit The Select Trip to Edit screen appears 6 Touch any of the items to edit e Delete Deletes the trip log e Rename Renames the trip log e Change Color Changes the color by selecting another color from the color table If you touch and then touch Delete All all entries can be deleted 7 Touch Done Using the Trip Computer mode In the trio computer screen the information received trom the GPS receiver and your vehi cle is displayed like a meter for a vehicle 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 2 Touch the data field key Pine St 673 Shasta St 44 The Trip Computer screen appears diz ANOA YNOGe UO eEWOJU Nyasn BuDP YD Chapter KOD Checking useful information about your trip p Trip Summary O Ifyou touch Trip Summary the details of the current trip are displayed Touch Save Trip to store the current trip log 3 Touch the following key Returns to the Map screen O Ifyou press the MAP button you can return to the Map screen m Calculating the fuel consumption The fuel consumption monitor helps you keep track of the fuel consumption of your car even if you do not use the navigation system for all your journeys Set the initial odometer value and then record the distance driven and the amount of fuel whenever you fill Up your car You can also set reminders for regular car maintenance These calculations are based only on th
46. In addition to augmenting your Pioneer in dash navigation experience AVICSYNC App also works as a standalone navigation app This means that you ll always have access to Pioneer s accurate turn by turn navigation even when you re not in your vehicle Access our website to check further details for the AVICSYNC App For U S A http www pioneerelectronics com AVICSYNC For Canada http www pioneerelectronics ca AVICSYNC 72 En Compatibility and connectivity You need to install the tree AVICSYNC App to your iPhone or smartphone Android To use the AVICSYNC App function both iPhone or smartphone Android compatibility with the AVICSYNC App and connectivity with the na vigation system are required AVICSYNC compatibility AVICSYNC is available for the following mod els As of November 2014 O Depending on the software version of the iPhone and Android it may not be compati ble with this product For latest compatibil ity with this product and AVICSYNC App refer to the information on our website iPhone models e iPhone 6 Plus iOS 8 0 x e iPhone 6 iOS 8 0 x e iPhone 5s iOS 7 0 x 7 1 x 8 0 x 8 1 e iPhone 5c iOS 7 0 x 7 1 x 8 0 x 8 1 e iPhone 5 iOS 7 0 x 7 1 x 8 0 x 8 1 e iPhone 4s iOS 7 0 x 7 1 x 8 0 x 8 1 e iPhone 4 iOS 6 x Smartphone Android models SAMSUNG e Galaxy S2 Android 4 1 2 e Galaxy S3 Android 4 1 2 4 3 e Galaxy S54 Android 4 2 2 4 4 2 e Galaxy Note
47. Mode to be shown on the screen O Depending on the type of application you may not be able to see the image on the screen O When you use this function do not connect other devices via Bluetooth wireless tech nology Be sure to disconnect your Bluetooth device before using this func tion O You can only control the application on the connected device O When you touch the display in this func tion Don t Touch mark appears on the upper right corner of the screen 1 Connect your iPhone O The cable connection method varies de pending on your device gt For details of the connections refer to the Installation Manual Chapter suoi ed1 dde suoudyiews 10 BUOUd INOA Huisn En 137 Chapter 22 Usino 2 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 3 Touch APPS The image in your iPhone appears on the screen 4 Launch an application on your iPhone An image of the application appears on the screen 5 Press the HOME button to return to the Top menu screen Displaying the image of your application smartphone You can set an image of an application for smartphone which is not compatible with AppRadio Mode to be shown on the screen O Compatibility with all smartphones is not guaranteed O When you use this function do not connect other devices via Bluetooth wireless tech nology Be sure to disconnect your Bluetooth device before using this func tion O You can only control
48. Note The sampling frequency shown in the display may be rounded AAC compatibility DVD R R SL R Media DL DVD RW CD R RW File extension m4a Bit rate 8 kbps to 320 kbps CBR 8 kHz to 44 1 kHz Sampling frequency Note This product plays back AAC files encoded by iTunes En a storage de sp memory card wav Linear PCM LPCM 16 kHz to 48 kHz 8 bits and 16 bits USB storage de SD memory card vice aac adts mka m4a 8 kHz to 48 kHz Appendix Appendix OS DivX compatibility DVD R R SL R USB storage de DL DVD RW vice SD memory card Profile DivX version Tey ial Ver 3 11 Ver 4 x Ver 5 x Compatible audio codec MP3 Dolby Digital DivX files on the external storage device Bit rate MP3 8 kbps to 320 kbps CBR VBR USB SD cannet be claved Media CD R RW x pu ddy Sampling frequency 16 kHz to 48 kHz 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz MP3 for emphasis Notes This product is not compatible with the following DivX Ultra format DivX files without video data DivX files encoded with LPCM Linear PCM audio codec Depending on the file information composition such as the number of audio streams there may be a slight delay in the start of playback on discs If a file contains more than 4GB playback stops before the end Some special operations may be prohibited because of the composition of DivX files Files with high transfer rates may not be played back co
49. Touch DVD DivX Setup The following screen appears Video Setup Subtitle Language Audio Language Menu Language 7 Multi Angle TV Aspect 4 Touch DivX VOD The DivX VOD screen appears 5 Touch Deregistration Code Your eight digit deregistration code is dis played O Make a note of the code as you will need it when you deregister from a DivX VOD provider m Automatic playback of DVDs When a DVD disc with a DVD menu is in serted this product will cancel the menu auto matically and start playback from the first chapter of the first title O Some DVDs may not operate properly If this function is not fully operable turn this function off and start playback O This setting is available only when Disc is selected as the source 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order gt t The Video Setup screen appears 3 Touch DVD DivX Setup The following screen appears A Video Setup Subtitle Language Audio Lanquage Menu Language T Multi Angle TV Aspect 4 Touch DVD Auto Play repeatedly until the desired setting appears e Off default Turns the DVD Auto Play setting off e On Turns the DVD Auto Play setting on J En J ejd oapin y dn 6u a5 217 Chapter 35 Setting up the video player Setting the video signal for the rear view camera When you connect a r
50. Touch the following keys in the follow ing order ks gt The Bluetooth screen appears 3 Touch Invert Name The confirmation screen appears 4 Touch Yes O If the inversion fails Invert Name Error appears In such cases try again from the beginning O Inverting the names of your contacts from this product does not affect the data on your cellular phone Setting the private mode During a conversation you can switch to pri vate mode talk directly on your cellular phone buluoud 39 1j3 spuey buisn Touch the following keys to turn pri vate mode on or off 9 mE Talk directly on your mobile device 9 Private Hands free phoning Adjusting the other party s listening volume To maintain good sound quality this product can adjust the other party s listening volume If the volume is too loud or not loud enough use this function Touch the following key Switches between the three vo lume levels y Vol O This function can be performed even while talking on the phone O Settings can be stored for each device J Using the voice recognition function You can use the voice recognition function of iPhone or smartphone O When an iPhone running iOS 6 1 or higher is used Siri Eyes Free Mode is available with this product O For AVIC 8100NEX and AVIC 7100NEX users For using this function with a smartphone the device must be compatible with Android Auto and Mod
51. Touch the following keys in the follow ing order You can set whether to automatically switch to ee the navigation screen from the AV screen or the Application screen when your vehicle ap eN s i proaches a guidance point such as an inter section 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen The System screen appears 3 Touch AV Source Settings The following screen appears En 179 Chapter System MIXTRAX Settings Radio Settings SinusXM Settings f Tag Forwarding Bluetooth Audio 4 Touch Bluetooth Audio repeatedly until the desired setting appears e On default Activates the Bluetooth audio source e Off Deactivates the Bluetooth audio source m Setting the ever scroll When Ever Scroll is set to On recorded text information scrolls continuously in the display Set to Off if you prefer the informa tion to scroll just once 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ka gt EE The System screen appears 3 Touch Ever Scroll repeatedly until the desired setting appears e Off default Turns the ever scroll setting off e On Turns the ever scroll setting on Setting AV input You can use external video equipment such as portable players connected to this product with this setting 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 180 En 2 Touch the f
52. View Back Camera Input 2nd Camera Input r Reverse Gear Setting Parking Assist Guide 4 Touch 2nd Camera Input repeatedly until the desired setting appears e Off default Turns the second camera input setting off e On Turns the second camera input setting on O The confirmation message appears if set ting 2nd Camera Input to On while the AV source is on The AV source will turn off if Yes is selected and 2nd Camera Input will be set to On Select No to cancel setting 2nd Camera Input to On If On is selected AV Input is automati cally set to Camera cally set to Off 1 If Off is selected AV Input is automati Setting the reversed image setting for the second camera input image Second camera images are displayed reversed as mirror images on the front screen except when a second view camera that can output images in the correct direction is used You can set whether to reverse the second camera images to be displayed on the front screen O This setting is available only when you stop your vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake This function is available when 2nd Cam era Input is On or AV Input is set to Camera 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order ka gt A The System screen appears
53. amp buluoud 3a 1j3 spuey buisn Chapter ED Using hands free phoninc 6 Touch the following key The call ends Selecting anumber by alphabet search mode If many phone numbers are registered in the phone book you can search for phone num bers by alphabet search mode 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order 3 gt The Phone Book screen appears 3 Drag the Initial Search Bar to find an entry by the initial character of the name The alphabet corresponding to the current po sition on the Initial Search Bar is displayed 4 Release the Initial Search Bar at the de sired alphabet The Phone Book entries starting with that letter e g Ben Brian and Burt when B is selected will be displayed O To refine the search with a different letter touch Cancel 5 Touch an entry to display the phone number list of the entry The details screen of the phone book appears 6 Touch the phone number you want to dial The dial screen appears 7 Dialing starts O To cancel the call touch JA 82 En Ends the call 8 Touch the following key gt Ends the call The call ends Dialing from the history The most recent calls made dialed received and missed are stored in the call history list You can browse the call history list and call numbers from it 1 Press the HOME button to displ
54. be displayed Supported AV source You can play or use the following sources with this product e Radio FM AM 1 e HD Radio HD Radio tuner 2 e CD e ROM compressed audio or video files e DVD Video e Video CD The following sources can be played back or used by connecting an auxiliary device e USB e SD3 e iPod e My Vehicle e Pandora e Aha Radio e Bluetooth audio e SiriusXM Satellite Radio e AV input AV e AUX e HDMI 2 O 1 Available for AVIC 5100NEX g 2 Available for AVIC 8100NEX AVIC 7100NEX and AVIC 6100NEX O 3 Available for AVIC 8100NEX and AVIC 7100NEX m Displaying the AV operation screen 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 24 En 2 Touch the AV operation key m 10 31 AV operation key The AV operation screen appears Drive it Pioneer The Best Pops Displays the source list gt For details refer to Selecting a front source on the source list on page 25 2 Displays the Time and date setting screen gt For details refer to Setting the time and date on page 221 3 Displays the Setting menu screen 4 Recalls equalizer curves gt For details refer to Using the equalizer on page 202 Displays the Phone menu screen gt For details refer to Displaying the phone menu on page 80 6 Shows the navigation information The distance to the next guidance point the name of the
55. between the head of the listener and each speaker unit 2 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen Chapter Audio adjustments 33 3 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order ka gt KO The Audio screen appears 4 Touch Time Alignment The Time Alignment screen appears 5 Touch the following keys to select the listening position if necessary e Off Changes the listening position setting to off e Front Left Changes the listening position setting to front left e Front Right Changes the listening position setting to front right e Front Changes the listening position setting to front e All Changes the listening position setting to all O If you change the listening position setting the output levels of all the speakers will change in conjunction with the setting Selects the listening position 6 Touch the following keys to input the distance between the selected speaker and the listening position 0 0 inch to 200 0 inch is displayed as the distance to be corrected is increased or decreased e Front Left Changes the distance between the front left speaker and the selected listening position e Front Right Changes the distance between the front right speaker and the selected listening po sition e Rear Left Changes the distance between the rear left speaker and the selected listening position e Rear Right Changes the distance between th
56. broadcasting e Seek HD Only seeks stations from digital broad casting a Switching the reception mode If reception of a digital broadcast becomes weak the tuner automatically switches to the analog broadcast of the same frequency level by default If you want to avoid frequent auto matic switching change this setting to Off O This setting is available only when HD Radio is selected as the source 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ka gt EE The System screen appears 3 Touch AV Source Settings The following screen appears A System 7 MIXTRAX Settings Radio Settings SinusXM Settings Tag Forwarding Bluetooth Audio 4 Touch Radio Settings The following screen appears 102 En ED HD Radio reception A System Blending 5 Touch Blending repeatedly until the desired setting appears e On default Switches to the analog broadcast of the same frequency automatically e Off Does not switch to the analog broadcast of the same frequency automatically m Storing song information to an iPod iTunes Tagging gt For details refer to Storing song information to an iPod iTunes Tagging on page 221 Operating with the hardware buttons Press the TRK button You can move up or down the preset chan nels Press and hold the TRK button You can perform seek tuning Chapter
57. card 2 S The connected USB storage device Disconnect the USB storage device and do consumes more than maximum al not use it Turn the ignition switch to OFF lowable current then to ACC or ON and then connect a com pliant USB storage device Video resolution not sup Files that cannot be played on this Selecta file that can be played Page 245 ported product are included in the file Page 259 USB1 was disconnected for The USB connector or USB cable is Check that the USB connector or USB cable device protection Do notre short circuited is not caught in something or damaged insert this USB memory into the unit Press reset to restart USB memory USB2 was disconnected for device protection Do not re insert this USB memory into The USB interface cable for iPod Confirm that the USB interface cable for iPod The connected USB storage device Disconnect the USB storage device and do consumes more than maximum al not use it Turn the ignition switch to OFF lowable current then to ACC or ON and then connect a com pliant USB storage device the unit Press reset to restart Phone is short circuited iPhone or USB cable is not caught in some USB memory thing or damaged Audio Format not supported This type of file is not supported on Select a file that can be played Page 245 this product Page 259 iPod Message Cause Action Error 02 6X 9X DX iPod failure Disconnect the cable from the
58. current position as a Saved Location destination touch fy gt For details refer to Storing a location in Saved Location on page 51 Help Nearby Checks for POIs in your Surroundings The preset search categories are as follows e Car Repair e Health e Police e Gas Station Trip Monitor Checks the statistical data of your trips for example start time end time average speed etc gt For details refer to Recording your travel history on page 58 GPS Information Displays the GPS information screen with satellite position and signal strength infor mation diz ANOA YNOGe UO eEWLOJU Nyasn BuDP YD En 57 Chapter KOD Checking useful information about your trip e Fuel Consumption You can estimate the fuel cost to your desti nation by entering the fuel consumption in formation in the navigation system gt For details refer to Ca culating the fuel consumption on page 60 Recording your travel history Activating the trip logger enables you to re cord your driving history hereinafter called trip log You can review your trip log later O The trip logger is set so that it can be started manually by default You can change the settings of this function in order to save the log automatically gt For details refer to Trip Monitor on page 62 Activating trip logger temporarily One time activation is useful if you want to create a log only for a particula
59. default values are 18 00 start time and 6 00 end time The value can be changed in 15 minute steps Adjusting the picture You can adjust the picture for each source the Application screen and rear view camera A CAUTION For safety reasons you cannot use some of these functions while your vehicle is in motion To en able these functions you must stop in a safe place and apply the parking brake Refer to Im portant Information for the User a separate man ual 1 Display the screen you wish to adjust 2 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 3 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order ka gt Ef The System screen appears 4 Touch Picture Adjustment The following screen appears 2nd Camera ye Rear View Brightness Contrast Color Hue Dimmer Level 5 Touch any of the following keys to se lect the function to be adjusted Picture adjustment items are displayed e Brightness Adjusts the black intensity e Contrast Adjusts the contrast e Color Adjusts the color saturation e Hue Adjusts the tone of color which color is em ohasized red or green e Dimmer Level Adjusts the brightness of the display e Temperature Adjusts the color temperature resulting in a better white balance O You can adjust Hue only when the color system is set to NTSC f you touch Rear View or 2nd Camera the mode changes to the s
60. disc cannot be played on this product Unplayable File This type of file cannot be played on this product Skipped The inserted disc contains DRM protected files Protect All the files on the inserted disc are Replace the DVD with one bearing the correct region number Replace the disc with one that can be played on this product Select a file that can be played Page 245 Page 259 The protected files are skipped embedded with DRM The inserted disc contains expired DivX VOD content Files that cannot be played on this product are included in the file This DivX rental has expired Video resolution not sup ported Unable to write to flash mem The playback history for VOD con ory tents cannot be saved for some rea son Your device is not authorized This product s DivX registration to play this DivX protected code has not been authorized by the video DivX VOD contents provider DivX file s frame rate is more than 30 fps Audio Format not supported This type of file is not supported on this product Video frame rate not sup ported External storage device USB SD Message Cause Error 02 9X DX Communication failed Unplayable File This type of file cannot be played on this product Security for the connected external storage device USB SD is en abled The connected external storage de vice USB SD contains DRM pro tected files Skipped 232 En Replace t
61. during frame by frame playback m 108 En ED Playingadiss O O gt Slow motion playback This lets you slow down the playback speed 1 Touch and hold I gt until an arrow icon is displayed during playback The arrow icon is displayed and forward slow motion playback starts O To return to normal playback touch H 2 Touch I gt to adjust playback speed during slow motion playback Each time you touch IIb the speed changes in four steps in the following order 1 16 gt 1 8 gt 1 4 gt 1 2 There is no sound during slow motion play back T With some discs images may be unclear during slow motion playback O Reversed slow motion playback is not possi ble Returning to a specified scene When using a disc that has a point recorded that indicates where to return to the disc re turns to the specified point and starts play back from there This function cannot be used if a specified scene has not been preprogrammed on the disc O This function is available for DVD Video and Video CDs featuring PBC playback control only Touch the following key Returns to the specified point and starts playback from there O The specified point differs depending on the disc Chapter Playingadiss O g Resuming playback Bookmark The Bookmark function lets you resume play back from a selected scene the next time the disc is loaded Touch the
62. e Bus ing the items in saved locations and Maneuver restrictions and directional histories are deleted and all settings are constraints are taken into account when reset to their factory defaults m planning a route Roads are used only if access for buses is allowed Private roads resident only roads and walkways are excluded from routes e Taxi en 63 Chapter ED Customizing preferences of the navigation Maneuver restrictions and directional constraints are taken into account when planning a route Roads are used only if access for taxis is allowed Private roads resident only roads and walkways are excluded from routes e Truck Maneuver restrictions and directional constraints are taken into account when planning a route Only roads that allow truck access are included Private roads resident only roads and walkways are excluded from routes U turns are not used in routes turning around on a divided road is not consid ered a U turn for the purpose of this sys tem O To edit the name and estimated maximum speed of the selected vehicle profile touch ie O To add anew vehicle profile touch Add Profile Then select one of the vehicle types and set the name and estimated max imum speed Route Planning Method You can change the route planning method Route calculation can be optimized for differ ent situations and vehicle types by changing the planning
63. estab lished the touch panel key on the aha screen is activated 5 Use the touch panel keys on the screen to control Aha Radio gt For details refer to Using the touch panel keys on page 146 For smartphone users O Turn off the AVICSYNC App function for using Aha Radio with a smartphone if the smartphone is connected with the HDMI or Bluetooth selected for Connection in Smartphone Setup 1 Unlock your smartphone 2 Connect your smartphone 8100NEX 7100NEX 6100NEX Connect via Bluetooth or HDMI and Bluetooth gt For details of the Bluetooth connection refer to Registering your Bluetooth de vices on page 74 148 En O The cable connection method varies de pending on your device gt For details of the connections refer to the Installation Manual 5100NEX O Connect via Bluetooth gt For details of the Bluetooth connection refer to Registering your Bluetooth de vices on page 74 The cable connection method varies de pending on your device gt For details of the connections refer to the Installation Manual 3 Display the AV source selection screen gt For details of the operations refer to Dis playing the AV operation screen on page 24 4 Touch aha on the AV source selection screen When you touch aha this product will start establishing a Bluetooth connection After the connection is successfully estab lished the touch panel key on the aha
64. examples shown in this manual are those for AVIC 8100NEX The screens may vary according to the models How to use this manual Finding the operation procedure for what you want to do When you have decided what you want to do you can find the page you need from the Con tents Finding the operation procedure from a menu name If you want to check the meaning of an item displayed on screen you will find the neces sary page from the Display information at the end of this manual Conventions used in this manual Before moving on take a few minutes to read the following information about the conven tions used in this manual Familiarity with these conventions will help you greatly as you learn how to use your new equipment e Buttons on this product are described in ALL CAPITALS BOLD lettering e g HOME button MODE button e Menu items screen titles and functional components are described in bold with double quotation marks e g System screen or Audio screen e Touch panel keys that are available on the screen are described in bold in brackets e g Disc AV Source Settings e Extra information alternatives and other notes are presented in the following for mat e g O Ifthe home location has not been stored yet set the location first e Functions of other keys on the same screen are indicated with at the beginning of the description e g f you touch OK th
65. following key Bookmarks one point for each of up to five discs O If you try to memorize another point for the same disc the older bookmark will be over written by the new one To clear the bookmark on a disc touch and hold this key The oldest bookmark is replaced by the new one Operating the DVD menu using touch panel keys If items on the DVD menu appear the touch panel keys may overlay them If so select an item using those touch panel keys 1 Touch the following keys to select the desired menu item Selects the left menu item Selects the right menu item Selects the upper menu item Selects the lower menu item O If the touch panel keys for DVD menu selec tion disappear touch anywhere on the screen and then touch J The touch panel keys are displayed again 2 Touch the following key O The way to display the menu differs depend ing on the disc If you touch Fa the touch panel keys disap pear and the i icon is displayed Switching the multi angle DVD display With DVDs featuring multi angle recordings scenes shot from multiple angles you can switch among viewing angles during play back Touch the following key repeatedly until the desired setting appears Switches between viewing angles During the playback of a scene shot from multiple angles the o0 angle icon is displayed Turn the angle icon display on or off using the
66. following keys in the follow ing order kA gt B The Bluetooth screen appears 3 Touch BT Software Update 4 Touch Start The data transfer screen is displayed O Follow the on screen instructions to finish updating the Bluetooth software m Displaying the Bluetooth software version If this product fails to operate properly you may need to consult your dealer for repair In such cases you may be asked to specify the software version Perform the following proce dure to check the version on this unit 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order kA gt The Bluetooth screen appears 3 Touch Bluetooth Version Information The version of this product s Bluetooth mod ule appears JIA P Y OO SN g Le Hul BUUOD pue Hulia sIbay En 79 A CAUTION For your safety avoid talking on the phone as much as possible while driving If your cellular phone features Bluetooth tech nology this product can be connected to your cellular phone wirelessly Using this hands free function you can operate this product to make or receive phone calls This section de scribes how to set up a Bluetooth connection and how to operate a cellular phone featuring Bluetooth technology on this product For details about connectivity with the devices featuring Bluetooth wireless technology refer to the information on our website
67. hand gt For details refer to Setting the device con nection method on page 88 our iPhone or smartphone applications Content and functionality of compatible ap plications are the responsibility of the App providers In Android Auto usage is limited while driving with availability of functions and content determined by the App providers Android Auto allows access to applica tions other than those listed subject to lim itations while driving PIONEER IS NOT RESPONSIBLE AND DIS CLAIMS LIABILITY FOR THIRD PARTY NON PIONEER APPS AND CONTENT IN CLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY IN ACCURACIES OR INCOMPLETE INFORMATION Starting procedure When connecting an Android Auto compati ble device to this product you must select the method for connecting your device Settings are required according to the connected de VICE gt For details refer to Chapter 13 O Turn off the AVICSYNC App function for using Android Auto To achieve optimum usability of Android Auto set the driving position setting cor rectly according to the vehicle gt For details refer to Setting the driving po sition on page 139 1 Connect an Android Auto compatible device to this product via the separately sold USB interface cable for use with Android devices CD MU200 gt For details of the connections refer to the Installation Manual 2 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 3 Touch Android Auto The
68. iPhone with a 30 pin connector users 144 For iPhone with a Lightning connector users 144 Forsmartohone users 144 Selecting a Pandora station from the list 145 Creating astation 145 Operating with the hardware buttons 145 2 Using Aha Radio Using the touch panel keys 146 Reading the screen 147 Starting procedure 147 For iPhone with a 30 pin connector users 147 For iPhone with a Lightning connector users 147 Forsmartohone users 148 Operating with the hardware buttons 148 Using iDatalink Activating iDatalink Maestro 149 Updating the iDatalink Maestro module 149 Starting procedure 149 Hands free phone 151 Setting Bluetooth 151 Phone Book screen 152 History list screen 152 Dial screen 152 Dial confirmation screen 152 Using a Bluetooth audio player Using the touch panel keys 153 Reading the screen 154 Starting procedure 154 Selecting files from the file name list 155 Playing files in random order 155 Setting a repeat play range 155 Operating with the hardware buttons 155 27 Using the SiriusXxM satellite radio SiriuSXM satellite radio operations 156 Subscribing to the SiriusXM Satellite Radio service 156 Using the touch panel keys 156 Reading the screen 157 Starting procedure 158 Manual tuning 159 Selecting a preset channel from the preset channel list 159 Storing broadcast channels 159 Selecting a SiriusXM channel directly 159 Selecting a c
69. iPod Once the iPod s main menu is displayed reconnect the iPod and reset it Error 02 67 The iPod firmware version is old Update the iPod version iTunes tagging Message Cause Action Error 8D Built in FLASH ROM encountered Turn the ignition switch to OFF and then to an error ON Tag store failed Tag information cannot be stored in Try again this product Already stored This tag information is already Tag information can only be saved once for stored in memory any given song Tag information cannot be saved for the same song more than once En 233 Appendix Appendix Message Cause Action Memory full Connect iPod The tag information is successfully The tag information on this product is trans stored The flash memory of this ferred to the iPod automatically when an iPod product has become full is connected Memory full Tags not stored This product s flash memory used The tag information on this product is trans Connect iPod as the temporary storage area is ferred to the iPod automatically when an iPod full is connected iPod full Tags not transferred Memory used for tag information on Synchronize the iPod with iTunes and clean the iPod is full up the tagged playlist Tag transfer failed Reconnect This product s tag information can Check the iPod and try again your iPod not transfer to the iPod Bluetooth Message Cause Action Error 10 The power failed for the Bluetooth Turn the igniti
70. incorrectly replaced Replace only with the 2 BAND ESC same or equivalent type e Press to select the tuner band when e Do not handle the battery with metallic tools tuner is selected as a source e Do not store the battery with metallic objects e Press to cancel the control mode of func e f the battery leaks wipe the remote control tions completely clean and install a new battery e Press to switch between media file types e When disposing of used batteries comply when playing the following types of data with governmental regulations or environmen Disc tal public institutions rules that apply in your External storage device USB SD country area Use and care of the remote U5 9 the remore control Point the remote control in the direction of the control front panel to operate Installing the battery e The remote control may not function prop Slide the tray on the back of the remote con ity WICC SUNUGIN trol out and insert the battery with the plus Important and minus C poles aligned Properly e Do not store the remote control in high tem e When using for the first time pull out the peratures or direct sunlight film protruding from the tray Do not let the remote control fall onto the floor where it may become jammed under the brake or gas pedal m Chapter KD Basic operation Protecting your product against theft LUNDS ENBA The detachable faceplate can be detached from this product
71. key Displays the pop up menu for selecting a media file type to play in the external storage device USB SD 2 Touch the item you want to set e Music Switches the media file type to music com pressed audio e Video Switches the media file type to video e Photo Switches the media file type to still image JPEG data Setting the slideshow interval JPEG Tiles can be viewed as a slideshow on this product In this setting the interval be tween each image can be set Chapter Playing compressed still image files 19 O This setting is available during playback of the JPEG files 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order gt J The Video Setup screen appears 3 Touch Time Per Photo Slide The pop up menu appears 4 Touch the item you want to set e 10sec default JPEG images switch at intervals of 10 sec onds e sec JPEG images switch at intervals of 5 sec onds e 15sec JPEG images switch at intervals of 15 sec onds e Manual JPEG images can be switched manually m sajij ew jj1 s p ss adwo bulAe d Operating with the hardware buttons Press the TRK button You can skip files forward or backward Press and hold the TRK button You can search 10 JPEG files at a time O Ifthe number of files in the folder from the file currently being played to the first or last file is fewer th
72. key The preset channel list appears 2 Touch BSM to start a search A message appears While the message is dis played the six strongest broadcast frequen cies will be stored under the preset tuning keys 1 to 6 in order of their signal strength When this is complete the message disap pears Ifyou touch Cancel the storage process is canceled m Tuning into strong frequencies Local seek tuning allows you to only tune into those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception O This setting is available only when Radio is selected as the source 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ka gt M The System screen appears oipes y bulsn Chapter ED Using the radio 3 Touch AV Source Settings The following screen appears System MIXTRAX Settings Radio Settings SinusXM Settings T Tag Forwarding Bluetooth Audio 4 Touch Radio Settings 5 Touch Local The pop up menu appears 6 Touch the item you want to set FM Off default Turns the seek tuning setting off e Levelt Sets the level of sensitivity for FM to level 1 e Level2 Sets the level of sensitivity for FM to level 2 e Level3 Sets the level of sensitivity for FM to level 3 e Level4 Sets the level of sensitivity for FM to level 4 e Off default Turns the seek tuning setting off e Levelt
73. line Offer Freeway Services You may need to stop by a gas station or a res taurant during your journey gt For details refer to Frequently shown route events on page 34 Services Displayed You can select the service types displayed for the freeway exits or service stations Choose from the POI categories Automatic Overview When selected the map zooms out to show an overview of the surrounding area if the next route event maneuver is far When you get close to the event the map returns to the nor mal map view Signposts Whenever adequate information is available lane information similar to the real ones on road signs above the road is displayed at the top of the map You can turn this feature on or off Junction View If you are approaching a freeway exit or a com plex intersection and the necessary informa tion is available the map is replaced with a 3D view of the junction Tunnel View When entering tunnels the surface roads and buildings can be distracting This feature shows a generic picture of a tunnel instead of the map A top down overview of the tunnel and remaining distance are also displayed Offer Congestion Detour on Highways When you slow down while driving on a free way due to a traffic congestion this navigation system offers you a detour using the next exit The message shows you the distance to the exit and the difference in the distance and esti mated time compared to the
74. map e Off No traffic icons or lines indicating the traf fic flow are shown e Color Only the line relevant traffic incidents are shown on the map e Color And icon Icons for the relevant traffic incidents and lines indicating the traffic flow are shown on the map Show Free Traffic Flow As Well You can select whether to receive information on smooth traffic flow Offer Detour if it Saves at Least You can set the minimum time to be saved when having the system suggest a detour route If the estimated time saved by the planned detour avoiding the traffic incidents is more than the set time the system suggests the new detour route Otherwise the new route is not Suggested Confirm Detours Manually You can enable or disable the manual confir mation of every recalculation Weather settings C For details refer to the manual for AVICSYNC on our website Fuel settings O For details refer to the manual for AVICSYNC on our website Trip Monitor settings Enable Auto Saving gt For details refer to Setting the trip logger on page 59 Save Track Log gt For details refer to Setting the trip logger on page 59 Online Services settings You can use the Online Services settings to enable or disable connected online features For details refer to the manual for AVICSYNC on our website gt For details refer to Expanding the use of the navigation functions on page 71 uoi epineu
75. menu screen 2 Numeric keys 2 Touch the following keys in the follow 3 Enter key ing order Bluetooth Audio The System screen appears 3 Touch OEM Settings O Functions and displays vary depending on the connected type of iDatalink adapter and the vehicle model Displays the source list gt For details refer to Se ecting a front source on the source list on page 25 2 Displays the Time and date setting screen gt For details refer to Setting the time and date on page 221 3 Displays the Setting menu screen 4 Recalls equalizer curves gt For details refer to Using the equalizer on page 202 5 Selects a file from the list 6 Switches the text display between tag information and file folder information D Displays the Phone menu screen gt For details refer to Displaying the phone menu on page 80 Switches to the next or previous page of touch panel keys Skips files forward or backward Switches between playback and pause Chapter 25 Using iDatalink Phone Book screen Phone Book CROC ROM Switches to the voice recognition func tion 2 Switches to the phone book list 3 Switches to the missed received and dia led call lists 4 Switches the mode to enter the phone number directly Functions and displays vary depending on the connected type of iDatalink adap ter and the vehicle model 6 Displays the Setting menu screen O The Conn
76. off e On Turns the back camera input setting on Setting the polarity of the rear view camera 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ka gt Ef The System screen appears 3 Touch Camera settings The following screen appears 4 System Camera View Back Camera Input 2nd Camera Input 7 Reverse Gear Setting Parking Assist Guide 4 Touch Reverse Gear Setting repeat edly until the desired setting appears e Battery default When the polarity of the connected lead is positive while the shift lever is in the RE VERSE R position En s6ul 9s Wia sAs Chapter e Ground 4 Touch Back Camera Reverse Video re When the polarity of the connected lead is peatedly until the desired setting appears negative while the shift lever is in the RE e Off default VERSE R position Does not reverse the rear view camera When the shift lever is aligned to the RE images VERSE R position after setting the rear view e On camera the rear view image appears Reverses the rear view camera images m Setting the reversed image Setting the camera for display for the rear view image Camera View mode Rear view camera images are displayed re versed as mirror images on the front screen except when a rear view camera that can out put images in the correct direction is used You can set whether to reverse the rear view camera images to b
77. panel could be damaged Notes on using the LCD panel A WARNING e Keep hands and fingers clear of this product when opening closing or adjusting the LCD panel Be especially cautious of children s hands and fingers e Do not use with the LCD panel left open If the LCD panel is left open it may result in injury in the event of an accident Chapter Basic operation 02 A CAUTION Do not open or close the LCD panel by force This may cause a malfunction e Do not operate this product until the LCD panel has completely opened or closed If this product is operated while the LCD panel is opening or closing the LCD panel may stop at that angle for safety e Do not place a glass or can on the open LCD panel Doing so may break this product m Adjusting the LCD panel angle 8100NEX 1 Press the 4 button The following screen appears SIL A L x 2 Touch the following keys to adjust the angle of the LCD panel E Returning the panel to the upright S position 3 Touch the following key Returns to the previous screen O The adjusted angle of the LCD panel will be memorized and the LCD panel will automa tically return to that angle the next time the LCD panel is opened or closed Laying the panel down Inserting ejecting connecting media A CAUTION Do not insert anything other than a disc into the disc loading slot Do not insert anything other than SD memory cards into the SD c
78. previous screen Shows the total length of the route and ap proximate required time for the route Displays the shortcuts e Route Preferences Shows the route setting preferences If you Change the preferences the route is recalculated e Itinerary Shows all transit points in detail Touch a transit point to show its position on the map If you touch Avoid on the map screen the route is recalculated avoiding the transit point as much as possible e Save Route Saves the displayed route The saved route can be recalled later e Places Along Route Searches for POls along the displayed route Touch the POI to show the Map Location screen and also set the POI as a waypoint e Simulation You can run a simulation of the naviga tion for the current route as a demon stration gt For details refer to Checking route al ternatives on page 47 Canceling the current route guidance If you no longer need to travel to your destina tion follow the steps below to cancel the route guidance 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 2 Touch the following key Displays the navigation menu on the Map screen 3 Touch Cancel Route or Delete Way point The message screen appears 4 Touch one of the options If there are no waypoints on the route touch Cancel Route to cancel the route If there are waypoints on the route touch Cancel Route to cancel the route Touch Delete Waypo
79. satellites orbiting the Earth Each of the satellites which orbit at a height of 68 900 000 feet 21 000 km continually broad casts radio signals giving time and position in formation This ensures that signals from at least three can be picked up from any open area on the ground s surface The accuracy of the GPS information depends on how good the reception is When the sig nals are strong and reception is good GPS can determine latitude longitude and altitude for accurate positioning in three dimensions But if signal quality is poor only two dimen sions latitude and longitude can be obtained and positioning errors are somewhat greater Positioning by dead reckoning The built in sensor in the navigation system also calculates your position The current loca tion is measured by detecting driving distance with the speed pulse the turning direction with the gyro sensor and inclination of the road with the G sensor The built in sensor can even calculate changes of altitude and correct the discrepan cies in the distance traveled caused by driving along winding roads or up slopes If you use this navigation system with connect ing the speed pulse the system will become more accurate than no connection of speed 236 En pulse So you connect the speed pulse without fail to get the accuracy of positioning O The position of the speed detection circuit vary depending on the vehicle model For det
80. screen is activated C It the AVICSYNC App function is not turned off a message confirming whether to turn off the AVICSYNC App function appears for smartphones connected with HDMI or Bluetooth selected for Connection in Smartphone Setup 5 Use the touch panel keys on the screen to control Aha Radio gt For details refer to Using the touch panel keys on page 146 Operating with the hardware buttons Press the TRK button You can skip contents forward or backward m Chapter Using iDatalink 25 By connecting the optional iDatalink adapter you can access the satellite radio source pro vided for the vehicle and the vehicle informa tion can be displayed on this product Important e For information on installing the iDatalink adapter refer to the operating manual of the iDatalink adapter e Arter installing the iDatalink adapter be sure to check the operations e For details about vehicle models that are com patible with the iDatalink adapter refer to the information on our website e Functions and displays vary depending on the vehicle model For details of the functions available for each model refer to the informa tion on our website e The iDatalink list screen can be scrolled up or down by page e Please note that the device number of this product and a computer with internet access are required to program your Maestro RR module For troubleshooting information about iDat
81. set the auto adjusted equalizer to suit the vehicle s acoustics To use this function the vehicle s acoustics must be measured in advance gt For details of the operations refer to Adjust ing the equalizer curve automatically Auto EQ on page 203 O To manually adjust the equalizer curve set Auto EQ amp TA to Off 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow E BD The Audio screen appears 3 Touch Auto EQ amp TA repeatedly until the desired setting appears e Off default Turns the Auto EQ amp IA setting off e On Turns the Auto EQ amp TA setting on m Adjusting the equalizer curve automatically Auto EQ By measuring the vehicle s acoustics the equalizer curve can be adjusted automatically to suit the vehicle interior A warnine A loud tone noise may be emitted from the speakers when measuring the vehicle s acous tics Never perform Auto EQ measurement while driving A CAUTION e Thoroughly check the conditions before per forming Auto EQ as the speakers may be da maged if this is performed under the following conditions When the speakers are incorrectly con nected For example when a rear speaker is connected as a Subwoofer output sjuaujsnipe oipny Chapter E9 Audio adjustments When a speaker is connected to a power amp delivering output higher than the speaker s maximum input power capabil
82. some Bluetooth devices no specific ac tion is necessary to activate Bluetooth wire less technology For details refer to the instruction manual of your devices 2 Use the Bluetooth setting in the device to pair this product with the device O Ifa PIN code input is required enter a PIN code The default PIN code is 0000 When the device is successfully registered the connection settings are made from the device O If registration fails repeat the procedure from the beginning Connecting to a Bluetooth device automatically If this function is set to on a connection be tween your Bluetooth device and this product will take place automatically as soon as the two devices are less than a few meters apart Initially this function is set to on 1 If this function is set to on a connection with the last connected Bluetooth device will be established automatically when the ignition switch is turned on 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order ks The Bluetooth screen appears 3 Touch Auto Connect repeatedly until the desired setting appears e On default Turns the automatic connection on 76 En e Off Turns the automatic connection off If your Bluetooth device is ready for a Bluetooth wireless connection a connection to this product will automatically be estab lished If connection fails Bluetooth auto connec t
83. song name artist station IDs HD2 HD3 Channel Guide and other relevant data streams HD2 HD3 Adjacent to traditional main stations are extra local FM channels These HD2 HD3 Channels provide new origi nal music as well as deep cuts into traditional genre iTunes Tagging iTunes Tagging provides you the opportunity to discover a wide range of content and the means to tag that con tent for later review and purchase from the iTunes Store U0 Artist Experience S Visual information related to content being played on 2 your HD Radio receiver such as Album Art historical o photographs still art from live broadcasts among other T related content A Om fe gt Using the touch panel keys Displays the source list gt For details refer to Selecting a front source on the source list on page 25 2 Selects a band gt For details refer to Selecting a band on page 99 3 Displays the Time and date setting screen gt For details refer to Setting the time and date on page 221 4 Displays the Setting menu screen 5 Recalls equalizer curves gt For details refer to Using the equalizer on page 202 6 Switches the text display between the main channel and multicast channels gt For details refer to Reading the screen on page 98 D Displays the Phone menu screen gt For details refer to Displaying the phone menu on page 80 Stores song information to an
84. storage de vice USB SD in the Music Browse mode 5 Uses Sound Retriever function gt For details refer to Setting the Sound Retriever function on page 222 Plays files in random order gt For details refer to Playing files in ran dom order on page 114 Sets a repeat play range gt For details refer to Setting a repeat play range on page 115 Selects the previous folder or the next folder Displays the category list including the selected item En sajlj OIPNe passaidwiod bulAe d 411 Chapter Playing compressed audio files O This function is available only when playing Tiles in an external storage de vice USB SD in the Music Browse mode m Reading the screen Example USB MIXTRAX A Drive it S3 S Aki The Best N Rock Current file information Music Browse mode e Song title File name Shows the title of the song currently playing when available If the title of a song is not available the file name ap pears fi Artist name Shows the artist name for the song cur rently playing when available No Name is displayed if there is no corre sponding information e J Album title Folder name Shows the title of the album of the cur rent file when available If the title of the album is not available the folder name appears 4 Genre Shows the genre of the current file when available No Genre is dis played if there is n
85. the application on the connected device O When you touch the display in this func tion Don t Touch mark appears on the upper right corner of the screen 1 Connect your smartphone to this pro duct via the separately sold App Connectiv ity Kit CD AH200 O The cable connection method varies de pending on your device gt For details of the connections refer to the Installation Manual 2 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 138 En our iPhone or smartphone applications 3 Touch APPS The image in your smartphone appears on the screen 4 Launch an application on your smart phone An image of the application appears on the screen 5 Press the HOME button to return to the Top menu screen Using Android Auto 7100NEX You can control applications for a smartphone directly from the screen Android Auto In Android Auto you can operate applica tions with finger gestures such as tapping dragging scrolling or flicking on the screen of this product O Android Auto may not be available in your country or region For details about Android Auto please refer to the Google support site http support google com androidauto O This function is available for the Android Auto compatible device only O The compatible finger gestures vary de pending on the application for a smart phone To use Android Auto set Mode in Smart phone Setup to Android Auto before
86. the elapsed playing time within the current file when available 4 Current file information If the connected Bluetooth audio player fea tures AVRCP 1 3 the following file information will be displayed e Track title Shows the title of the track currently playing when available EJ Artist name Shows the name of the artist for the track currently playing when available e J Album title Shows the title of the album of the cur rent file when available e PZ Genre Shows the genre of the current file when available 154 En O In the following cases file information will only be displayed after a file starts or resumes playing Bluetooth audio player compatible with AVRCP1 3 is connected and the playback is started by the operation on the device Another file is selected while play back is paused Starting procedure 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow A M The System screen appears 3 Touch AV Source Settings The following screen appears System MIXTRAX Settings Radio Settings SinusXM Settings f Tag Forwarding Bluetooth Audio 4 Confirm that Bluetooth Audio is turned on O The default setting is On 5 Display the AV source selection screen gt For details of the operations refer to Dis playing the AV operation screen on page 24 6 Touch Bluetooth Audio on the AV sou
87. the keyboard 8 Touch the POI you want The searched location appears on the Map screen En 39 f you touch fj you can change the sort method of the results 9 Touch Select as Destination on the Map Location screen gt For details on the operations in the Map Location screen refer to Using the Map Location screen on page 45 After touching Select as Destination the Route Summary screen appears and count down begins When the countdown ends the guidance automatically starts If the screen is touched anywhere during the countdown the countdown stops and the screen will stay as it iS gt For details on the operations in the Route Summary screen refer to Checking route information and preferences on page 48 10 Touch Start Navigation Your navigation system starts the route gul dance gt For details of the route guidance refer to Understanding the route guidance on page 34 Searching for providers nearby that offer emergency or roadside assistance services IMPORTANT Never use this product to route to hospitals police stations or similar facilities in an emer gency Stop using any functions relating to the hands free phoning and please call the appro priate emergency number You can search for locations that provide emergency or roadside assistance in the sur rounding areas O This information does not necessarily cor respond to actual information U
88. the list 3 Current time and date 4 Album artwork Shows the artwork for the current song when available O If the album artwork cannot be ac quired the station logo is displayed If the station logo cannot be acquired either a preinstalled image is displayed iTunes tagging song status indicator Shows the status of the song information stored in this product O The icon is displayed on all operation screens of AV sources Indicator Meaning Appears when the song information tag is stored in this product Appears when the song information tag is being transferred to an iPod 6 iTunes tagging indicator Indicates songs that are capable of iTunes tag ging O The icon is displayed on all operation screens of AV sources Indicator Meaning Appears when this product receives an iTunes song tag that can be stored and then downloaded to an iPod for later purchase e Tag Flashes when this product is storing song tag information Chapter HD Radio reception 15 D Signal type indicator Shows the type of signal currently being re ceived If a digital broadcast is being received appears Otherwise appears HD Radio indicator Shows that HD Radio station information is being received 9 Multicasting indicator Shows the number of multicast channels in the current frequency Frequency indicator di Preset number indicator Shows the selected preset item Starting procedure
89. the media file type When playing a digital media containing a mixture of various media file types you can switch between media file types to play 1 Touch the following key Displays the pop up menu for selecting a media file type to play on the disc 2 Touch the item you want to set e Music Switches the media file type to music com pressed audio e Video Switches the media file type to video e CD DA Switches the media file type to CD audio data CD DA Searching for the part you want to play You can use the search function to find the part you want to play O For DVD Videos you can select Title title Chapter chapter or 10Key numeric key pad O For Video CDs you can select Track track or 10Key numeric keypad 10Key numeric keypad is available for Video CDs featuring PBC playback con trol only O Chapter search and time search are not available when disc playback has been stopped 1 Touch the following key Displays the screen for direct num ber search 2 Touch Title title Chapter chapter 10Key numeric keypad or Track track 3 Touch 0 to 9 to input the desired number O To cancel an input number touch C To cancel the input numbers touch and hold C 4 Touch the following key Registers the numbers and starts playback Operating the DVD menu You can operate the DVD menu by touching the menu item on the screen direc
90. the previous or next event m Checking the traffic incidents on the map Traffic event information can be displayed on the map 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 2 Touch the following key I Displays the navigation menu on the Map screen 3 Touch Traffic The Traffic Summary screen appears 4 Touch Traffic Map The Current Traffic Map screen appears A Current Traffic Map 14 Quai De Gesvres Road segments affected by traffic incidents are displayed in an alternate color on the map and small symbols above the road show the nature of the incident The traffic congestion lines indicate the de gree of the congestion by color m DINL UOI eUNOjUI D122 W13 Je 1 HUIAIDI Y Chapter When traffic incidents occur on your route The notification icon shows the status of traffic information reception My ty es Indicates that there are no traffic incidents in your coverage area 7 Indicates that information on traf fic incidents are being received Indicates that there are no signifi cant traffic incidents on your route Indicates that there are significant traffic incidents on your route The icon shows the type of the next traffic incident 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 2 Touch the relevant traffic event icon Pine St Shasta St 44 Traffic notification icon The Traffic Summary screen appears Y
91. timing that the dimmer function is to be turned on 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ka gt A The System screen appears 3 Touch Dimmer Settings The following screen appears T System Dimmer Trigger En 187 s6ul asS W JZS S Chapter 4 Touch Dimmer Trigger The pop up menu appears 5 Touch the item you want to set e Auto default Activates the dimmer function when the ve hicle s headlights are on nighttime e Manual Enables to set whether to activate the dim mer function e Time Enables to set the duration of time for the dimmer function to be active O If Manual is selected set whether to acti vate the dimmer function gt For details refer to Setting whether to ac tivate the dimmer function on page 188 O It Time is selected specify the duration for the dimmer function to be active gt For details refer to Setting the duration of time for the dimmer function to be ac tive on page 188 Setting whether to activate the dimmer function You can set whether to activate the dimmer function at nighttime O This function is available only when Dim mer Trigger is set to Manual gt For details refer to Setting the dimmer function on page 187 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ka gt A The Sys
92. to discourage theft as de scribed below A CAUTION e Do not expose the detachable faceplate to ex cessive shock or disassemble it e Never grip the buttons tightly or use force when removing or attaching the detachable faceplate e Keep the detachable faceplate out of reach of small children to prevent them trom placing it in their mouths e After removing the detachable faceplate keep it in a safe place so it is not scratched or da maged e Do not expose the detachable faceplate to di rect sunlight and high temperatures e When removing or attaching the detachable faceplate do so after turning off the ignition switch ACC OFF Removing the detachable faceplate O This product cannot be operated while the detachable faceplate is removed trom this product 1 Press the button C146 En When you release your finger the bottom of the detachable taceplate separates slightly from this product 2 Gently grip the bottom of the detach able faceplate and slowly pull it outward Detachable faceplate Attaching the detachable faceplate 1 Slide the detachable faceplate all the way into this product Make sure the detachable faceplate is se curely connected to the mounting hooks of this product 2 Push the lower part of the detachable faceplate until you hear a click If you fail to successfully attach the detach able faceplate to this product try again but be careful not to force it as the
93. to save the time and effort used on re entering this information Saved Location can include your home lo cation workplace and places you have al ready registered Storing your home and your workplace location You can store one home location and one workplace location You can change the stored information later Also routes to stored loca tions can be calculated easily by touching the corresponding key 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 2 Touch the following key Displays the navigation menu on the Map screen 3 Touch the following key Displays the Saved Location P screen 4 Touch Home or Work and then touch OK When you have already stored your home or workplace touch Home or Work to show the location on the Map Location screen 5 Search for a location gt For details refer to Chapter 5 6 Touch Save Location The cursor position has been stored Storing your favorite locations You can store a frequently visited location such as a relative s home to allow easy rout ing 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 2 Touch the following key Displays the navigation menu on the Map screen 3 Touch the following key Displays the Saved Location screen 4 Touch Add Location 5 Search for a location gt For details refer to Chapter 5 6 Touch Save Location 7 Enter the name if needed an
94. vo 2215 Oriya wo 2315 Panjabi xh 2408 Polish yo 2515 Pashto zh 2608 Portuguese zu 2621 Quechua Romansh Rundi Romanian Russian Kinyarwanda Sanskrit Sindhi Sango Serbo Croat Sinhala Slovak Slovenian Samoan Shona Somali Albanian Serbian Swati Sotho Sundanese Swedish Swahili Tamil Telugu Tajik Thai Tigrinya Turkmen Tagalog Tswana Tonga Turkish Tsonga Tatar Twi Ukrainian Urdu Uzbek Vietnamese Volapuk Wolof Xhosa Yoruba Chinese Zulu J ejd o p a y dn bul a5 Chapter 36 Favorite menu Registering your favorite menu items in short 2 Touch the following keys in the follow cuts allows you to quickly jump to the regis ing order tered menu screen by a simple touch on the Favorites screen e gt x O Up to 12 menu items can be registered in the favorite menu The Favorites screen appears Creating a shortcut 3 Touch and hold the star icon of the fa g vorite menu you want to remove 1 Touch the HOME button to display the The selected menu is removed from the Fa Top menu screen vorites screen 2 Touch the following key Displays the Setting menu screen 3 Touch the star icon of the menu item that you want to add to the favorite menu The star icon for the selected menu is filled in m o cancel the registration touch the star icon in the menu column again m Selecting a shortcut 1 Press the HOME button to display the To
95. with the first character including extension for the file and folder name Depending on the display area this product may try to display them with a re duced font size However the maximum number of the characters that you can dis play varies according to the width of each character and of the display area Folder selection sequence or other opera tions may be altered depending on the en coding or writing software Regardless of the length of blank section between the songs of original recording compressed audio discs play with a short pause between songs Appendix Appendix OS Example of a hierarchy The following figure is an example of the tier structure in the disc The numbers in the fig ure indicate the order in which folder numbers are assigned and the order to be played back Folder J File Level 3 Level 4 Level 1 Level 2 Notes e This product assigns folder numbers The user cannot assign folder numbers e f there is a folder that does not contain any playable file the folder itself will display in the folder list but you cannot check any files in the folder A blank list will appear Also these folders will be skipped without display ing the folder number m Bluetooth 3 Bluetooth e The Bluetooth word mark and logos are re gistered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc and any use of such marks by PIONEER CORPORATION is under license Other trademarks and trade name
96. 1 cy 0325 Welsh In 1214 da 0401 Danish lo 1215 de 0405 German It 1220 dz 0426 Dzongkha Iv 1222 el 0512 Greek mg 1307 en 0514 English mi 1309 eo 0515 Esperanto mk 1311 es 0519 Spanish ml 1312 et 0520 Estonian mn 1314 eu 0521 Basque mo 1315 fa 0601 Persian mr 1318 fi 0609 Finnish ms 1319 fj 0610 Fijian mt 1320 fo 0615 Faroese my 1325 fr 0618 French na 1401 fy 0625 Western Frisian ne 1405 ga 0701 Irish nl 1412 gd 0704 Scot Gaelic no 1415 gl 0712 Galician oc 1503 gn 0714 Guarani om 1513 gu 0721 Gujarati or 1518 ha 0801 Hausa pa 1601 hi 0809 Hindi pl 1612 hr 0818 Croatian ps 1619 hu 0821 Hungarian pt 1620 hy 0825 Armenian qu 1721 ia 0901 Interlingua rm 1813 Two letter ELET code input code Interlingue rn 1814 Inupiaq ro 1815 Indonesian ru 1821 Icelandic rw 1823 Italian sa 1901 Hebrew sd 1904 Japanese sg 1907 Yiddish sh 1908 Javanese si 1909 Georgian sk 1911 Kazakh sl 1912 Greenlandic sm 1913 Central Khmer sn 1914 Kannada so 1915 Korean sq 1917 Kashmiri sr 1918 Kurdish ss 1919 Kirghiz st 1920 Latin su 1921 Lingala sv 1922 Lao sw 1923 Lithuanian ta 2001 Latvian te 2005 Malagasy tg 2007 Maori th 2008 Macedonian ti 2009 Malayalam tk 2011 Mongolian tl 2012 Moldavian tn 2014 Marathi to 2015 Malay tr 2018 Maltese ts 2019 Burmese tt 2020 Nauru tw 2023 Nepali uk 2111 Dutch ur 2118 Norwegian uz 2126 Occitan vi 2209 Oromo
97. 2 02 Basic operation Checking part names and functions 13 Remote control 14 Use and care of the remote control 15 Installing the battery 15 Using the remote control 15 Protecting your product against theft 16 Removing the detachable faceplate 16 Attaching the detachable faceplate 16 Notes on using the LCD panel 16 Adjusting the LCD panel angle 17 Inserting ejecting connecting media 17 Inserting and ejecting a disc 17 Inserting and ejecting an SD memory card 18 Connecting and disconnecting an iPod 19 Plugging and unplugging a USB storage device 19 Startup and termination 19 On first time startup 19 C2 en Regular startup 20 Amessage about the map database 20 Turning off the display 20 When the Application screen is available 20 When the Application screen is not available 20 How to use the screens 22 Switching screens using the touch panel keys 22 Switching screens using the hardware buttons 23 Supported AV source 24 Displaying the AV operation screen 24 Selecting a front source on the AV source selection screen 25 Selecting a front source on the source list 25 Selectingarearsource 25 Turning off the AV source 25 Changing the display order of source icons 25 Changing the display order of source keys 26 Using the touch panel 26 Using the common touch panel keys 26 Operating list screens 27 Operating the time bar 27 Operating t
98. 2 NTFS x ipu ddy Maximum number of 700 1500 folders Maximum number of 3 500 15000 files Pavane tiit MP3 WMA AAC DivX MPEG 1 MPEG 2 MP3 WMA AAC WAV FLAC H 264 ayable Tile Types MPEG 4 MPEG 2 MPEG 4 WMV FLV MKV JPEG Notes e Maximum playback time of audio file stored in the disc 60h e Maximum playback time of audio file stored on an external storage device USB SD 7 5 h 450 minutes MP3 compatibility DVD R R SL R USB storage de CD R RW DL DVD RW vice Bit rate 8 kbps to 320 kbps CBR VBR Sainplinateauency 16 kHz to 48 kHz 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz Bisse AR Kite for emphasis Media SD memory card ID3 tag ID3 tag Ver 1 0 1 1 2 2 2 3 ID3 tag Ver 1 0 1 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 Notes e Ver 2 x of ID3 tag is prioritized when both Ver 1 x and Ver 2 x exist e This product is not compatible with the following MP3i MP3 interactive mp3 PRO m3u playlist Appendix MD Appendx SSOC S S SC C S S S S WMA compatibility DVD R R SL R DL DVD RW Media CD R RW vie storage de Sp memory card 5 Kops to 320 Kops CBR VBR Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz Note This product is not compatible with the following Windows Media Audio 9 Professional Lossless Voice WAV compatibility DVD R R SL R Media DL DVD RW CD R RW File extension Format WAV files on the CD R RW DVD R RW R Sampling frequency SL R DL cannot be played Quantization bits
99. 3 Information on each option of Settings 63 Route Preferences settings 63 Sound settings 65 Warnings settings 66 Navigation Map settings 66 Regional settings 68 Display settings 69 Traffic settings 69 Weather settings 69 Fuel settings 69 Trip Monitor settings 69 Online Services settings 69 Usage Reports settings 70 Setting the alert point warnings 70 Expanding the use of the navigation functions 71 Be sure to read before you use AVICSYNC function 71 What is the AVICSYNC App 72 Compatibility and connectivity 72 AVICSYNC compatibility 72 Preparations before using the AVICSYNC function 73 Getting the map update 73 D Registering and connecting a Bluetooth device Preparing communication devices 74 Registering your Bluetooth devices 74 C4 en Searching for nearby Bluetooth devices 74 Pairing from your Bluetooth devices 75 Connecting to a Bluetooth device automatically 76 Deleting a registered device 76 Connecting a registered Bluetooth device manually 77 Switching visibility 77 Entering the PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection 77 Displaying the Bluetooth address 78 Clearing the Bluetooth memory 78 Updating Bluetooth software 78 Displaying the Bluetooth software version 79 12 Using hands free phoning Displaying the phone menu 80 Touch panel keys 80 Readin
100. 4 Touch the following key 5 Touch the desired external storage de vice USB SD The following screen appears Displays the list of the splash screens stored on the external storage device USB SD 4 Photol 6 Touch the image to use as the splash screen from the list The image is set as the splash screen O You can delete the imported image and re store the setting on the splash screen to the default by touching and holding the custom key m Replicating the settings Exporting Theme settings You can export settings you have made on the Theme screen to an external storage device USB SD These settings can be exported se parately O This setting is available only when you stop your vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake O If multiple external storage devices are con nected to this product the order of priority for the targets that the Theme settings are exported to is as follows M SD memory card for AVIC 8100NEX and AVIC 7100NEX 2 USB storage device that is connected to USB port 1 3 USB storage device that is connected to USB port 2 A CAUTION Do not turn off the engine while exporting the set tings 1 Insert the SD memory card into the SD card slot or plug the USB storage device into the USB connector gt For details refer to Plugging in a USB sto rage device on page 19 gt For details refer to nserting and ejecting an SD memory card on pa
101. 5 Release the Initial Search Bar at the de sired alphabet The items whose initial character is the se lected alphabet are displayed 6 Touch the title of the list that you want to play Repeat this operation until you find the de sired song or video 7 Start playback of the selected list O Depending on the generation or version of the iPod some functions may not be avail able O You can play playlists created with the MusicSphere application The application is available on our website Chapter CUsinganiPod CS O Playlists that you created with the O Ifyou touch Play More Like This when MusicSphere application are displayed in the menu item is active songs similar to abbreviated form m the current song will be played back O Ifyou touch Play More Like This when the menu item is highlighted the function Using iTunes Radio will turn off sce O The operation result depends on the iPod O This function is only available when using iPod function with an iPhone 6 Plus iPhone 6 iPhone 5s iPhone 5c iPhone 5 Setting the current song not to or iPod touch 5th generation be played back again 1 Touch the following keys in the follow You can set the current song not to be played ing order back again 1 Touch the following key gt pp ma amp Di isplays the pop up menu T 2 Touch Radio D 3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen 2 Touch Never Play This Song o to control your iPod
102. 6 Adding waypoints 47 Checking route alternatives 47 Checking detour routes 48 Checking route information and preferences 48 Canceling the current route guidance 49 Watching the simulation of the route 50 D Registering and editing locations and routes Storing a location in Saved Location 51 Storing your home and your workplace location 51 Storing your favorite locations 51 Editing stored locations 51 Storing a route in Saved Routes 52 Editing the stored route 53 Renaming stored routes 53 Deleting stored routes 53 Saving a location as an alert point 53 Editing the stored alert points 54 D Receiving real time traffic information TMC Viewing the traffic list 55 Checking the traffic incidents on the map 55 When traffic incidents occur on your route 56 Turning the traffic information on oroff 56 D Checking useful information about your trip Checking useful information 57 Recording your travel history 58 Activating trip logger temporarily 58 Browsing the trip log 58 Setting the trip logger 59 En 3 Editing a trip log 59 Using the Trio Computer mode 59 Calculating the fuel consumption 60 Setting the initial odometer value 60 Entering the fuel consumption information 60 Setting the car maintenance schedule 61 10 Customizing preferences of the navigation Customizing the navigation settings 62 Restoring the default settings 6
103. 77 Selecting songs not to be played 177 Specifying the playback portion 178 Setting the flash pattern 178 C8 En 32 System settings Navigation info window 179 Setting automatic switching to the navigation screen 179 Activating the Bluetooth audio source 179 Setting the ever scroll 180 Setting AV input 180 Setting the rear view camera 180 Setting rear view camera activation 181 Setting the polarity of the rear view camera 181 Setting the reversed image display for the rear view image 182 Setting the camera for Camera View mode 182 Displaying the parking assist guidelines 183 Setting guidelines on the rear view image 183 Setting the second camera input 184 Setting the second camera activation 185 Setting the reversed image setting for the second camera inputimage 185 Turning off the demo screen 185 Selecting the system language 186 Setting the keyboard language with the application for iPhone 186 Setting the beep sound 186 Adjusting the response positions of the touch panel touch panel calibration 187 Setting the dimmer function 187 Setting whether to activate the dimmer function 188 Setting the duration of time for the dimmer function to be active 188 Adjusting the picture 189 Displaying the firmware version 190 Updating firmware 190 Checking sensor learning status and driving status 191 Clearing the status 192 Checking the connections of leads 192 Audio adjustments Using fader balance adjust
104. 9 You can display the video image output by the gt For details refer to Switching the opera device connected to this product This section tion screen on page 174 describes operations for an AUX source Changes the wide screen mode O A Mini jack AV cable CD RM10 sold sepa gt For details refer to Changing the wide rately is required for connection screen mode on page 223 gt For details of the connection method refer to the Installation Manual A CAUTION For safety reasons video images cannot be viewed while your vehicle is in motion To view video images you must stop in a safe place and apply the parking brake Reading the screen Using the touch panel keys BREE LY Current time and date a24nos yxnvy ue buisn Mnveemttl Starting procedure You can display the video image output by the o device connected to video input wa 1 Press the HOME button to display the D Top menu screen Displays the source list 2 Touch the following keys in the follow For details refer to Selecting a front ing order source on the source list on page 25 2 Displays the Time and date setting E gt screen gt For details refer to Setting the time and date on page 221 The System screen appears 3 Displays the Setting menu screen 4 Recalls equalizer curves gt For details refer to Using the equalizer 3 Touch Input Output Settings The following screen a
105. 94 m Turning off the AV source Turn off the AV source to stop playing or re ceiving the AV source 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following key AV Displays the AV source selection screen 3 Touch OFF The AV source is turned off Changing the display order of source icons You can change the display order of source icons on the AV source selection screen O This setting is available only when you stop your vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake O This function is not available during a call via this product 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen uol e1ado diseg En 25 2 Touch the following key AV Displays the AV source selection screen 3 Touch and hold a source icon and drag the icon to the desired position C If the source icon is moved the order of the source list is also changed J Changing the display order of source keys You can change the display order of source keys on the source list O This setting is available only when you stop your vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake O This function is not available during a call via this product 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the AV operation key m 10 31 AV operation key The AV operation screen appears 3 Touch the following key v Displays the source list 26 En
106. A2DP Advanced Audio Distribution Pro file SPP Serial Port Profile O When this product is turned off the Bluetooth connection is also disconnected When the system restarts the system auto matically attempts to reconnect the pre viously connected device Even when the connection is severed for some reason the system automatically reconnects the speci fied device except when the connection is severed due to device operation Registering your Bluetooth devices You need to register your devices featuring Bluetooth wireless technology when you con nect it to this product for the first time A total 74 En of three devices can be registered Two regis tration methods are available e Searching for nearby Bluetooth devices e Pairing from your Bluetooth devices O If three devices are already paired Mem ory Full is displayed and pairing cannot be performed In such cases delete a paired device first gt For details refer to Deleting a registered device on page 76 Searching for nearby Bluetooth devices The system searches for available Bluetooth devices near this product displays them in a list and registers them for connection 1 When the device is already connected this function is inactive 1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech nology on your devices O For some Bluetooth devices no specific ac tion is necessary to activate Bluetooth wire less technology For details refer t
107. All Places The Search by Category screen appears 6 Touch Around Here and then select the area in which the POIs should be searched for e Category View You can select whether or not POI cate gories are displayed e Around Here Searches around the current position Or around the last known position if the cur rent position is not available The results will be listed in order of the distance from this position e Ina City Searches for a place within a selected city town The results will be listed in order of the distance from the center of the selected city town e Around Destination Searches for a place around the destination of the current route The results will be listed in order of the distance from the des tination O This key is active only when the route is set e Along Route Searches along the current route and not around a point already set This is useful when searching for a stopover that results ina minimal detour such as searching for gas stations or restaurants The results will be listed in order of the length of the neces sary detour O This key is active only when the route is set uol euljsap e 104 Buludieas 7 Select one of the categories subcate gories or brands to narrow down the places The screen appears showing all places in the selected main category around the selected lo cation or along the route Touch Search by Name and enter the name of the place using
108. Auto cannot be used while the AVICSYNC App function is on 2 Not available when the AVICSYNC App function is turned on 3 Turn on the AVICSYNC App function for using AVICSYNC App 92 En Chapter Using the radio dH 5100NEX You can listen to the radio using this product This section describes operations for the radio Using the touch panel keys Displays the source list gt For details refer to Selecting a front source on the source list on page 25 2 Selects a band gt For details refer to Selecting a band on page 94 3 Displays the Time and date setting screen gt For details refer to Setting the time and date on page 221 4 Displays the Setting menu screen 5 Recalls equalizer curves gt For details refer to Using the equalizer on page 202 6 Stores song information to an iPod gt For details refer to Storing song informa tion to an iPod iTunes Tagging on page 221 D Displays the Phone menu screen gt For details refer to Displaying the phone menu on page 80 Performs manual tuning or seek tuning gt For details refer to Manual tuning on page 94 gt For details refer to Seek tuning on page 94 9 Displays the preset channels gt For details refer to Selecting a preset channel from the preset channel list on page 95 Recalls the preset channel stored to a key from memory with a single touch of the key Stores the current broadcast frequ
109. Bluetooth connection with the Android Auto compatible device will automatically be established O If Android Auto is turned on during a call on acellular phone other than the Android Auto compatible device the Bluetooth con nection will be terminated after the call ends O Ifthe AVICSYNC App function is not turned off a message confirming whether to turn off the AVICSYNC App function appears 4 Operate the application gt For details on adjusting the volume refer to Adjusting the volume on page 140 O The Android Auto function may not oper ate properly if the Bluetooth connection with the Android Auto compatible device is terminated Setting the driving position To achieve optimum usability of Android Auto set the driving position setting correctly according to the vehicle 1 Touch the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow Am The System screen appears 3 Touch Driving Position 4 Touch the item you want to set e Left default Select for a left hand drive vehicle e Right Select for a right hand drive vehicle The setting will be applied the next time an Android Auto compatible device is con nected to this product Chapter suoi ed1 dde suoudyiews 10 BUOUd INOA Huisn Chapter Adjusting the volume You can adjust the guidance volume alert sound volume separately from the main sound volume when Android Auto is used Touch the VOL
110. D 241 AVCHD recorded discs 242 Playing DualDisc 242 Dolby Digital 242 Detailed information for playable media 242 Compatibility 242 Media compatibility chart 245 Bluetooth 249 SiriusXM satellite radio 249 HD Radio Technology 249 SDHC 249 WMA WMV 249 DivX 249 AAC 250 Google Google Play Android and Android Auto 250 C10 En MirrorLink 250 MIXTRAX 250 Detailed information regarding connected iPod devices 250 iPod and iPhone 250 Lightning 251 App Store 251 iOS 251 ilunes 251 iTunes Radio 251 Using app based connected content 251 Pandora 252 AhaRadio 252 HDMI 252 MHL 252 IVONA Text to Speech 252 Notice regarding video viewing 252 Notice regarding DVD Video viewing 252 Notice regarding MP3 file usage 253 Notice regarding open source licenses 253 Map coverage 253 Using the LCD screen correctly 253 Handling the LCD screen 253 Liquid crystal display LCD screen 253 Maintaining the LCD screen 253 LED light emitting diode backlight 254 Display information 255 Phone menu 255 System menu 255 Thememenu 256 Audiomenu 257 Video Setup menu 257 Bluetooth menu 258 Specifications 259 Chapter Introduction cH Manual overview Before using this product be sure to read Im portant Information for the User a separate manual which contains warnings cautions and other important information that you should note The screen
111. Direct dialing 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow N E The Dial screen appears Dial pad 2 Deletes one digit Touch and hold to delete all digits 3 Touch the number keys to enter the phone number 4 Touch the following key Makes a call 5 Touch the following key Ends the call The call ends O You may hear a noise when you hang up the phone Calling a number in the phone book After finding the number you want to call in the phone book you can select the entry and make the call O The contacts on your phone will normally be transferred to this product automatically when the phone is connected If the contacts are not transferred automati cally you can transfer the contacts using the phone menu of the cellular phone To transfer the contacts using the phone menu of the cellular phone set this pro duct visible to other devices gt For details refer to Switching visibility on page 77 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order Ls gt The Phone Book screen appears 3 Touch the desired name on the list Phone Book Andy Bob Bob Edward John The details screen of the phone book appears 4 Touch the phone number you want to dial The dial screen appears 5 Dialing starts To cancel the call touch
112. EQ inil Preset channel list display key 2 Touch the item on the list 1 to 6 to switch to a channel registered as a preset channel O If you touch the preset channel list display key while the preset channel list is dis played the list disappears and the preset tuning keys are displayed Storing broadcast frequencies With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys 1 to 6 you can easily store up to six broadcast channels for later recall also with the touch of a key 1 Select a frequency that you want to store in memory 2 Touch and hold a preset tuning key 1 to 6 The selected radio station is stored in memory The next time you touch the preset tuning key 1 to 6 the broadcast channel is recalled from memory O Upto 18 FM stations six for each of the three FM bands as well as six AM stations can be stored in memory a Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies BSM best stations memory function automa tically stores the six strongest broadcast fre quencies under the preset tuning keys 1 to 6 and once stored there you can tune into them with the touch of a key O Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may replace broadcast frequencies you have already saved O Previously stored broadcast frequencies may remain stored if the number of strong broadcast frequencies stored has not reached the limit 1 Touch the preset channel list display
113. FM 2ch Digital FM 3ch acne uo1 d gt 1 OIPeY GH Chapter ED HD Radio reception Selecting a preset channel from the preset channel list Once you have stored broadcast channels you can easily recall preset channels from memory with a single touch of a key gt For details refer to Storing broadcast fre quencies on page 100 1 Touch the preset channel list display key Preset channel list display key 2 Touch the item on the list 1 to 6 to switch to a channel registered as a preset channel If you touch the preset channel list display key while the preset channel list is dis played the list disappears and the preset tuning keys are displayed Storing broadcast frequencies With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys 1 to 6 you can easily store up to six broadcast channels for later recall also with the touch of a key 1 Select a frequency that you want to store in memory 2 Touch and hold a preset tuning key 1 to 6 The selected radio station is stored in memory The next time you touch the same preset tun ing key 1 to 6 the service component is re called from memory 100 En O Upto 18 FM stations six for each of the three FM bands as well as six AM stations can be stored in memory m Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies The BSM best stations memory function automatically stores the six strongest broad
114. IC tings are 100NEX available on AVIC 5100NEX Remarks nd AVIC 100NEX 1 Use AppRadio Mode to play music or videos on an iPod For using AppRadio Mode install the CarMediaPlayer app on your iPod gt For details about the CarMediaPlayer refer to the information on our website gt Refer to the CarMediaPlayer manual for more information en 91 Chapter ED iPod iPhone or smartphone setup operation Android MirrorLink Required cable sold separately an iS CD MU200 CD AH200 ee ee 2 m Connection Bluetooth Ca Auto ARRETE A Bluetooth connec Bluetooth connec tion is required for Bluetooth connec tion is required using aha Pandora tion is required or Android Auto Smartphone Setup Bluetooth connection Connect to USB port 2 for using Connection requirement MirrorLink Android Auto or AVICSYNC App C Available source Select Android Auto for Mode for e This connection using Android and settings are Auto available on Remarks Select AVIC 8100NEX MirrorLink for AVIC 7100NEX Mode for and AVIC using 6100NEX MirrorLink mode For AVIC 8100NEX and AVIC 7100NEX users ene only when an Android Auto compatible device is connected The AVICSYNC App function automatically turns off when an Android Auto compatible device is connected with this product for the first time From the next time a compatible device is connected Android
115. Il Android 4 1 1 e Galaxy Tab 2 Android 4 0 3 LG e Nexus 5 Android 4 4 2 ASUS e Nexus 7 2013 4 3 Chapter Customizing preferences of the navigation dH Preparations before using the AVICSYNC function 1 Download the AVICSYNC App from App Store or Google Play and install the app to your iPhone or smartphone Android To find AVICSYNC App access the App Store or Google Play and enter AVICSYNC in the search box 2 Start the AVICSYNC App on your iPhone or smartphone Android 3 Connect your iPhone or smartphone Android to the navigation system via Bluetooth or USB cable connection gt For details of the Bluetooth connection refer to Chapter 11 gt For details of the USB connections refer to the Installation Manual 4 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 5 Touch the following key Displays the navigation menu on the Map screen 6 Touch FJ on the navigation menu 7 Touch Associate New Phone 8 Touch the iPhone or smartphone Android that you want to associate with the navigation system and then touch As sociate 9 Accept the association on your iPhone or smartphone Android Once the association is established your iPhone or smartphone Android is automati cally associated when you connect your iPhone or smartphone Android to the naviga tion system 10 Purchase connected services via the AVICSYNC App 11 Display the navigation menu and then touch S
116. PIN Code Input The PIN Code screen appears 4 Touch 0 to 9 to input pin code up to 8 digits 5 Touch the following key Stores the PIN code in this pro duct Displaying the Bluetooth address You can check the Bluetooth address of this product 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order ks gt The Bluetooth screen appears 3 Touch Device Information The Bluetooth address is displayed C78 En Clearing the Bluetooth memory A CAUTION Never turn this product off while the Bluetooth memory is being cleared 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order ks gt The Bluetooth screen appears 3 Touch Bluetooth Memory Clear 4 Touch Clear The confirmation screen appears 5 Touch OK The Bluetooth memory is cleared lf you do not want to clear the memory touch Cancel Updating Bluetooth software This function is used to update this product with the latest Bluetooth software For details on Bluetooth software and updating refer to our website O The source is turned off and the Bluetooth connection is disconnected before the pro cess Starts A CAUTION Never turn this product off while the software is being updated 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen Chapter 2 Touch the
117. Pioneer Operation Manual MULTIMEDIA NAVIGATION RECEIVER AVIC 8100NEX AVIC 7100NEX AVIC 6100NEX AVIC 5100NEX Notice to all users H Radi o This software requires that the product is properly This hU Radionsenverenables connected to your vehicle s parking brake and depending on your vehicle additional installation may PSD be required For more information please contact your Authorized Pioneer Electronics retailer or call us at HD2 HD3 800 421 1404 Digital Sound iTunes Tagging Be sure to read Important Information for the User first Important Information for the User includes the important information that you must understand before using this product Artist Experience Siriusxm READY English Thank you for buying this Pioneer product Please read through these instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly After you have finished reading the instructions keep this document in a safe place for future reference Q Important The screens shown in the examples may differ from actual screens which may be changed without notice for performance and function improvements D Introduction Manual overview 11 Howto use this manual 11 Conventions used in this manual 11 erms used in this manual 11 Notes on internal memory 12 Before removing the vehicle battery 12 Data subjectto erasure 12 Resetting the microprocessor 1
118. Playback of discs recorded on a computer may not be possible depending on the re cording device writing software their set tings and other environmental factors Please record with the correct format For details please contact manufacturer of media recorders or writing software Titles and other text information recorded on a CD R CD RW disc may not be dis played by this product in the case of audio data CD DA Read the precautions with CD R CD RW discs before using them Common notes about the external storage device USB SD Do not leave the external storage device USB SD in any location with high tem peratures Depending on the kind of the external sto rage device USB SD you use this pro duct may not recognize the storage device or files may not be played back properly The text information of some audio and video files may not be correctly displayed File extensions must be used properly There may be a slight delay when starting playback of files on an external storage de vice USB SD with complex folder hierar chies Operations may vary depending on the kind of an external storage device USB SD It may not be possible to play some music files from SD or USB because of file char nized by this unit even if the SD memory cards can be recognized by a computer Formatting the SD memory cards using a dedicated formatter may resolve the pro blem SD memory cards formatted using the standard f
119. Route Preferences Sets the type of vehicle you are driving the road types used in route planning and the route planning method For details refer to Route Preferences settings on page 63 e Sound Adjusts the different sound volumes and changes the voice guidance profile gt For details refer to Sound settings on page 65 e Warnings Enables or disables warnings and sets up the warning function gt For details refer to Warnings settings on page 66 e Navigation Map Fine tunes the appearance of the Map screen and adjusts how the software helps you navigate with different kinds of route re lated information on the Map screen gt For details refer to Navigation Map set tings on page 66 e Regional Changes the voice guidance language the application language and measurement units gt For details refer to Regional settings on page 68 62 En Display Sets separate themes for daytime and nighttime use adjusts the display back light and enables or disables menu anima tions gt For details refer to Display settings on page 69 Traffic Enables or disables the TMC receiver and sets up the traffic function gt For details refer to Traffic settings on page 69 Weather Enables or disables the online weather fore cast option and the automatic download of weather information gt For details refer to Weather settings on page 69
120. S System Tune Start Parental Control Alert List Team Settings Featured Favorites 5 Touch Parental Control The Parental Control screen appears 6 Enter the current passcode 7 Touch the following key Displays the Locked Channel screen 8 Touch the channel you want to lock FA appears and the channel is locked If you touch a locked channel the icon T Ifyou touch Clear All all locked channels are unlocked m Using the content alerts function such as Song Alerts Artist Alerts and Game Alerts While listening to SiriusXM Satellite Radio you can be alerted when your favorite songs switches to FJ and the channel is unlocked the SiriusXM satellite radio artists or games involving your favorite sports teams are playing on other channels The radio will display an alert message when a matching artist song or team is found on an other channel Then you can choose if you want to tune into that favorite or you can ignore it and stay on your current channel In formation on setting up the Artist Song and Game Alerts is described below Memorizing the current contents The song titles artist names and your favorite sport teams to which you are listening can be memorized to an alert list 1 On the current channel content infor mation area touch the item for which you want an alert gt For details refer to Using the touch panel keys on page 156 A confirmation message ap
121. Sets the level of sensitivity for AM to level 1 e Level2 Sets the level of sensitivity for AM to level 2 O The FM Level4 AM Level2 setting al lows reception of only stations with the strongest signals while lower settings allow reception of those with weaker sig nals m Storing song information to an iPod iTunes Tagging gt For details refer to Storing song information to an iPod iTunes Tagging on page 221 96 En Operating with the hardware buttons Press the TRK button You can move up or down the preset chan nels Press and hold the TRK button You can perform seek tuning Chapter HD Radio reception 15 8100NEX 7100NEX 6100NEX HD Radio stations HD Radio stations offer high quality audio and data services HD Radio stations are brought to you by your local FM or AM stations HD Radio stations feature the following e High quality audio e FM multicasting e Data service AM band Analog AM Analog AM Digital AM FM band Analog FM Analog FM Digital FM Analog FM Digital FM 1ch Digital FM 2ch Main channel Litnigital FM 3ch 3 Sub Channel poe teeeaeesoed i Digital Sound Digital CD quality sound HD Radio Technology enables local radio stations to broadcast a clean digital signal AM sounds like today s FM and FM sounds like a CD PSD Program Service Data Contributes to the superior user experience of HD Radio Technology Presents
122. SiriusXM satellite radio Recalls the preset channel stored to a key from memory with a single touch of the key Stores the current broadcast frequency to a key for later recall by continuing to touch the key gt For details refer to Storing broadcast channels on page 159 7 Changes the playback point by dragging the key gt For details refer to Operating the time bar on page 27 Skips files forward or backward witha single touch of the key Fast forwards or fast reverses by touching and holding the key Switches between playback and pause Reading the screen Live display Juanes Loco De Amor alente Juanes Loco De Amor Band indicator En Chapter OIpe 33111832S ANXSNHIS 34 Huisn Chapter Usin Shows the tuned band SXM1 SXM2 SXM8 or Featured O Featured is available only when Fea tured Favorites is set to On 2 Channel name logo Shows the name logo of the channel currently being tuned into 3 Current time and date 4 Album artwork Shows the artwork for the current song when available O Ifthe album artwork is not available the SiriusXM Logo image will be displayed iTunes tagging song status indicator Shows the status of the song information stored in this product O The icon is displayed on all operation screens of AV sources Indicator Meaning Appears when the song information tag is stored in this product Appears when the song in
123. Start Navigation Your navigation system starts the route gul dance gt For details of the route guidance refer to Understanding the route guidance on page 34 m Searching for Points of Interest POI Information about various facilities Points Of Interest POI such as gas stations parking lots or restaurants is available You can search for a POI by selecting the category or entering the POI Name Searching for POIs using preset categories The preset search allows you to quickly find the most frequently selected types of POls 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 2 Touch the following key Displays the navigation menu on the Map screen 3 Touch New Route The New Route to screen appears 4 Touch Places The Places screen appears 38 En KD Searching for a destination The preset search categories are as follows e Gas Station e Accommodation e Restaurant e Parking O When a route is not set POIs are searched for around the current position 11 When the current position is not available either no GPS signal POls are searched for around the last known position O When a route is set Gas Station and Restaurant are searched for along the route and Accommodation and Park ing are searched for around the destina tion 5 Touch the category you want The results appear in a list 6 Touch the POI you want The searched l
124. The display of the menu item indicates as Q gt For details refer to Using the touch panel follows keys for iTunes Radio on page 123 When the menu item is active the func tion can be turned on When the menu item is highlighted the Playing back songs similar to iil nas E ae the current song When the menu item is not active the You can listen to songs similar to the song cur function is not available for the current rently being played song If you touch Never Play This Song when 1 Touch the following key the menu Item is active the song will not be played back again pisala tha ponup menu O Ifyou touch Never Play This Song when the menu item is highlighted the function will turn off 2 Touch Play More Like This O The operation result depends on the iPod O The display of the menu item indicates as follows Adding the current song to the When the menu item is active the func wish list tion can be turned on When the menu item is highlighted the function is turned on When the menu item is not active the function is not available for the current song You can add the current song to the wish list for easy access to the song later en 127 1 Touch the following key Displays the pop up menu 2 Touch Add to iTunes Wish List The song will be added to the wish list O If the song is already in the wish list Re move from iTunes Wish List is displayed inst
125. Title is displayed if there is no corresponding information gt Repeats all songs or videos in the selected list Repeats just the current song or video A lt 124 En Starting procedure When connecting an iPod to this product you must select the method for connecting your device Settings are required according to the connected device gt For details refer to Chapter 13 1 Display the AV source selection screen gt For details of the operations refer to Dis playing the AV operation screen on page 24 2 Connect your iPod O If connecting an iPhone or iPod touch quit applications before connecting O If an iPhone 6 Plus iPhone 6 iPhone 5s iPhone 5c iPhone 5 or iPod touch 6th gen eration is connected the media library song information will be imported trom the connected device and saved to this pro duct Wait until the process completes The media library will not be imported if an updated media library of the connected de vice has been imported or the memory of this product is full 3 Touch iPod on the AV source selection screen 4 Use the touch panel keys on the screen to control your iPod gt For details refer to Using the touch panel keys for audio on page 122 gt For details refer to Using the touch panel keys for video on page 122 O The video image of the iPod may have noise if the rear display outputs the video image When noise is produced in the vid
126. Understanding the route guidance on page 34 Selecting a destination from stored locations Storing locations you visit frequently saves time and effort Selecting an item from the list provides an easy way to specify the position The list of saved locations contains two preset categories Home and Work This function is available if locations have been registered in Saved Location gt For details refer to Storing a location in Saved Location on page 51 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 2 Touch the following key Displays the navigation menu on the Map screen 3 Touch New Route The New Route to screen appears 4 Touch Saved Location The Saved Location screen appears Ifyou touch and then Edit you can edit the details of saved locations 5 Touch the entry you want The searched location appears on the Map screen 6 Touch Select as Destination on the Map Location screen gt For details on the operations in the Map Location screen refer to Using the Map Location screen on page 45 After touching Select as Destination the Route Summary screen appears and count down begins When the countdown ends the guidance automatically starts If the screen is touched anywhere during the countdown the countdown stops and the screen will stay as it iS gt For details on the operations in the Route Summary screen refe
127. a favorite color O You can also adjust the color tone by drag ging the color bar 6 Touch and hold Memo to store the customized color in the memory The customized color is stored in the memory The set color will be recalled from the memory the next time you touch the same key Selecting the theme color A theme color can be selected from 5 different colors 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order ka gt K The Theme screen appears 3 Touch Theme The following screen appears nuaw swaul Illumination Theme O You can also change the screen for settings by touching Illumination Background or Clock on this screen Background 4 Touch the color you want O You can preview the Top menu screen or the AV operation screen by touching Home or AV respectively m Selecting the clock image The clock on the AV operation screen and the Top menu screen can be selected from 3 differ ent images en 209 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order oe The Theme screen appears 3 Touch Clock The following screen appears A bet Home AV Illumination Theme 12 34 12 34 O You can also change the screen for settings by touching Illumination Theme or Background on this screen Background 4 Touch the item you
128. ac tive when the online traffic feature is available Displays useful information to support your driving gt For details refer to Chapter 9 6 Displays notifications that contain impor tant information D Displays the location that you saved as a fa vorite gt For details refer to Selecting a destina tion from stored locations on page 41 Switches among 2D 3D and 2D North up view modes 9 Displays the User Profiles screen where you can create new profiles or edit the exist ing profiles If multiple drivers are using this product they can create their own profiles with their own settings If you select a new profile this product restarts so that the new set tings can take effect Displays the next page of the navigation menu di Displays the previous page of the naviga tion menu 2 Configures the navigation related settings and enables you to access the SyncTool screen gt For details refer to Chapter 10 3 Displays the information of your navigation system the version information or li censes for example g on the upper right corner of the screen is used for AVICSYNC App connection gt Be sure read Expanding the use of the navigation functions page 71 before using the AVICSYNC function O When you are navigating a planned route the following route related keys are avail able Ud2a19s NUdW UO EHIALN 24 BSN 0 MOH Chapter KD How to use the Navigation menu
129. age With DivX files that provide audio playback in different languages and different audio sys tems Dolby Digital DTS etc you can switch between languages or audio systems during playback 2 Changes the playback point by dragging the key gt For details refer to Operating the time bar on page 27 3 Moves ahead one frame frame by frame playback or slows down playback speed slow motion playback gt For details refer to frame by frame play back on page 118 gt For details refer to Slow motion playback on page 118 Switches the media file type gt For details refer to Switching the media file type on page 118 5 Switches between playback and pause Changes the wide screen mode gt For details refer to Changing the wide screen mode on page 223 Stops playback Chapter Playing compressed video files 18 Reading the screen Example Disc EQ Meal Current time and date 2 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time within the current file 3 Current file information e File name Shows the name of the file currently playing e Ej Folder name Shows the name of the folder contain ing the file currently playing Starting procedure for Disc 1 Display the AV source selection screen gt For details of the operations refer to Dis playing the AV operation screen on page 24 2 Insert the disc you want to play into the disc loading slot The source ch
130. ails consult your authorized Pioneer dealer or an installation professional O Some types of vehicles may not output a speed signal while driving at just a few kilo meters per hour In such a case the current location of your vehicle may not be dis played correctly while in traffic congestion or in a parking lot How do GPS and dead reckoning work together For maximum accuracy your navigation sys tem continually compares GPS data with your estimated position as calculated from the data of built in sensor However if only the data from the built in sensor is available for a long period positioning errors are gradually com pounded until the estimated position becomes unreliable For this reason whenever GPS sig nals are available they are matched with the data of the built in sensor and used to correct it for improved accuracy O Ifyou use chains on your wheels for winter driving or put on the spare wheel errors may suddenly increase because of differ ence in wheel diameter Initialize the sensor status and it may recover the accuracy to normal condition gt For details refer to Clearing the status on page 192 Appendix Map matching As mentioned the positioning systems used by this navigation system are susceptible to certain errors Their calculations may on occa sion place you in a location on the map where no road exists In this situation the processing system understands that vehicles travel on
131. al or public viewing purposes may con stitute an infringement on the author s rights as protected by the Copyright Law m Notice regarding DVD Video viewing This item incorporates copy protection tech nology that is protected by U S patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation Reverse engineering and disas sembly are prohibited Notice regarding MP3 file usage Supply of this product only conveys a license for private non commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to use this product in any commercial i e revenue generating real time broadcasting terrestrial satellite cable and or any other media broad casting streaming via internet intranets and or other networks or in other electronic con tent distribution systems Such as pay audio or audio on demand applications An indepen dent license for such use is required For de tails please visit http Awww mp3licensing com m Notice regarding open source licenses For details about the open source licenses for the functions that this product is equipped with please visit http Awww oss pioneer com car multimedia Map coverage For details about the map coverage of this pro duct refer to the information on our website Using the LCD screen correctly Handling the LCD screen e When the LCD screen is subjected to direct sunlight for a long period of time it will be come very hot resul
132. alink functions visit www idatalinkmaestro com support or call iDatalink Maestro Technical Support toll free at 877 212 6169 ext 7900 Activating iDatalink Maestro Before using and or connecting the iDatalink Maestro adapter you will need to first Tlash the Maestro module with the appro priate vehicle and head unit firmware Updating the iDatalink Maestro module 1 Find the last six numbers device num ber on the label on the packaging of this product or on this product itself O Device number input is required for updat ing the iDatalink MAESTRO module Take a note of the device number as necessary O You can also check the device number on the Firmware Information screen of this product gt For details refer to Displaying the firm ware version on page 190 2 Access the Automotive Data Solutions Inc website www idatalinkmaestro com and follow the on screen directions to con figure the desired firmware 1 When the serial number input is required please input the device number of this pro duct yuljezeq Busy 3 Install the vehicle head unit specific firmware on your iDatalink Maestro mod ule gt For details please refer to Automotive Data Solutions Inc website 4 Connect this product to iDatalink Maestro and then install this pro duct to the vehicle The iDatalink function will be active m Starting procedure 1 Display the AV source selection screen gt For details of the op
133. an 10 the first or last file in the folder is automatically played O Ifthe file currently being played is the first or last Tile in the folder the search is not performed en 121 Chapter ED UsinganiPod OO oO o For iPod with a 30 pin connector users O Depending on your iPod there may not be any output unless you use a USB interface cable for iPod iPhone CD IU201S CD IU201V sold separately Be sure to use a USB interface cable for iPod iPhone CD IU2015 CD IU201V sold separately to connect your iPod iPod audio and or video sources are en abled if either of the cables is connected gt For details of the connections refer to the Installation Manual For iPod iPhone with a Lightning con nector users O To use iPod audio source you must con nect your iPod to this product using a USB interface cable for iPod iPhone CD IU52 sold separately However functions related to iPod video files and AppRadio Mode are not avail able O iPod audio and or video sources are not available when an iPod with a Lightning connector is connected to this product with a interface cable CD IH202 CD IV202AV sold separately gt For details of the connections refer to the Installation Manual When you want to play audio and or video files on your iPod with a Lightning connec tor first install CarMediaPlayer on your iPod with a Lightning connector and then launch CarMediaPlayer while in A
134. and then touch Delete the selected alert point will be deleted 6 Touch Edit The alert settings are modified Chapter The Traffic Message Channel TMC provides real time traffic reports If the navigation sys tem is equipped with the TMC feature you can check the traffic reports and information re ceived O The online function in Traffic can be used if you connect an iPhone or a smartphone that has the AVICSYNC App installed gt Be sure read Expanding the use of the navigation functions page 71 before using the AVICSYNC function Viewing the traffic list Traffic information is displayed onscreen in a list This allows you to check how many traffic incidents have occurred the locations and the distance from your current position 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 2 Touch the following key Displays the navigation menu on the Map screen 3 Touch Traffic The Traffic Summary screen appears 4 Touch Traffic Events The Traffic Events screen appears A list with traffic information that has been re ceived is shown The list is sorted by distance from your current position Places street names where incidents have occurred are dis played on the list O Ifa route is set relevant events for your cur rent route are shown in the upper section of the list O Touching the desired item allows you to check its position on the map Touch p or IJ to show
135. anges and then playback will start gt For details refer to nserting and ejecting a disc on page 17 O If the disc is already set touch Disc on the source list or on the AV source selection screen gt For details refer to Selecting a front source on the source list on page 25 gt For details refer to Selecting a front source on the AV source selection screen on page 25 3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen to control the disc gt For details refer to Using the touch panel keys on page 116 m Starting procedure for USB SD 1 Display the AV source selection screen gt For details of the operations refer to Dis playing the AV operation screen on page 24 2 Insert the SD memory card into the SD card slot or plug the USB storage device into the USB connector gt For details refer to Plugging in a USB sto rage device on page 19 gt For details refer to nserting and ejecting an SD memory card on page 18 3 Touch USB or SD on the AV source selection screen The image is displayed on the screen 4 Use the touch panel keys on the screen to control the external storage device USB SD gt For details refer to Using the touch panel keys on page 116 O Playback is performed in order of folder numbers Folders are skipped if they con tain no playable files If there are no play able files in folder 01 root folder playback starts from folder 02 Selecting files from the file name li
136. ar during frame by frame playback m Slow motion playback This lets you slow down the playback speed 118 En Touch I gt external storage device USB SD or touch and hold I gt disc during playback The arrow icon is displayed and forward slow motion playback starts There is no sound during slow motion play back With some discs and external storage de vices USB SD images may be unclear during slow motion playback To return to normal playback touch gt H Reversed slow motion playback is not possi ble Switching the media file type When playing a digital media containing a mixture of various media file types you can switch between media file types to play 1 Touch the following key Displays the pop up menu for selecting a media file type to play on the disc or in the external storage device USB SD 2 Touch the item you want to set e Music Switches the media file type to music com pressed audio e Video Switches the media file type to video e Photo Switches the media file type to still image JPEG data e CD DA Switches the media file type to CD audio data CD DA Operating with the hardware buttons Press the TRK button You can skip files forward or backward Press and hold the TRK button You can perform fast reverse or fast for ward m Chapter Playing compressed still image files dH You can view still ima
137. arate pass or vign ette to extend the length of time allotted for USE O This option can be enabled or disabled se parately from the pre use toll road usage option Per use Toll When this function is turned off the route is calculated prioritizing the avoidance of per use charged toll roads This function is useful when you want to avoid toll roads where there is a per use charge Chapter Customizing preferences of the navigation dH Ferries When this function is turned off the route is calculated prioritizing the avoidance of ferries Car Shuttle Trains When this function is turned off the route is calculated prioritising the avoidance of car shuttle trains Car shuttle trains are used to transport vehi cles for relatively short distances and they usually connect places that are not easily ac cessible by road Unpaved Roads When this function is turned off the route is calculated prioritizing the avoidance of un paved roads O The navigation system avoids unpaved roads by default Carpool Lanes When this function is turned off the route is calculated prioritizing the avoidance of car pool and HOV lanes O The navigation system avoids carpool and HOV lanes by default Sound settings Voice You can adjust the volume of the guidance sounds verbal instructions Alert Beeps You can adjust the volume of the non verbal alert sounds beeps Ding You can turn off the attention tone t
138. ard slot Ejecting an SD memory card during data transfer can damage the SD memory card Be sure to eject the SD memory card by the pro cedure described in this manual Do not press the amp button when an SD mem ory card is not fully inserted Doing so may da mage the card Do not press the amp button before an SD mem ory card has been completely removed Doing so may damage the card Inserting and ejecting a disc Inserting a disc SALOONS TALOONSA 1 Press the 4 button The following screen appears 2 A iss Touch the following key uol e1ado diseg Opens the LCD panel 3 Insert a disc into the disc loading slot The disc is loaded and the LCD panel closes Ejecting a disc SALOONA TALOONSA 1 Press the 4 button The following screen appears Chapter KD Basic operation o D IL aL X 2 Touch the following key Q The LCD panel opens and the disc is ejected 3 Remove the disc and press the 4 but ton The LCD panel closes Inserting a disc LUON ENBA Inserta disc into the disc loading slot Ejecting a disc SWN GINS Press the 4 button The disc is ejected Inserting and ejecting an SD memory card O This system is not compatible with the Multi Media Card MMC O Compatibility with all SD memory cards is not guaranteed O This product may not achieve optimum per formance with some SD memory cards Inserting an SD memory card 8100NEX
139. ased or decreased O The default setting is 0 Increases the source volume Decreases the source volume sjuaujsnipe oipny Chapter E9 Audio adjustments The following AV sources are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically Required cable Smartphone Setup sold separately oon aha CD IU201V iPhone iPod Pandora iPod iPhone with a USB1 30 pin connector aha CD IU201S iPhone iPod Pandora iPod1 AppRadio Mode e CD IH202 aha Pandora AV sources USB1 iPod1 CD IU52 o iPhone iPod Digital AV adapter i Lightning Digital 9 P AppRadio Mode AV Adapter HDMI CD MU200 Others Android Auto 1 MirrorLink iPod iPhone with a Lightning connector iPod1 aha Pandora aha Pandora AppRadio Mode HDMI Android device CD AH200 Others 1 For AVIC 8100NEX and AVIC 7100NEX 196 En Chapter Audio adjustments 33 5100NEX Required cable nee Setup sold separately nee Connection CD IU201V iPhone iPod AV sources USB1 iPod1 aha Pandora iPod iPhone with a TF 30 pin connector aha CD IU201S iPhone iPod Pandora iPod1 AppRadio Mode CD IV202AV aha CD IUs2 iPhone iPod VGA adapter Pandora Lightning to VGA AppRadio Mode iPod iPhone with a Adapter Bluetooth Audio Lightning connector iPod1 CD IU52 iPhone iPod aha Pandora O When a USB storage device is connected to USB port 1 or USB port 2 the source level adjustment volume is automa
140. ature lets you build your route using the list of desti nations Editing the list allows you to plan your route easily O Once you set the route you can edit your route using the menu displayed as My Route 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 2 Touch the following key Displays the navigation menu on the Map screen 3 Touch Route Planner or My Route 4 Touch one of the options 0O D Destination 2 Cancels the Route Planner or My Route screen and displays the map of the Current position 3 Adds a new destination and changes the current destination to the last waypoint 46 En Inserts a new waypoint Touch EN or to scroll the list Waypoint Returns to the previous screen Starting position The current vehicle posi tion is set as default and Current GPS Po sition is displayed gt For details refer to Changing the starting position on page 47 9 Calculates the route and shows the Route Summary screen Displays the options for the location e Move Up Move Down Edits the order you want to visit the loca tions e Delete Deletes the destination or waypoint e Save Location Stores the location in Saved Location gt For details refer to Storing a location in Saved Location on page 51 e Change Changes the destination or waypoint to another location e Show on Map Shows the selected location on the map di D
141. automatically mute or attenuate the AV source volume and the application volume when the navigation outputs the guidance VOICe 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow a BD The Audio screen appears 3 Touch Mute Level The pop up menu appears 4 Touch the item you want to set e ATT default The volume becomes 1 10 e Mute The volume becomes 0 e Off The volume does not change m Adjusting source levels The SLA source level adjustment function ad justs the volume level of each source to pre vent radical changes in volume when switching between sources This function is available only when main audio is available Settings are based on the FM tuner volume level which remains unchanged O This function is not available when the FM tuner is selected as the AV source 1 Compare the FM tuner volume level with the level of the source you want to adjust 2 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 3 Touch the following keys in the follow E BD The Audio screen appears 4 Touch Source Level Adjuster The Source Level Adjuster screen appears 5 Touch the following keys to adjust the source volume O If you directly touch the area where the cur sor can be moved the SLA setting will be changed to the value of the touched point T 4 to 4 is displayed as the source vo lume is incre
142. ay the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order gt The History screen appears O Depending on the type of cellular phone some calls may not be displayed in the call history Chapter Using hands free phoninc Cz 3 Touch the desired entry on the list to make a call The dial screen appears 4 Dialing starts To cancel the call touch R 5 Touch the following key Ends the call The call ends Using the preset dial lists You can dial a number from the preset dial list Registering a phone number You can easily store up to six phone numbers per device as presets 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order N N The Phone Book or History screen ap pears 3 Touch the following key Registers the phone number to the Preset Dial list Wo sxe Dialling from the preset dial list 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow m The Preset Dial screen appears 3 Touch the desired entry on the list to make a call The dial screen appears 4 Dialing starts O To cancel the call touch BB 5 Touch the following key The call ends Deleting a phone number 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow StU The Preset Dial sc
143. ay to en sure accurate results Do not change this value En The reflected sound within the vehicle is strong and delays occur The LPF on active subwoofers or exter nal amps delay the lower sounds e f an error occurs during measurement a message appears and measurement is canceled Check the following before mea suring the vehicle s acoustics Front speakers left right Rear speakers left right Noise Microphone for acoustical measure ment sold separately Low battery Performing Auto EQ O Auto EQ changes the audio settings as fol lows Auto EQ amp TA is set to On gt For details refer to Using the auto ad justed equalizer on page 203 The fader balance settings return to the center position gt For details refer to Using balance ad justment on page 194 The equalizer curve switches to Flat gt For details refer to Using the equali zer on page 202 The front and rear speakers will automa tically be adjusted to a high pass filter setting Previous settings for Auto EQ will be over written J For AVIC 8100NEX and AVIC 7100NEX users Do not press the amp button to open or close the panel when you are using the micro phone A CAUTION Do not turn off the engine while the measure ment is in progress Audio adjustments 1 Stop the vehicle in a quiet place close all the doors windows and sun roof and
144. ble channels O It may take time to display the channel list depending on the SiriusXM reception con dition 1 Touch the following key Displays the list screen 2 Select the list of all channels 3 Touch the desired channel 160 En the SiriusxM satellite radio 4 Touch the following key Closes the screen Selecting a channel from the category list You can select a channel from the available categories The types of categories available depend on the types of channels available O It may take time to display the channel list depending on the SiriusXM reception con dition 1 Touch the following key Displays the list screen 2 Touch the category name you want The category in the hierarchy under the se lected channel list is displayed 3 Touch the desired channel 4 Touch the following key Closes the screen oF Switching the displayed lis You can switch between list types when a list is displayed 1 Touch the following key Displays the list screen Usin 2 Touch the following key The displayed list switches in the following order Channel Name Artist Name Song Title Content Info Using the Replay function You can pause skip contents fast reverse fast forward or replay the channel you are currently listening to 1 Touch the following key QG Replay Switches to the time bar display 2 Touch the following keys or
145. broadcasting the game and starts play back about 30 seconds before the notable event occurred allowing you to hear it unfold as if you listened to it live If you return to the original channel after listening to the highlight of the game the radio plays back from the time that the channel was switched You will not miss either the highlight of the game or the contents of the channel you were originally listening to O SXV300 or later SiriusXM Connect vehicle tuner sold separately is required to use this function This function is available only when SiriusXM is selected as the source O To use this function before the game starts select the teams you want to follow gt For details refer to Se ecting teams for SportsFlash on page 169 O Touch Play to listen to the notified chan nel To return to the original channel touch within five minutes after the channel is switched O Touch Ignore to stay tuned to the current channel O Touch Cancel to cancel notifications re garding the game Usin O Notification messages will not be displayed while you are listening to the channel that is the target of SportsFlash or while the Radio ID is displayed 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow a m The System screen appears 3 Touch AV Source Settings The following screen appears System MIXTRAX Settings Radio Settings Sin
146. buttons to control the radio Switches between playback and pause Returns to the beginning of the current program Press again to skip back to lt lt IRK the previous program Press and hold to fast reverse scan through the con tent Jumps to the next program Press and gt gt TRK hold to fast forward scan through the content Exits Replay mode and tunes into the current live broadcast Time bar Changes the playback point by drag ging the key Switches between list types the SiriusXxM satellite radio Setting SiriusXM TuneStart Automatically start songs from the beginning when you tune to one of your preset channels in the cur rent preset band when TuneStart is turned on O This function is available only when SiriusXM is selected as the source 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow cn gt Ef The System screen appears 3 Touch AV Source Settings The following screen appears System MIXTRAX Settings Radio Settings SinusXM Settings r Tag Forwarding Bluetooth Audio 4 Touch SiriusXM Settings The following screen appears System Tune Start Parental Control Alert List Team Settings Featured Favorites 5 Touch Tune Start repeatedly until the desired setting appears e On default Activates the TuneStart function e Off Deactivates the TuneS
147. cedure 99 Selecting a band 99 Manual tuning 99 Seek tuning 99 Selecting a preset channel from the preset channel list 100 Storing broadcast frequencies 100 Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies 100 Tuning into strong frequencies 100 Switching the seek mode 101 Switching the reception mode 102 Storing song information to an iPod iTunes Tagging 102 Operating with the hardware buttons 102 O Playing a disc Using the touch panel keys for audio 103 Using the touch panel keys for video 103 Reading the screen for audio 105 Reading the screen for video 105 Starting procedure 106 Selecting files from the file name list 106 Playing tracks in random order 106 Setting a repeat play range 106 Switching the media file tyoe 107 Searching for the part you want to play 107 Operating the DVD menu 107 Switching the subtitle language 108 Switching the audio language 108 Frame by frame playback 108 Slow motion playback 108 Returning to a specified scene 108 Resuming playback Bookmark 109 Operating the DVD menu using touch panel keys 109 Switching the multi angle DVD display 109 Selecting the audio output 109 Operating with the hardware buttons 110 D Playing compressed audio files Using the touch panel keys 111 Reading the screen 112 Starting procedure for Disc 113 Starting procedure for USB SD 113 Switching the browse mode 113 Selecting files from the file name list 114 Selecting a f
148. ch Select as Destination on the 3 Touch New Route Map Location screen The New Route to screen appears For details on the operations in the Map Location screen refer to Using the Map After touching Select as Destination the Route Summary screen appears and count down begins When the countdown ends the guidance automatically starts If the screen is touched anywhere during the countdown the countdown stops and the screen will stay as it iS gt For details on the operations in the Route Summary screen refer to Checking route information and preferences on page 48 The Combined Search screen appears 5 Touch the right text box to enter the country and city town you want search En 43 10 Touch Start Navigation Your navigation system starts the route gul dance gt For details of the route guidance refer to Understanding the route guidance on page 34 Searching for a location by the coordinates Entering a latitude and longitude pinpoints the location 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 2 Touch the following key Displays the navigation menu on the Map screen 3 Touch New Route The New Route to screen appears 4 Touch to show the next page 5 Touch Coordinates The Coordinates screen appears 6 Enter the latitude value and touch OK O When a value is already entered in the text field touch a
149. ch the key again m Checking the update Traffic and Weather information Traffic amp Weather Now allows you to ac cess the latest report ready for you whenever you want to hear it Set up your favorite traffic amp weather city from the set up menu and then when you press the Traffic amp Weather Now button you will be able to hear the latest report and it will start from the beginning O SXV300 or later SiriusXM Connect vehicle tuner Sold separately is required to use this function O To use this function register the desired city in advance gt For details refer to Registering the city on page 163 Touch the following key Switches to the channel broad casting the traffic and weather in formation for the selected city The icon display indicates as follows Grayed out Traffic amp Weather broadcast for your market is not yet available With green dot latest report available but not listened to yet White latest report available to hear again O If the key is touched when a target city is not registered the City screen is dis played the SiriusXM satellite radio e You can return to the original channel by pressing while listening to the traffic and weather channel e The channel automatically returns to the original channel after the broadcast reaches the end of the traffic and weather information Registering the city O SXV300 or later SiriusXM Connect vehicle tuner
150. ch the keys the left right speaker balance moves towards the left or right O Left25 to Right25 is displayed as the left right speaker balance moves from the left to right The default setting is L R 0 I You can also set the fader balance by drag ging the point on the displayed table Moves towards the left Moves towards the right Using balance adjustment You can adjust the balance between right left sound output O This function is available only when main audio is available O This function is available only when Rear Speaker is set to Off gt For details refer to Adjusting the front and rear speaker output on page 198 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow Bg BD The Audio screen appears 3 Touch Balance The Fader Balance screen appears Chapter Audio adjustments 33 4 Touch the following keys to adjust the left right speaker balance Each time you touch the keys the left right speaker balance moves towards the left or right O Left25 to Right25 is displayed as the left right speaker balance moves from the left to right The default setting is L R 0 I You can also set the fader balance by drag ging the point on the displayed table Moves towards the left Moves towards the right Switching sound muting attenuation You can
151. concerning operations see RESET button the remote control manual For details of the operations refer to Re setting the microprocessor on page 12 en 13 Chapter KD Basic operation Auto EQ microphone input jack Use to connect a microphone for acoustical measurement sold separately 1 Disc loading slot Insert a disc to play gt For details refer to nserting and ejecting a disc on page 17 2 SD card slot gt For details refer to nserting and ejecting an SD memory card on page 18 3 Detachable faceplate button Press to remove the detachable faceplate from this product gt For details refer to Removing the detach able faceplate on page 16 Remote control QD eee es eee lM VOLUME S See bed TE ew MUTE e FRONT L REAR I lt oy gt FOT A gt Stas O VOLUME 2 REAR SRC e Press to cycle through all the available rear Sources C44 En e Press and hold to turn the rear source off 3 SRC OFF e Press to cycle through all the available front sources e Press and hold to turn the front source off 4 Source mode select switch Use to switch the source mode between the front source and the rear source Thumb pad Use to select a menu on the DVD menu RETURN Returns to the specified point and starts playback from there D P I Press to pause or resume playback lt lt For audio Press and hold to pe
152. connect an iPhone or a smartphone Android that has the AVICSYNC App installed Be sure to read before you use AVICSYNC function IMPORTANT Premium services for AVICSYNC require a paid subscription in order to be used and not all services are available in all coun tries Please refer to our website for more details Please be aware that you may be charged additional roaming charges by your cellular provider if you use connected services while abroad If the Data Plan for your iPhone or smart phone Android does not provide for unlim ited data usage additional charges from your carrier may apply for accessing app based connected content via networks other than Wi Fi The information which is sent by content provider such as search results regula tions prices etc may not necessarily corre spond to the actual condition Utilise the information for your reference To ensure compatibility always use the lat est version of the AVICSYNC App Limitations Access to app based connected content will depend on the availability of cellular and or Wi Fi network coverage for the purpose of al lowing your smartphone to connect to the In ternet Service availability may be geographically lim ited to the region Consult the connected con tent service provider for additional information Ability of this product to access connected content is subject to change without notice and could be affected by any of the follow
153. ctions and functions for each device The settings and cables required for connecting each device and the available sources are as follows iPod iPhone with a 30 pin connector Required cable sold se Papi OMe NOMS I ESUN CD IU201S not required parately iPhone iPod iPhone iPod iPhone iPod Smartphone Setup Bluetooth connection Bluetooth connec tion is required Connect to USB port 1 for using aha Pandora AppRadio Mode or AVICSYNC App Connect to USB port 1 for using aha Pandora or AVICSYNC App Connection requirement Pandora AppRadio Mode AVICSYNC App J fara Available source Pandora 90 En Chapter iPod iPhone or smartphone setup operation iPod iPhone with a Lightning connector CD IH202 Cable connec CD IU52 CD IV202AV Required cable sold separately tion is not re CD IU52 Lightning Di CD1US2 quired gital AV Lightning to Adapter VGA Adapter iPhone iPod iPhone iPod iPhone iPod iPhone iPod Smartphone adapter Bluetooth con Bluetooth con Bluetooth con Bluetooth connection nection is re nection is re nection is re quired quired Connect to USB port 1 for using Connection requirement aha Pandora or AVICSYNC iPod audio iPod video uo1 e1ado dnj as uoydzews 10 BUOUd POd Pandora AppRadio Mode AVICSYNC App V fara Available source Pandora This connec tion and set tings are This connec available on tion and set AV
154. culated Announce Traffic Info You can select whether to have the navigation system announce by voice the traffic informa tion whenever a traffic incident on your route is received uoi epineu y JO SadUdAaJa1d Hulziwio sny Chapter ED Customizing preferences of the navigation Announce System Messages When a system message appears this naviga tion system can read out the message Warnings settings IMPORTANT e This system is able to warn you if you exceed the current speed limit This information may not be available for your region ask your local dealer or may not be fully correct for all roads on the map e You are liable for ensuring that using this fea ture is legal in the country where you intend to use It Speed Warning e Warn When Speeding You can select whether you want to receive visible and or audible warnings The following alert types are available Audio and Visual When selected audi ble and visible warnings will go off when you exceed the speed limit Visual When selected visible warnings will go off when you exceed the speed limit e Speed Limit Always Visible You can select whether you want to see the speed limit sign on the map all the time When you set the speed limit to always be visible the color of the speed limit sign changes when you exceed the speed limit e Warn at percent of the Speed Limit Outside Cities You can receive a warning when you r
155. d Pulse are cleared 3 Touch Learning The pop up menu appears 4 Touch Reset All All learned results are cleared Touch Reset All for the following cases e After changing the installation position of the navigation system e After changing the installation angle of the navigation system 192 En e After moving the navigation system to another vehicle f you touch Reset Distance all learned re sults stored in Distance are cleared Checking the connections of leads Check that the leads are properly connected between this product and vehicle Also check whether they are connected in the correct po SITIONS 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow Am The System screen appears 3 Touch System Information The following screen appears System Firmware Information E Firmware Update 3D Calibration Status Connection Status 4 Touch Connection Status The Connection Status screen appears Connection Status 0000 O Chapter The Speed Pulse value detected by this pro duct is shown 0 is shown while the vehi cle is stationary Illumination When the headlights or small lamps of the vehicle are on ON is displayed When the small lamps of the vehicle are off OFF is displayed If the orange white lead is not connected OFF appears Connection S
156. d then touch the following key The cursor position has been stored O You can also store the location without using the Saved Location screen When the Map Location screen is displayed after searching for the location or after scrolling the map open the shortcuts and then touch Save Location O In the on screen keyboard touching EJ or E enables you to store the location as your home or workplace location Saves the location as a new loca tion under Saved Location Editing stored locations Stored locations can be edited later Chapter 3 NO J pue suo ed0 HuljIpsa pue Hursa sibay Renaming stored locations 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 2 Touch the following key Displays the navigation menu on the Map screen 3 Touch the following key Displays the Saved Location P screen 4 Touch the following key Displays the shortcuts 5 Touch Edit The Select Location to Edit screen appears 6 Touch the item you want to rename and touch Rename O Home and Work cannot be renamed The location can be set again 7 Enter the name and then touch EFI 8 Touch Done The Saved Location screen appears Deleting stored locations 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 2 Touch the following key Displays the navigation menu on the Map screen 3 Touch the following key Displays the Saved Location
157. d tweets with your Twitter account Touching the key performs fast reverse of the current content for 30 seconds Touching the key dislikes the current content O Depending on the content touching P or BJ cancels dislikes Touching the key likes the cur rent content O Depending on the content touching PY or BJ cancels likes Touching the key lets you make a call to a phone number regis tered in the current content using the hands free function TA Switches between playback and pause Reading the screen MEE aharadio i 11 39 Station mark 2 Station name Shows the name of the Aha Radio station to which this product is currently tuned 3 Content image Displays an image of the current content if available 4 Rating information Shows the rated value of the current content displayed if available Current station information Shows information on the content currently being played O The item is blank if there is no corre sponding information Starting procedure When connecting an iPhone or smartphone to this product you must select the method for connecting your device Settings are required according to the connected device gt For details refer to Chapter 13 For iPhone with a 30 pin connector users 1 Unlock your iPhone 2 Connect your iPhone Connect via USB or Bluetooth gt For details of the Bluetooth connection
158. displayed when Chan nel O is selected EJ Artist performer name Shows the artist performer name for the current song when available e FJ Song title program name Shows the title of the current song program Starting procedure 1 Display the AV source selection screen gt For details of the operations refer to Dis playing the AV operation screen on page 24 2 Touch SiriusXM on the AV source se lection screen The SiriusXM screen appears Usin 3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen to control the radio gt For details refer to Using the touch panel keys on page 156 Manual tuning Touch the following keys to tune manu ally Moves down one channel at a time Moves up one channel at a time o If you keep holding J or J you can skip broadcasting channels m Selecting a preset channel from the preset channel list Once you have stored broadcast channels you can easily recall preset channels from memory with a single touch of a key gt For details refer to Storing broadcast fre quencies on page 100 1 Touch the preset channel list display key Caliente Juanes Loco De Amor Preset channel list display key the SiriusXM satellite radio 2 Touch the item on the list 1 to 6 to switch to a channel registered as a preset channel O If you touch the preset channel list display key while the preset channel list is dis played
159. dix MD Appendix o SD memory card and SDHC memory card must be exactly the same However if there gt For details about SD memory card compat is only one DivX file and one subtitle file in ibility with this product refer to Specifica a single folder the files are associated even tions on page 259 if the file names are not the same e The subtitle file must be stored in the same folder as the Divx file e Up to 255 subtitle files may be used Any more subtitle files will not be recognized Handling guidelines and supplemental information e This product is not compatible with the e Up to 64 characters can be used for the Multi Media Card MMC name of the subtitle file including the ex e Copyright protected files cannot be played tension If more than 64 characters are back used for the file name the subtitle file may not be recognized Notes specific to DivX files e The character code for the subtitle file should comply with ISO 8859 1 Using char acters other than ISO 8859 1 may cause the characters to be displayed incorrectly e The subtitles may not be displayed correctly if the displayed characters in the subtitle file include control code e For materials that use a high transfer rate the subtitles and video may not be comple tely synchronized e Only DivX files downloaded from DivX part ner sites are guaranteed for proper opera tion Unauthorized DivX files may not operate properly e DRM rental files cann
160. e in Smart phone Setup must be set to Android Auto beforehand gt For details refer to nformation on the connections and functions for each de vice on page 90 86 En ED Using hands free phoninc 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys to start voice control The voice recognition function launches and the voice control screen appears Phone Book Andy You can use the voice recognition function in the same way as using it on the iPhone or smartphone O You can also launch the voice recognition function by pressing and holding the HOME button iy Indicates that this product is on N standby for your voice commands Cancels the voice recognition function Notes for hands free phoning General notes e Connection to all cellular phones featuring Bluetooth wireless technology is not guar anteed Chapter Using hands free phoninc Cz e The line of sight distance between this pro e fthe phone number of the received call is duct and your cellular phone must be 10 meters or less when sending and receiv ing voice and data via Bluetooth technol ogy However the actual transmission distance may be shorter than the estimated distance depending on the usage environ ment With some cellular phones the ring sound may not be output from the speakers If private mode is selected on the cellular phone hands free phoning may b
161. e corded on the disc 2 Touch a track on the list to play back 106 En ED Playingadiss O O gt Playing tracks in random order All tracks on the disc can be played at random by only touching a single key Touch the following key repeatedly until the desired setting appears Turns random play on or off default Does not play tracks in random order e ES Plays all tracks in the current repeat play range in random order O If you turn random play on when the re peat play range is set to the current track the repeat play range changes to the whole of the current disc auto matically m Setting a repeat play range The repeat play range can be changed by only touching a single key Touch the following key repeatedly until the desired setting appears f 0 Changes the repeat play range Audio default Repeats the current disc Bay Repeats just the current track O Ifyou turn random play on when the repeat play range is set to the current track the re peat play range changes to the whole of the current disc automatically O If you change the repeat play range trom the whole of the current disc to the current track when random play is turned on the random play turns off automatically Video default Chapter Playingadiss O g Repeats all files E Repeats just the current chapter A Repeats just the current title m Switching
162. e and date settings 3 Setting menu screen You can customize the system and audio settings etc 4 Phone menu screen You can access the screen that is related to hands free phoning 5 AV source selection screen You can select the AV source 4 10 31 rilliance Pioneer The Best H Rock 6 Favorite source icons Chapter uol e1ado diseg You can display the icons of frequently used sources by dragging the icons to the display area gt For details of the operation refer to Changing the display order of source icons on page 25 7 AV operation screen You can operate each source Navigation menu screen You can specify way points and a destina tion Map screen e You can use this screen to check the rent vehicle position information and route to the destination cur e You can customize navigation settings O Ifyou press the MAP button the Map screen is displayed Application operation screen You can control the iPhone or smartpho applications directly on this product ne O If applications are not available the Ap plication operation screen will not be dis played En 23 Chapter KD Basic operation 1 Application menu screen This product can switch to the application menu on which you can display and oper ate the application for an iPhone or a smart phone on the screen O If application menus are not available the Application menu screen will not
163. e application you can see an image of the application on the screen of this pro duct However you will not be able to oper ate the application To use AppRadio Mode install the AppRadio app on the iPhone or smartphone beforehand to enable launching of the application on this product For details about the AppRadio app visit the following site For U S A http www pioneerelectronics com AppRadioMode For Canada http www pioneerelectronics ca AppRadioMode O Be sure to read Using app based connected content before you perform this operation gt For details refer to Using app based con nected content on page 251 Content and functionality of compatible ap plications are the responsibility of the App providers In AppRadio Mode usage is limited while driving with availability of functions and content determined by the App providers AppRadio Mode allows access to applica tions other than those listed subject to lim itations while driving PIONEER IS NOT RESPONSIBLE AND DIS CLAIMS LIABILITY FOR THIRD PARTY NON PIONEER APPS AND CONTENT IN CLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY IN ACCURACIES OR INCOMPLETE INFORMATION Using the touch panel keys App control side bar Contacts Calendar CarMediaPlay er AADAM OC Displays the source list gt For details refer to Selecting a front source on the source list on page 25 2 Displays the launcher application screen 3 Displays the previous scree
164. e current po sition O If you press the MAP button the map re turns to the current position Rotates left Rotates right Cancels map rotation lt a y 8 Ds ol Control keys on the scrolled map 231 W Temple St O You can change the vertical view angle of the map in 3D mode only gt For details refer to Switching between 2D 3D and 2D North up views on page Oe 4 Touch the following key 1 Press the MAP button ar The Map screen appears The map returns to the current po sition 2 Touch anywhere on the map The cursor and control keys appear Ifyou press the MAP button the map re turns to the current position Chapter EKD How to use the map Understanding the route guidance Once the route guidance begins the system provides various guides by voice text indica tions and signs Frequently shown route events Icon Meaning Turn left Turn right Turn back Bear right Turn sharp left Keep left section Go left on the traffic circle 3rd exit next maneuver Ol Ap Sf V it Enter traffic circle maneuver after the next maneuver f U Enter freeway HSE x Exit freeway m gt Continue straight though the inter Meaning Board ferry Leave ferry Approaching a waypoint Approaching the destination When navigating on multilane roads you will need to make sure to tak
165. e dis abled Registration and connection Cellular phone operations vary depending on the type of cellular phone Refer to the instruction manual that came with your cel lular phone for detailed instructions With cellular phones phone book transfer may not work even though your phone is paired with this product In that case dis connect your phone and then perform pairing again trom your phone to this pro duct Making and receiving calls You may hear a noise in the following situa tions When you answer the phone using the button on the phone When the person on the other end of the line hangs up the phone If the person on the other end of the line cannot hear the conversation due to an echo decrease the volume level for hands free phoning This may reduce the echo With some cellular phones even if you press the accept button on the cellular phone when a call comes in hands free phoning may not be performed e The registered name appears if the phone number of the received call is already regis tered in the phone book When one phone number is registered under different names only the phone number is dis played not registered in the phone book the phone number of the received call appears The received call and the dialed number histories You cannot make a call to the entry of an unknown user no phone number in the re ceived call history If calls are made by operatin
166. e displayed on the front screen O This setting is available only when you stop your vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake This function is available only when Back Camera Input is On gt For details refer to Setting rear view camera activation on page 181 To display Camera View at all times Camera View needs to be set to On O To set the rear view camera for Camera View mode Back Camera Input needs to be set to On gt For details refer to Setting rear view camera activation on page 181 O To set the second camera for Camera View mode set AV Input to Camera or set 2nd Camera Input to On gt For details refer to Setting AV input on page 1380 gt For details refer to Setting the second camera input on page 184 1 Press the HOME button to display the O You can also turn this function on by Top menu screen touching Camera View on the AV 2 Touch the following keys in the follow 9 Ieee ete ORT OINGS ing order 1 Press the HOME button to display the gt Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order The System screen appears 3 Touch Camera settings gt The following screen appears A System The System screen appears Camera View 3 Touch Camera settings E A N The following screen appears 2nd Camera Input r Reverse Gear Setting Parking Assist Guide 182 En Chapte
167. e entry is deleted e References are indicated like this e g gt For details of the operations refer to How to use the screens on page 22 e Model icons shown in this manual indicate that the description is intended for the models indicated by the icons If the following icons are shown the de scription is applied only to the models shown e g 8100NEX 7100NEX Terms used in this manual Front display and Rear display In this manual the screen that is attached to the body of this product will be referred to as the Front display Any additional screen that is commercially available and can be con nected to this product will be referred to as the Rear display Video image Video image in this manual indicates mov ing images of DVD Videos Video CDs ROM Videos DivX iPod and any equipment that is connected to this product such as general purpose AV equipment uoIi pnpo u External storage device USB SD The SD memory card SDHC memory card and USB memory device are collectively re ferred to as the external storage device USB SD If it indicates the USB memory only it is referred to as the USB storage device SD memory card The SD memory card and SDHC memory card are collectively referred to as the SD memory card iPod In this manual iPod and iPhone will be re ferred to as iPod m Notes on internal memory Be
168. e high lighted and neither will areas with particu larly complex road layouts Consequently the route may appear to be cut off on the display but voice guidance will continue Auto reroute function e f you deviate from the set route the system will re calculate the route from that point so that you remain on track to the destina tion e This function may not work under certain conditions Handling and care of discs Some basic precautions are necessary when handling your discs Built in drive and care e Use only conventional fully circular discs Do not use shaped discs O O 5 S e Do not use cracked chipped warped or otherwise damaged discs as they may da mage the built in drive e Use 12 cm discs Do not use 8 cm discs or an adapter for 8 cm discs e When using discs that can be printed on label surfaces check the instructions and the warnings of the discs Depending on the discs inserting and ejecting may not be possible Using such discs may result in damage to this equipment e Do not touch the recorded surface of the discs e Store discs in their cases when not in use e Avoid leaving discs in excessively hot envir onments including under direct sunlight e Do not attach labels write on or apply che micals to the surface of the discs e Do not attach commercially available labels or other materials to the discs The discs may warp making the disc un playable The labels may c
169. e infor mation that you provide and not on any data from the vehicle The fuel mileage displayed is only a reference value and does not guarantee that the fuel mileage displayed can be ob tained Setting the initial odometer value Before you use the fuel consumption feature enter the initial odometer value from which you want to start measuring the mileage 60 En 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 2 Touch the following key Displays the navigation menu on the Map screen 3 Touch Useful Information The Useful Information screen appears 4 Touch Fuel Consumption The Fuel Consumption screen appears 5 Touch Initial Milometer Value The Set Initial Milometer Value screen ap pears 6 Enter the initial odometer value and then touch EEJ The initial odometer value has been set Entering the fuel consumption information To calculate the fuel consumption for the dis tance you have traveled enter the distance dri ven and the amount of fuel whenever you fill up your car 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 2 Touch the following key Displays the navigation menu on the Map screen 3 Touch Useful Information The Useful Information screen appears 4 Touch Fuel Consumption The Fuel Consumption screen appears 5 Touch Add The Add Consumption Entry screen ap pears Chapter Checking useful information about y
170. e rear right speaker and the selected listening po sition e Subwoofer Changes the distance between the subwoo fer speaker and the selected listening posi tion f you touch TA On the time alignment is turned off f you touch Apply Auto EQ the result of A EQ amp TA Measurement will be applied to the time alignment setting O To use this function the vehicle s acoustics must be measured in advance Decreases the distance between the se lected speaker and the selected listen ing position Increases the distance between the se lected speaker and the selected listen ing position I sjuaujsnipe oipny Using the automatic sound levelizer During driving noise in the car changes ac cording to the driving speed and road condi tions ASL automatic sound levelizer monitors such varying noise and automati cally increases the volume level if this noise becomes greater The sensitivity variation of volume level to noise level of ASL can be set to one of five levels O This function is available only when main audio is available 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow a BD The Audio screen appears 3 Touch ASL The ASL screen appears 4 Touch the item you want to set e Off default Turns the ASL setting off e LOW Changes the ASL level to low e MID LOW Changes the ASL level t
171. e the proper lane for the recommended route If there is lane information available in the map data the navigation system will display the lanes and corresponding directions of tra vel at the bottom of the map using small ar rows Highlighted arrows represent the lane and direction that you need to take for the re commended route Lane information Redding Signs are displayed at the top of the map Sign colors and design styles are similar to those of the actual signs in place above or along the in dicated roads These signs display select desti nations and the road number of the road that the relevant lane leads to Chapter How to use the map Ce If you are approaching a complex intersection and the necessary information exists the map is replaced with a 3D view of the junction Signposts ba LINET O Ifthe data for these items is not contained in the map data the information is not available even if there are signs on the ac tual road When you set Offer Freeway Services to on the fF icon appears while you are driving on freeways Touch the icon to open the details of the next few exits or service stations In ad dition touch an item to show its location on the map You can set it as a waypoint easily O If you want to display other types of POIs for the exits you can change the icons in Services Displayed gt For details refer to Navigation Map set tings on pa
172. each the set percentage of the speed limit in rural areas e Warn at percent of the Speed Limit in Cities You can receive a warning when you reach the set percentage of the speed limit in urban areas En Alert Points This setting allows you to receive a warning when approaching alert points like school zones or railroad crossings gt For details refer to Setting the alert point warnings on page 70 Navigation Map settings Map Display You can see the effect when you change a set ting e Viewpoint You can adjust the basic zoom and tilt le vels to your needs Three levels are avail able e Color Mode You can switch between daytime and night time color modes or let the software switch between the two modes automatically a few minutes before sunrise and a few min utes after sunset e Day Map Color You can select the color scheme used in the daytime map e Night Map Color You can select the color scheme used in nighttime map e Landmarks This setting shows or hides 3D landmarks which are 3D artistic or block representa tions of prominent or well known objects O For AVIC 6100NEX and AVIC 5100NEX this function becomes effective only when the additional map data is in stalled e Buildings This setting shows or hides 3D city models which are 3D artistic or block representa tions of complete city building data con taining actual building sizes and actual positions on the map
173. ead of Add to iTunes Wish List If you touch Remove from iTunes Wish List the song will be removed from the wish list O The operation result depends on the iPod m Using this product s iPod function from your iPod You can control this product s iPod function from the connected iPod if the control mode is set to App Mode The application screen of the iPod can be displayed on this product and the music files and video files in the iPod can be played back with this product O This function is not available when using iPod function with an iPhone 6 Plus iPhone 6 iPhone 5s iPhone 5c iPhone 5 or iPod touch 5th generation 1 While this function is in use the iPod will not turn off even if the ignition key is turned off Operate the iPod to turn off the power 1 Touch the following key A Switches the control mode O The control mode switches to App Mode The icon changes to Fal 2 Operate the connected iPod to select a video or song and play O The following functions are still accessible from this product even if the control mode 128 En ED UsinganiPod OO oO o is set to App Mode However the opera tion will depend on your applications Playing pausing Fast forwarding reversing Tracking up down Moving up down to a chapter 3 Touch the following key K Switches the control mode to con trol iPod functions from this pro duct
174. ear view camera to this product select the suitable video signal set ting O You can operate this function only for the video signal input into the AV input 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order gt J The Video Setup screen appears 3 Touch Video Signal Setting The following screen appears M Video Setup N AUX Camera 4 Touch Camera The pop up menu appears 5 Touch the item you want to set e Auto default Adjusts the video signal setting automati cally e PAL Sets the video signal to PAL e NTSC Sets the video signal to NTSC e PAL M Sets the video signal to PAL M e PAL N Sets the video signal to PAL N e SECAM Sets the video signal to SECAM m Chapter Setting up the video player 35 Language code chart for DVDs Language Two letter Two letter code Language code input code input code aa 0101 Afar ie 0905 ab 0102 Abkhazian ik 0911 af 0106 Afrikaans in 0914 am 0113 Amharic is 0919 ar 0118 Arabic it 0920 as 0119 Assamese iw 0923 ay 0125 Aymara ja 1001 az 0126 Azerbaijani ji 1009 ba 0201 Bashkir jw 1023 be 0205 Belarusian ka 1101 bg 0207 Bulgarian kk 1111 bh 0208 Bihari kl 1112 bi 0209 Bislama km 1113 bn 0214 Bengali kn 1114 bo 0215 Tibetan ko 1115 br 0218 Breton ks 1119 ca 0301 Catalan ku 1121 co 0315 Corsican ky 1125 cs 0319 Czech la 120
175. ection and Bluetooth Set tings menus are displayed The avail able functions and displays for the menus vary depending on the con nected type of iDatalink adapter and the vehicle model D Closes the screen Displays entries in the list by the initial character History list screen ft Andy 0000000000 ft Andy Andy 0000000000 H Andy 0000000000 E Andy 0000000000 Switches to call history 152 En Dial screen Dial pad 2 Deletes one digit Touch and hold to de lete all digits 3 Turns private mode on or off 4 Makes a phone call when a phone num ber is selected Switches between callers on hold Ends a call Rejects an incoming call Cancels call waiting Dial confirmation screen Switches the mode to enter the phone number directly 2 Turns private mode on or off 3 Minimizes the dial confirmation screen 4 Accepts an incoming call Ends acall Chapter Using a Bluetooth audio player 26 You can control a Bluetooth audio player O Before using the Bluetooth audio player you must register and connect the device to this product gt For details refer to Registering your Bluetooth devices on page 7 4 O Operations may vary depending on the Bluetooth audio player O Depending on the Bluetooth audio player connected to this product the available op erations with this product may be limited to the following two levels A2DP
176. ection Status 4 Touch 3D Calibration Status The 3D Calibration Status screen appears 4S 3D Calibration Status Learning Distance Learning Indicates the current driving mode 2 Distance Indicates driving distance s6ul asS Wia sAs 3 Acceleration or deceleration Rotational speed Indicates the acceleration or deceleration velocity of your vehicle The rotational speed when your vehicle turns to the left or right is also shown 4 Inclination Indicates the incline of the street that you are currently on 5 Speed Pulse Indicates the total number of speed pulses Degree of learning Sensor learning situations for distance Distance right turns Right Turn left turns Left Turn and 3D detection 3D are indicated by the length of the bars 1 When the tires have been changed or chains have been fitted turning on the Speed Pulse allows the system to detect the fact that the tire diameter has chan ged and automatically replaces the value for calculating distance O Ifa separately sold speed pulse genera tor ND PG1 is connected the distance calculation value cannot be replaced automatically m Clearing the status You can delete the learned results stored in Distance Speed Pulse or Learning 1 Touch Distance or Speed Pulse A message confirming whether to erase the data appears 2 Touch Yes The results stored in Distance or Spee
177. efer to Checking route information and preferences on page 48 8 Touch Start Navigation Your navigation system starts the route gul dance gt For details of the route guidance refer to Understanding the route guidance on page 34 Selecting a location you searched for recently The places that were previously set as destina tions or waypoints have been automatically stored in History History 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 2 Touch the following key Displays the navigation menu on the Map screen 42 En KD Searching for a destination 3 Touch New Route The New Route to screen appears 4 Touch History The list of recent destinations appears 5 Touch the entry you want The searched location appears on the Map screen 6 Touch Select as Destination on the Map Location screen gt For details on the operations in the Map Location screen refer to Using the Map Location screen on page 45 After touching Select as Destination the Route Summary screen appears and count down begins When the countdown ends the guidance automatically starts If the screen is touched anywhere during the countdown the countdown stops and the screen will stay as it iS gt For details on the operations in the Route Summary screen refer to Checking route information and preferences on page 48 7 Touch Start Navigation Your navigation system
178. el calibration If you feel that the touch panel keys on the screen deviate from the actual positions that respond to your touch adjust the response po sitions of the touch panel screen O This setting is available only when you stop your vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake O Do not use sharp pointed tools such as a ballpoint or mechanical pen which could damage the screen O Do not turn off the engine while saving the adjusted position data 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow Am The System screen appears 3 Touch Touch Panel Calibration The touch panel adjustment screen appears 4 Touch two corners of the screen along the arrows and then touch the centers of two marks at the same time twice 5 Press the HOME button The adjustment results are saved 6 Press the HOME button once again Proceed to 16 point adjustment f you press and hold the HOME button the adjustment is canceled 7 Gently touch the center of the mark displayed on the screen The target indicates the order After you touch all marks the adjusted posi tion data is saved f you press the HOME button the previous adjustment position returns f you press and hold the HOME button the adjustment is canceled 8 Press and hold the HOME button The adjustment results are saved Setting the dimmer function You can specity the
179. elected camera mode By touching Source Navi or Apps you can return to the selected mode s6ul 9sS W JZS S 6 Touch the following keys to adjust the selected item Decreases the level of the selected item Increases the level of the selected item Selects the adjustable previous item Selects the adjustable next item Each time you touch the key the level of the selected item increases or decreases Brightness Contrast Color and Hue can be adjusted from 24 to 24 Dimmer Level can be adjusted from 1 to 48 Temperature can be adjusted from 3 to 3 The adjustments of Brightness Con trast and Dimmer Level are stored se parately for the On Off status of the dimmer function These are switched automatically depending on whether the dimmer function is on or off gt For details on setting the dimmer func tion refer to Setting the dimmer function on page 187 The picture adjustment may not be avail able with some rear view cameras The setting contents can be memorized se parately for the following screens and video images DVD Video CD and Disc AV and external camera USB Video and USB JPEG SD Video and SD JPEG iPod iPod with a 30 pin connector iPod Video and AppRadio Mode iPod with a 30 pin connector HDMI and AppRadio Mode HDMI f
180. electing files from the file name list You can select files to view using the file name list of the files stored in the external storage device USB SD 1 Touch the following key Displays the list of the files stored in the external storage device USB SD 2 Touch a file on the list to play back O Files are played back in file number order and folders are skipped if they contain no files If folder 01 root folder contains no files playback commences with folder 02 O Touching a folder on the list shows its con tents You can play a file on the list by touching it m Playing files in random order All files in the external storage device USB SD can be played at random by only touching a single key Touch the following key repeatedly until the desired setting appears Turns random play on or off 120 En default Does not play files in random order e ES Plays all files in the current repeat play range in random order Setting a repeat play range The repeat play range can be changed by only touching a single key Touch the following key repeatedly until the desired setting appears 7 E Changes the repeat play range default Repeats all files Repeats the current folder Switching the media file type When playing a digital media containing a mixture of various media file types you can switch between media Tile types to play 1 Touch the following
181. els nsss MP3 decoding format ws WMA decoding format AAC decoding format s s DivX decoding format 6 dB oct 12 dB oct 18dB oct 24dB to 10dB Normal Reverse 0 to 200 step 1 inch step DVD Video VCD CD MP3 WMA AAC DivX MPEG player 1 DVD VIDEO VIDEO CD CD CD R CD RW DVD R DVD RW DVD RDL 5 Hz to 44 000 Hz with DVD at sampling frequency 96 kHz 96 dB 1 kHz IHF A net work RCA level 1 0 Vp p 75Q 0 2 V 2 stereo MPEG 1 2 amp 2 5 Audio Layer 3 Ver 7 8 9 2 ch audio Windows Media Player MPEG 4 AAC only encoded by iTunes m4a Ver 11 and earlier Home Theater Ver 3 11 Ver 4 X Ver 5 X Ver6 X avi divx MPEG video decoding format USB USB standard Spec acelin Max current SUPPLY wees USB ASS nef raai Pile Sy SUOMI Surne eann MP3 decoding format sss WMA decoding format 260 En MPEG 1 mpg mpeg dat MPEG 2 PS mpg mpeg MPEG 4 Part2 Visual MS MPEG 4 Ver 3 avi USB1 1 USB2 0 High Speed 1 6A MSC Mass Storage Class device iPod AudioClass HID Class device FAT16 FAT32 NTFS MPEG 1 Layer 1 MPEG 1 Layer 2 MPEG 1 Layer 3 MPEG 2 Layer 1 MPEG 2 Layer 2 MPEG 2 Layer 3 MPEG 2 5 Layer 3 WMA10 Std WMA10 Pro WMAQ9 Lossless AAC decoding format uss MPEG 2 AAC LC MPEG 4 AAC LC WAVE Signal format sssesse Linear PCM H 264 video decoding format ice Ae caste Mecca eat BaseLine Pro
182. ency to a key for later recall by continuing to touch the key gt For details refer to Storing broadcast fre quencies on page 95 m Reading the screen Band indicator Shows the tuned band FM1 FM2 FM3 or AM 2 Current time and date 3 Program service name indicator Shows the program service name station name of the current station 4 Song title Shows the title of the current song when available Artist name Shows the artist name for the current song when available iTunes tagging song status indicator Shows the status of the song information stored in this product O The icon is displayed on all operation screens of AV sources En oipe y buisn Indicator Meaning Appears when the song information tag is stored in this product Appears when the song information tag is being transferred to an iPod D iTunes tagging indicator Indicates songs that are capable of iTunes tag ging O The icon is displayed on all operation screens of AV sources Indicator Meaning Appears when this product receives an iTunes song tag that can be stored and then downloaded to an iPod for later purchase Tag Flashes when this product is storing song tag information Frequency indicator 9 Preset number indicator Highlights the selected preset item m Starting procedure 1 Display the AV source selection screen gt For details of the operations refer to Dis playin
183. eneration e iPod nano 5th generation e iPod nano 4th generation e iPod nano 8rd generation iPod with Lightning connector e iPhone 6 Plus e iPhone 6 e iPhone 5s e iPhone 5c e iPhone d e iPod touch bth generation e jPod nano 7th generation m Android device compatibility O Operation methods may vary depending on the Android device and the software ver sion of the Android OS O Depending on the version of the Android OS it may not be compatible with this pro duct O Compatibility with all Android devices is not guaranteed gt For details about Android device compat ibility with this product refer to the infor mation on our website m AppRadio Mode Compatibility iPod with 30 pin connector e iPhone 4s e iPhone 4 e iPod touch 4th generation iPod with Lightning connector e iPhone 6 Plus e iPhone 6 e iPhone 5s e iPhone 5c e iPhone 5 e iPod touch bth generation gt For details about Android device compat ibility with this product refer to the infor mation on our website m MirrorLink device compatibility O This product is compatible with MirrorLink version 1 0 Compatibility with all MirrorLink devices is not guaranteed gt For details about MirrorLink device com patibility with this product refer to the in formation on our website uo1 e19ado dnj as uoydzews 10 BUOUd POd Chapter ED iPod iPhone or smartphone setup operation Information on the conne
184. ent setting 2 Touch the desired mode e Full A 4 3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal direction only enabling you to enjoy a 4 3 TV picture normal picture without any omissions O This setting is for video only e Zoom A 4 3 picture is enlarged in the same pro portion both vertically and horizontally ideal for a wide screen picture O This setting is for video only e Normal A 4 3 picture is displayed normally giving you no sense of disparity since its propor tions are the same as those of the normal picture e Trimming An image is displayed across the entire screen with the horizontal to vertical ratio left as is If the horizontal to vertical ratio differs between the display and the image the image may be displayed partly cut off either at the top bottom or sides O This setting is for JPEG images only O Different settings can be stored for each video source Selecting the video for the rear display You can choose either to show the same image as the front screen or to show the se lected source on the rear display O This function is not available during a call via this product or while using the voice re cognition function 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following key AV Displays the AV source selection screen 3 Touch Rear The Rear screen appears 4 Touch the source you want to show on the rear display The source you can select is a
185. eo image of the iPod turn off the output setting of the rear display gt For details of the operations refer to Se lecting the video for the rear display on page 224 m Chapter CUsinganiPod CS Setting the shuffle play This function shuffles songs albums or videos and plays them in random order O This function is not available while playing iTunes Radio Touch the following key repeatedly until the desired setting appears mad Plays back songs or videos in random order within the selected list Ea Selects an album randomly and then plays back all songs in that album in order O This icon may not be displayed when an iPhone 6 Plus iPhone 6 iPhone 5s iPhone 5c iPhone 5 or iPod touch 5th generation is used m Turns random play on or off Setting a repeat play range The repeat play range can be changed by only touching a single key O This function is not available while playing iTunes Radio Touch the following key repeatedly until the desired setting appears Changes the repeat play range Repeats all songs or videos in the selected list A Repeats just the current song or video O The repeat setting can be turned off when an iPhone 6 Plus iPhone 6 iPhone 5s iPhone 5c iPhone 5 or iPod touch 6th gen eration is used En 125 pod ue Huisn Chapter ED singani OO O o Selecting song or video sources from the playlist screen You can
186. epend on the availability of cellular and or Wi Fi network coverage for the purpose of al App Store lowing your smartphone to connect to the lIn App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc ternet e Service availability may be geographically lim ited to the region Consult the connected con IOS tent service provider for additional iOS is a trademark on which Cisco holds the information trademark right in the US and certain other e Ability of this product to access connected countries content is subject to change without notice and could be affected by any of the following compatibility issues with future firmware ver iTunes l ee sions of smartphone compatibility issues with iTunes is a trademark of Apple Inc registered future versions of the connected content ap in the U S and other countries plication s for the smartphone changes to or discontinuation of the connected Content ap plication s or service by its provider iTunes Radio e Pioneer is not liable for any issues that may Tunes Radio is a service mark of Apple Inc arise from incorrect or flawed app based con tent e he content and functionality of the supported Using app based connected applications are the responsibility of the App content providers e n AppRadio Mode and Android Auto func IMPORTANT tionality through the product is limited while Requirements to access app based connected driving with available functions determined con
187. er to the Installation Manual A CAUTION For safety reasons video images cannot be viewed while your vehicle is in motion To view video images you must stop in a safe place and apply the parking brake Using the touch panel keys Displays the source list gt For details refer to Selecting a front source on the source list on page 25 2 Displays the Time and date setting screen gt For details refer to Setting the time and date on page 221 3 Displays the Setting menu screen 4 Recalls equalizer curves gt For details refer to Using the equalizer on page 202 Hides the touch panel keys Touching this area hides the touch panel keys O Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display the touch panel keys again 6 Displays the Phone menu screen 172 En gt For details refer to Displaying the phone menu on page 80 7 Changes the wide screen mode gt For details refer to Changing the wide screen mode on page 223 m Reading the screen Current time and date Starting procedure 1 Display the AV source selection screen gt For details of the operations refer to Dis playing the AV operation screen on page 24 2 Touch HDMI on the AV source selec tion screen The image is displayed on the screen 3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen to control the external unit gt For details refer to Using the touch panel keys on page 172 Chapter Using an AUX source 2
188. erations refer to Dis playing the AV operation screen on page 24 2 Touch My Vehicle on the AV source se lection screen The following screen appears My Vehicle gt lt 3 Touch USB iPod SiriusXM or Bluetooth Audio when you want to oper ate iDatalink Chapter 25 Using iDatalink 4 Use the touch panel keys on the screen to control the OEM feature USB iPod Media player ISR iPod e Displays the source list gt For details refer to Selecting a front source on the source list on page 25 2 Displays the Time and date setting screen gt For details refer to Setting the time and date on page 221 3 Displays the Setting menu screen 4 Recalls equalizer curves gt For details refer to Using the equalizer on page 202 5 Selects a track from the list 6 Switches the text display between tag information and file folder information D Displays the Phone menu screen gt For details refer to Displaying the phone menu on page 80 Switches to the next or previous page of touch panel keys 9 Functions and displays vary depending on the connected type of iDatalink adapter and the vehicle model Switches between playback and pause Satellite Radio IAA o 150 En Displays the source list gt For details refer to Selecting a front source on the source list on page 25 2 Selects a band 3 Displays the Time and date s
189. es about disc compatibility e Certain functions of this product may not be available for some discs e Compatibility with all discs is not guaran teed e tis not possible to playback DVD ROM DVD RAM discs e Playback of discs may become impossible with direct exposure to sunlight high tem peratures or depending on the storage conditions in the vehicle DVD Video discs e DVD Video discs that have incompatible re gion numbers cannot be played on this DVD drive The region number of the player can be found on this product s chassis DVD R DVD RW DVD R SL Single Layer DVD R DL Dual Layer discs e Untfinalized discs which have been re corded with the Video format video mode cannot be played back e Discs which have been recorded with the Video Recording format VR mode cannot be played back e DVD R DL Dual Layer discs which have been recorded with Layer Jump recording cannot be played back e For detailed information about recording mode please contact the manufacturer of media recorders or writing software Appendix Appendix OS CD R CD RW discs e Untfinalized discs cannot be played back Notes on SD memory cards e Some SD memory cards may not be recog It may not be possible to playback CD R CD RW discs recorded on a music CD re corder or a computer because of disc char acteristics scratches or dirt on the disc or dirt scratches or condensation on the lens of the built in drive
190. es correctly The volume level will not rise The system is performing still slow There is no sound during still slow motion or motion or frame by frame playback frame by frame playback with DVD Video with DVD Video The system is paused or performing For the media other than music CD CD DA fast reverse or forward during the there is no sound on fast reverse or forward disc playback The icon O is displayed and op The operation is not compatible This operation is not possible For example eration is impossible with the video configuration the DVD playing does not feature that angle audio system subtitle language etc The picture stops pauses and The reading of data is impossible Stop playback once then restart this product cannot be oper during disc playback ated The picture is stretched with an The aspect setting is incorrect for Select the appropriate setting for that image incorrect aspect ratio the display Page 215 A parental lock message is dis The parental lock is on Turn the parental lock off or change the level played and DVD playback is not Page 215 possible The parental lock for DVD play The code number is incorrect Input the correct code number Page 215 back cannot be canceled en 227 Appendix MD Appendx SSOC S S SC C S S S S Symptom Cause Playback is not with the audio The DVD playing does not feature language and subtitle language dialog or subtitles in t
191. ested route e Avoid Road Ahead Shows the route avoiding the road ahead Touch or to set the distance you want to avoid Touch Avoid to apply the sug gested route e Restore Original Route Cancels the route with avoidances and re stores the previous route The route set by Alternative Routes cannot be canceled Checking route information and preferences Once you set the route you can check a sum mary of the current route 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 2 Touch the following key IS Displays the navigation menu on the Map screen 3 Touch Route Summary The Route Summary screen appears Chapter Checking and modifying the current route 06 4 Touch one of the options O United D States a O You can scroll the map by dragging the map M Shows the information for a transit point on the route Touching the items allows you to see the location on the map Touch Avoid and Accept to set the location as a loca tion to avoid 2 Cancels the Route Summary screen and displays the map of the current position 3 Shows the conditions of the displayed route 4 The screen returns to the initial position and the map scale returns to the initial scale Zoom in zoom out O You can also pinch or expand the map to Zoom in or out Shows alternative routes gt For details refer to Checking route alter natives on page 47 D Returns to the
192. etting screen gt For details refer to Setting the time and date on page 221 4 Displays the Setting menu screen 5 Recalls equalizer curves gt For details refer to Using the equalizer on page 202 6 Selects a channel from the list D Switches the text display between the current channel information and the current content information Displays the Phone menu screen gt For details refer to Displaying the phone menu on page 80 Switches to the next or previous page of touch panel keys Functions and displays vary depending on the connected type of iDatalink adapter and the vehicle model i Displays the preset channels 2 Selects a preset channel Selecting a preset channel from the preset chan nel list SiriusXM Hits 1 ATI 20 on 20 Age od SiriusXM Hit 23 Pop 50s on 5 60s on 6 d u NNI Extd 70s on 7 Preset tuning keys 2 Preset channel list display key Chapter Using iDatalink 25 Selecting a SiriusXM channel directly Hands free phone gt a Pop via this product or while using the voice re cognition function C By connecting this product to the vehicle bus y system using an iDatalink adapter sold sepa he AT rately this product can access the hands free O E phone for the vehicle T SiriusXM O This function is not available during a call aj Setting Bluetooth 1 Press the HOME button to display the Clear key Top
193. ettings 12 Touch Online Services 13 Touch the service that you want to acti vate The menus for the connected service are activated Getting the map update You can update existing content purchase ad ditional maps and activate extra services on your product Io update the content download the update on your USB memory storage by using the computer to which the Naviextras Toolbox is installed Then transfer the data from connected USB memory storage to your navigation system by using SyncTool on this product O For details access the following URL and refer to HOW TO UPDATE GUIDE http pioneer naviextras com J UO1 EHIACU y JO Sa2UdABZaId Hulziwio snD If your devices feature Bluetooth technology this product can be connected to your devices wirelessly This section describes how to set up a Bluetooth connection For details about connectivity with the devices featuring Bluetooth wireless technology refer to the information on our website O The Bluetooth menu is available only when you stop your vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake Preparing communication devices This product has a built in function that en ables to use devices featuring Bluetooth wire less technology gt For details refer to Notes for hands free phoning on page 86 You can register and use devices that feature the following profiles with this product e HFP Hands Free Profile e
194. eys in the follow ing order 40 The Video Setup screen appears 3 Touch DVD DivX Setup The following screen appears Video Setup Subtitle Language Audio Lanquage Menu Language 7 Multi Angle TV Aspect 4 Touch Multi Angle repeatedly until the desired setting appears e On default Turns the multi angle setting on e Off Turns the multi angle setting off m Chapter Setting up the video player 35 Setting the aspect ratio There are two kinds of displays A wide screen display has a width to height ratio TV aspect of 16 9 while a regular display has a TV aspect of 4 3 If you use a regular rear display with a TV aspect of 4 3 you can set the aspect ratio suitable for your rear display We recommend use of this function only when you want to fit the aspect ratio to the rear display O When using a regular display select either Letter Box or Pan Scan Selecting 16 9 may result in an unnatural image O Ifyou select the TV aspect ratio this pro duct s display will change to the same set ting O This setting is available only when Disc is selected as the source 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order J The Video Setup screen appears 3 Touch DVD DivX Setup The following screen appears Video Setup Subtitle Language Audio Language Menu Language
195. fied on the disc is applied O You can switch the audio language by touching the audio language switching key during playback O The setting made here will not be affected even if the audio language is switched dur ing playback using the audio language switching key Setting the menu language You can set the preferred language in which the menus recorded on a disc are displayed 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order J The Video Setup screen appears 3 Touch DVD DivX Setup The following screen appears Video Setup Subtitle Language E TES Menu Language f Multi Angle TV Aspect 4 Touch Menu Language The pop up menu appears 5 Touch the desired language When you select Others a language code input screen is shown Input the four digit code of the desired language then touch fy gt For details refer to Language code chart for DVDs on page 219 The menu language is set 214 En 35 Setting up the video player O If the selected language is not available the language specified on the disc is dis played m Setting the angle icon display You can set whether to display the angle icon on the scenes where the angle can be switched O This setting is available only when Disc is selected as the source 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following k
196. file Main Pro tile High Profile WMV video decoding format a A VC 1 SP MP AP WMV 7 8 MPEG4 video decoding format EA E E A SimpleProfile Advanced SimpleProfile except GMC JPEG decoding format JPEG SD AVIC 8100NEX and AVIC 7100NEX SD memory card SDHC memory card Compatible physical format P E E E Version 2 0 File SYStEM wessssssecsesstessseees FAT16 FAT32 NTFS MP3 decoding format Ree aera EN MPEG 1 Layer 1 MPEG 1 Layer 2 MPEG 1 Layer3 MPEG 2 Layer 1 MPEG 2 Layer 2 MPEG 2 Layer3 MPEG 2 5 Layer 3 WMA decoding format E AE N AES WMA10 Std WMA10 Pro WMA9 Lossless AAC decoding format EAE ces ER MPEG 2 AAC LC MPEG 4 AAC LC WAVE signal format Linear PCM H 264 video decoding format e tilda eaten BaseLine Profile Main Pro file High Profile WMV video decoding format E cuties VC 1 SP MP AP WMV 7 8 MPEG4 video decoding format Siecle aS R SimpleProfile Advanced SimpleProfile except GMC JPEG decoding format We eee RNE JPEG Bluetooth Versio amann aama Bluetooth 3 0 EDR certi fied OUT OU COWIE nssssssvsnrsverrrreerrrernn 4dBm Max Power class 2 FM tuner AVIC 8100NEX AVIC 7100NEX and AVIC 6100NEX Frequency range nns 87 9 MHz to 107 9 MHz Usable sensitivity 11 dBf 0 8 uV 75 Q mono S N 30 dB Appendix Appendix OGG Signal to noise ratio 80 dB digital broadcasting IHF A network 72 dB analog broadcasting IHF A network AVIC 5100NEX Frequency ran
197. for unlimited data usage additional charges from your carrier may apply for acces sing the Pandora service via 3G EDGE and or LTE 4G networks e You need to connect to the Internet via 3G EDGE LTE 4G or Wi Fi network to use the Pandora service Limitations e Depending on the availability of the Internet you may not be able to receive the Pandora service e The Pandora service is subject to change with Out notice The service could be affected by any of the fol lowing firmware version of the iPhone firm ware version of the Pandora application changes to the Pandora music service 142 En 23 Streaming Pandora e Certain functions of the Pandora service are not available when accessing the service through Pioneer car audio video products They include but are not limited to the follow ing sending information about current sta tions buying tracks from iTunes viewing additional text information logging in to Pandora adjusting Cell Network Audio Qual ity Notes e Pandora internet radio is a music service not affiliated with Pioneer More information is available at http www pandora com e The Pandora mobile application is available for iPhone and smartphone please visit www pandora com everywhere mobile for the latest compatibility information m Using the touch panel keys Playback screen page 1 oO 0 O Displays the source list gt For details refer to Selecting a fr
198. fore removing the vehicle battery If the battery is disconnected or discharged the memory will be erased and must be repro grammed O Some of the settings and recorded con tents will not be reset Data subject to erasure The information is erased by disconnecting the yellow lead from the battery or removing the battery itself O Some of the settings and recorded con tents will not be reset Resetting the microprocessor CAUTION Pressing the RESET button resets settings and re corded contents to the factory settings O Do not perform this operation when a device is connected to this product O Some of the settings and recorded contents will not be reset 12 En KD Introduction The microprocessor must be reset under the following conditions e Priorto using this product for the first time after installation e f this product fails to operate properly e f there appears to be problems with the op eration of the system e f your vehicle position is shown on the map with a significant positioning error 1 Turn the ignition switch OFF 2 Press the RESET button with a pen tip or other pointed implement Settings and recorded contents are reset to the factory settings m m ts COO OR RESET button Chapter Basic operation 02 Checking part names and VOL button Press to adjust the AV Audio and Video functions source volume This chapter gives
199. formation tag is being transferred to an iPod iTunes tagging indicator Indicates songs that are capable of iTunes tag ging O The icon is displayed on all operation screens of AV sources Indicator Meaning Appears when this product receives an iTunes song tag that can be stored and then downloaded to an iPod for later purchase Tag Flashes when this product is storing song tag information D Channel number indicator Shows the channel number to which the tuner is currently tuned Signal level indicator 9 Current channel information 158 En the SiriusxM satellite radio Shows the detailed information of the broad cast channel currently being received e Channel name Channel number Shows the channel name or channel number of the channel currently being tuned into O RADIO ID is displayed when Chan nel O is selected e EJ Artist performer name Shows the artist performer name for the current song when available FJ Song title program name Shows the title of the current song pro gram Preset number indicator Highlights the selected preset item di Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time within the stored broadcast 2 Current content information Shows the detailed information on the content currently being played e Channel name Channel number Shows the channel name or channel number of the channel currently being tuned into O RADIO ID is
200. from a music app other than iPod music as the iPod source The app name and the song information are also displayed Using the touch panel keys I Radlk b Mix fa Free 2 Further integration AAA Pioneer The Best E mu Q Displays the source list gt For details refer to Selecting a front source on the source list on page 25 2 Displays the Time and date setting screen gt For details refer to Setting the time and date on page 221 3 Displays the Setting menu screen 4 Recalls equalizer curves gt For details refer to Using the equalizer on page 202 Selects a track from the list gt For details refer to Selecting song or video sources from the playlist screen on page 126 6 Switches the control mode to App Mode gt For details refer to Using this product s iPod function from your iPod on page 128 D Displays the Phone menu screen gt For details refer to Displaying the phone menu on page 80 Skips files forward or backward Switches between playback and pause pod ue Huisn Chapter ED singaniPod O o o Reading the screen App name Shows the App name of the currently playing 2 Song title Shows the title of the song currently being played when available No Title is dis played if there is no corresponding informa tion 3 Artist name Shows the artist name for the song currently being played when ava
201. ftware versions Others may not work correctly Made for e iPhone 6 Plus iOS 8 e iPhone 6 iOS 8 e iPhone 5s iOS 7 0 3 e iPhone 5c iOS 7 0 3 e iPhone 5 iOS 7 0 3 e iPhone 4s iOS 7 0 3 e iPhone 4 iOS 7 0 3 e iPhone 3GS iOS 6 0 1 e jPod touch 6th generation iOS 6 0 1 e iPod touch 4th generation iOS 6 0 1 e jPod touch 8rd generation iOS 5 1 1 e iPod touch 2nd generation iOS 4 2 1 e iPod classic 160GB 2009 Ver 2 0 4 Chapter iPod iPhone or smartphone setup operation 13 e iPod classic 160GB 2008 Ver 2 0 1 e iPod classic 80GB Ver 1 1 2 e iPod nano 7th generation e iPod nano 6th generation Ver 1 2 e jPod nano 5th generation Ver 1 0 2 e jPod nano 4th generation Ver 1 0 4 e jPod nano 3rd generation Ver 1 1 3 O You can connect and control an iPod com patible with this product by using sepa rately sold connector cables O Operation methods may vary depending on the iPod model and the software version of the iPod O Depending on the software version of the iPod it may not be compatible with this product For details about iPod compatibility with this product refer to the information on our website This manual applies to the following iPod models iPod with 30 pin connector e iPhone 4s e iPhone 4 e iPhone 3GS e iPod touch 4th generation e iPod touch 3rd generation e iPod touch 2nd generation e jPod classic 160GB e jPod classic 80GB e iPod nano 6th g
202. g frequency indicator Shows the sampling frequency currently play ing Title number indicator Shows the title number currently playing Chapter number indicator Shows the chapter number currently playing PBC ON indicator Indicates that a disc with PBC On is being played m Current time and date 2 Playback condition indicator Indicates the current playback condition Starting procedure 1 Display the AV source selection screen gt For details of the operations refer to Dis playing the AV operation screen on page 24 2 Insert the disc you want to play into the disc loading slot The source changes and then playback will start gt For details refer to nserting and ejecting a disc on page 17 O Ifthe disc is already set touch Disc on the source list or on the AV source selection screen gt For details refer to Selecting a front source on the source list on page 25 gt For details refer to Selecting a front source on the AV source selection screen on page 25 3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen to control the disc gt For details refer to Using the touch panel keys for audio on page 103 gt For details refer to Using the touch panel keys for video on page 103 m Selecting files from the file name list You can select tracks to play back using the track title list which is a list of the tracks re corded on a disc 1 Touch the following key Displays a list of the tracks r
203. g is canceled If you touch and hold the list item you can delete the item from the list You can register up to 50 keywords in the alert list 166 En A Alert List Delete Alli AlertOn Delete All Deletes all items memorized to the alert list 2 Alert On Alert Off Changes the settings in the following order each time you touch the key e Alert On default Activates the alert function e Alert Off Deactivates the alert function J Selecting teams for Game Alert This product can notify you when games invol ving your favorite sports teams are about to start To use this function you need to store the teams you want to follow in advance 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow Am The System screen appears 3 Touch AV Source Settings The following screen appears Chapter Using the SiriusxM satellite radio TS System MIXTRAX Settings Radio Settings SinusXM Settings T Tag Forwarding Bluetooth Audio 4 Touch SiriusXM Settings The following screen appears System Tune Start Parental Control Alert List Team Settings Featured Favorites 5 Touch Team Settings The League screen appears 6 Touch the desired league 7 Touch the desired team The team settings are enabled m Setting the Featured Favorites function Featured Favorites are groups of channe
204. g keys in the follow ing order gt J The Video Setup screen appears J ejd o p a y dn 6u3 a5 3 Touch DVD DivX Setup The following screen appears Video Setup Subtitle Language Audio Lanquage Menu Language Multi Angle TV Aspect 4 Touch Parental The Parental screen appears 5 Touch 0 to 9 to input a four digit code number 6 While the input number is displayed touch the following key 7 Touch any number between 1 to 8 to select the desired level e 8 Enables playback of the entire disc initial setting e 7to2 Enables playback of discs for children and non adult oriented discs e 1 Enables only playback of discs for children 8 While the input number is displayed touch the following key T We recommend that you keep a record of your code number in case you forget it The parental lock level is recorded on the disc You can confirm it by looking at the disc package the included literature or the disc itself You cannot use parental lock 216 En Registers the code number Sets the parental lock level 35 Setting up the video player with discs that do not feature a recorded parental lock level 11 With some discs parental lock operates to skip certain scenes only after which normal playback resumes For details refer to the disc s instructions Displaying your DivX VOD registration code If you want to play Di
205. g the AV operation screen on page 24 2 Touch Radio on the AV source selec tion screen The Radio screen appears 3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen to control the radio gt For details refer to Using the touch panel keys on page 93 ED Using the radio Selecting a band Touch the following key FM Switches between the following FM bands FM1 FM2 and FM3 Switches to AM band O This function is convenient for preparing different preset lists for each band Manual tuning Touch the following keys to tune manu ally Moves down one step at a time Moves up one step at a time O This function is convenient for preparing different preset lists for each band Seek tuning Touch and hold one of the following keys for about one second and then re lease Scans frequencies until it finds a broad cast strong enough for good reception You can cancel seek tuning by touching either key briefly If you keep holding either key you can skip broadcasting frequencies Seek tuning will start when you release the key Chapter Using the radio dH Selecting a preset channel from the preset channel list Once you have stored broadcast channels you can easily recall preset channels from memory with a single touch of a key gt For details refer to Storing broadcast fre quencies on page 95 1 Touch the preset channel list display key ws 12 03 3
206. g the screen 80 Making a phone call 81 Direct dialing 81 Calling a number in the phone book 81 Dialing from the history 82 Using the preset dial lists 83 Receiving a phone call 83 Answering an incoming call 84 Minimizing the dial confirmation screen 84 Changing the phone settings 85 Answering a call automatically 85 Switching the ring tone 85 Inverting names in the phone book 85 Setting the private mode 85 Adjusting the other party s listening volume 86 Using the voice recognition function 86 Notes for hands free phoning 86 iPod iPhone or smartphone setup operation The basic flow of iPod iPhone or smartphone setup 88 Setting the device connection method 88 iPod compatibility 88 Android device compatibility 89 AppRadio Mode Compatibility 89 MirrorLink device compatibility 89 Information on the connections and functions for each device 90 D Using the radio Using the touch panel keys 93 Reading the screen 93 Starting procedure 94 Selecting a band 94 Manual tuning 94 Seek tuning 94 Selecting a preset channel from the preset channel list 95 Storing broadcast frequencies 95 Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies 95 Tuning into strong frequencies 95 Storing song information to an iPod iTunes Tagging 96 Operating with the hardware buttons 96 15 HD Radio reception HD Radio stations 97 Using the touch panel keys 97 Reading the screen 98 Starting pro
207. g your cellular phone no history data will be recorded in this product Phone book transfers If there are more than 800 phone book en tries on your cellular phone all entries may not be downloaded completely With some cellular phones it may not be possible to transfer all items in the phone book at one time In this case transfer items one by one from your cellular phone Depending on the cellular phone this pro duct may not display the phone book cor rectly Some characters may be garbled or the order of first and last names may be re versed If the phone book in the cellular phone con tains image data the phone book may not be transferred correctly Image data can not be transferred from the cellular phone Depending on the cellular phone phone book transfer may not be available J buluoud 3a 1j3 spuey buisn Chapter ED iPod iPhone or smartphone setup operation When using an iPod iPhone or a smartphone with this product configure the settings of this product according to the device to be con nected This section describes the settings required for each device The basic flow of iPod iPhone or smartphone setup Select the method for connecting your de vice gt For details refer to Setting the device connection method on page 88 2 Connect your device to this product gt For details of the connections refer to the Installation Manual 3 If necessary connect your device t
208. ge us 87 9 MHz to 107 9 MHz gt Usable Sensitivity 11 dBt 0 8uV 75Q mono we S N 30 dB xe Signal to noise ratio 72 dB IHF A network s Q AM tuner X AVIC 8100NEX AVIC 7100NEX and AVIC 6100NEX Frequency range u 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz Usable sensitivity wc 25 UV S N 20 dB Signal to noise ratio 80 dB digital broadcasting IHF A network 62 dB analog broadcasting IHF A network AVIC 5100NEX Frequency range n 530 kHz to 1710 kHz Usable sensitivity wees 25 UV S N 20 dB Signal to noise ratio 62 dB IHF A network CEA2006 Specifications 14W RMS x 4 Channels 4Q and lt 1 THD N 91 dBA reference 1 W into 4Q Note Specifications and design are subject to possible modifications without notice due to im provements D Register your product at http www pioneerelectronics com in Canada Nttp www pioneerelectronics ca To keep up to date with the latest navigational data you can periodically update your navigation system For further details please visit http pioneer naviextras com gt K pioneer naviextras com PIONEER CORPORATION 1 1 Shin ogura Saiwai ku Kawasaki shi Kanagawa 212 0031 JAPAN PIONEER ELECTRONICS USA INC P O Box 1540 Long Beach California 90801 1540 U S A TEL 800 421 1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA INC 340 Ferrier Street Unit 2 Markham Ontario L3R 2Z5 Canada TEL 1 877 283 5901
209. ge 18 2 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 3 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order ms gt Cd The Theme screen appears 4 Touch Export The Settings Export screen appears nuaw swaul 5 Touch the desired item e Illumination Selects the illumination color setting e Splash Screen Selects the splash screen setting e Select All Selects all settings 6 Touch Export Data export starts After the data is exported a completion mes sage appears O The source is turned off and the Bluetooth connection is disconnected before the pro cess starts Importing Theme settings The settings made on the Theme screen that were exported to an external storage de vice USB SD can be imported O This setting is available only when you stop your vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake O If multiple external storage devices that in clude available data are connected to this product the order of priority for the targets that the Theme settings are imported from is as follows SD memory card for AVIC 8100NEX and AVIC 7100NEX 2 USB storage device that is connected to USB port 1 3 USB storage device that is connected to USB port 2 A CAUTION e Do not turn off the engine while importing the settings e To prevent data loss and damage to the SD memory card never edit the data exported to the SD memory card 212 En HX heme
210. ge 66 Browsing the data field The data fields are different when you are navi gating a route and when you have no specified destination For example the data field pro vides the following information e When the route is set Distance to final destination time needed to reach the final destination and estimated arrival time are shown Pine St Trinity 9 Pine St e When the route is not set Direction or altitude is shown dew y asn 0 MOH O Touching and holding the field allows you to display the setting screen for the field O The estimated time of arrival is an ideal value calculated based on the speed limit value set in Max Speed of vehicle type setting and the actual driving speed The estimated time of arrival is only a reference value and does not guarantee arrival at that time gt For details refer to Route Preferences settings on page 68 When the system cannot receive a GPS signal A triangular mark shows the current position of your vehicle Chapter EKD How to use the map When a GPS position is available the triangu lar mark is displayed in full color When there is no GPS position the triangular mark is transparent It shows your last known position 36 En Chapter Searching for a destination 05 A CAUTION For safety reasons these route setting functions are not available while your vehicle is in motion To enable these functions
211. ge of touch panel keys Skips files forward or backward O Availability of the skip forward function while playing iTunes Radio depends on the iPod O The skip back key is not available while playing iTunes Radio Changes the playback point gt For details refer to Operating the time bar on page 27 4 Switches between playback and pause 2 Displays the song list of the album cur rently playing gt For details refer to Displaying lists re lated to the song currently playing link search on page 129 3 Uses Sound Retriever function gt For details refer to Setting the Sound Retriever function on page 222 Plays files in random order gt For details refer to Setting the shuffle play on page 125 5 Sets a repeat play range gt For details refer to Setting a repeat play range on page 125 Changes the audiobook speed gt For details refer to Changing the speed of audiobook playback on page 128 7 Displays the category list including the selected item Hides the touch panel keys Touching this area hides the touch panel keys O Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display the touch panel keys again Changes the wide screen mode gt For details refer to Changing the wide screen mode on page 223 20 Displays the pop up menu for iTunes Radio Reading the screen for audio a SIEN Ae Pioneer O The BestH Rock pod ue Huisn Chapter ED UsinganiPod OO
212. ges JPEG images stored in an external storage device USB SD using the built in drive of this product This section describes how Using the touch panel keys Example USB jee BH 6 Pe e ol ae es al T E 32 amp dy 9 Displays the source list gt For details refer to Selecting a front source on the source list on page 25 2 Displays the Time and date setting screen gt For details refer to Setting the time and date on page 221 3 Displays the Setting menu screen 4 Recalls equalizer curves O This key is not available while you are viewing still images stored in an exter nal storage device USB SD 5 Selects a file from the list gt For details refer to Selecting files from the file name list on page 120 6 Hides the touch panel keys a Touching this area hides the touch panel keys O Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display the touch panel keys again D Plays files in random order gt For details refer to Playing files in ran dom order on page 120 Displays the Phone menu screen gt For details refer to Displaying the phone menu on page 80 9 Skips files forward or backward Sets a repeat play range gt For details refer to Setting a repeat play range on page 120 4 Rotates the displayed picture 90 clock wise 2 Selects the previous folder or the next folder 3 Switches the media file type g
213. gt For details refer to Displaying the phone menu on page 80 D Changes the wide screen mode gt For details refer to Changing the wide screen mode on page 223 Reading the screen E 5d t E Meat Current time and datel Starting procedure You can display the video image output by the device connected to video input 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order ka gt A The System screen appears 3 Touch Input Output Settings The following screen appears A System Smartphone Setup AV Input SY AUX Input 4 Touch AV Input The pop up menu appears 5 Touch Source The video image output by the connected ex ternal device can be displayed O It Source is selected 2nd Camera Input is automatically set to Off En ndu Ay buisn 6 Display the AV source selection screen gt For details of the operations refer to Dis playing the AV operation screen on page 24 7 Touch AV on the AV source selection screen The image is displayed on the screen 8 Use the touch panel keys on the screen to control the external unit gt For details refer to Using the touch panel keys on page 175 Setting the video signal When you connect this product to an AV equipment select the suitable video signal setting O You can operate this function only for the video signal input int
214. h all artists in the list selected O After you select Artists Albums or Genres touch one of the lists to start playing the first song in the selected list or display the next options 4 Touch the desired song title or file name to play back Playing files in random order All files on the disc or in the external storage device USB SD can be played at random by only touching a single key Chapter Playing compressed audio files Touch the following key repeatedly until the desired setting appears Turns random play on or off default Does not play files in random order EJ Plays all audio files in the current repeat play range in random order O If you turn random play on when the re peat play range is set to the current file in the Music Browse mode the repeat play range changes to the current folder in the current disc or external storage device USB SD automatically O If you turn random play on when the re peat play range is set to the current file in the Folder Browse mode the repeat play range changes to the whole of the current disc or external storage device USB SD automatically m Setting a repeat play range The repeat play range can be changed by only touching a single key Touch the following key repeatedly until the desired setting appears Changes the repeat play range Disc default Repeats all compressed audio files Re
215. hannel from a list of all channels 160 Selecting a channel from the category list 160 Switching the displayed list 160 Using the Replay function 161 Setting SiriusXM TuneStart 161 Using TuneScan 162 Using category scan 162 Using TuneMix 162 Checking the update Traffic and Weather information 163 Registering the city 163 Setting parental lock 164 Setting the passcode 164 Locking the channel 164 Using the content alerts function Such as Song Alerts Artist Alerts and Game Alerts 165 Memorizing the current contents 165 Setting the program you want to be alerted for 165 Selecting teams for Game Alert 166 Setting the Featured Favorites function 167 Setting the update notification for Featured Favorites 168 Using the SportsFlash function 168 Selecting teams for SportsFlash 169 Restoring the SiriuSXM settings to the default 170 Storing song information to an iPod iTunes Tagging 170 Operating with the hardware buttons 171 28 Using an HDMI source Using the touch panel keys 172 Reading the screen 172 Starting procedure 172 Using an AUX source Using the touch panel keys 173 Reading the screen 173 Starting procedure 173 Setting the video signal 174 Switching the operation screen 174 30 Using AV input Using the touch panel keys 175 Reading the screen 175 Starting procedure 175 Setting the video signal 176 Using MIXTRAX Touch panel keys 177 Selecting an item to play songs 1
216. hat pre cedes the verbal instructions or adjust its vo lume Voice Guidance You can enable or disable voice guidance O This function is enabled by default Announce Streets and Roads in Native Language Area You can select whether to have the navigation system announce the street names in the na tive language of the area only the road num bers or only the maneuvers Announce Streets and Roads in Foreign Language Area You can select whether to have the navigation system read the street names in a foreign country only the road numbers or only the maneuvers Early Indication of Maneuvers You can select whether you want an immedi ate announcement for the next maneuver or to receive the information when the maneuver is near Verbosity Level You can set the verbosity of the voice instruc tions how much information is given and how often the prompts occur e Minimal Voice instructions are given once right before the next maneuver e Medium Voice instructions are given once as the vehicle approaches the next maneu ver and it is repeated right before the man euver e Verbose Voice instructions are given once relatively far from the next maneuver it is repeated as the vehicle approaches the next maneuver and it is repeated again right before the actual maneuver Announce Route Summary You can select whether to have the navigation system announce by voice a quick Summary of the route whenever a route is cal
217. he iPod s main menu is displayed reconnect the iPod and reset it 230 En Appendix Appendix OS SiriusXM Satellite Radio Message Cause Action Reference Check Antenna The antenna connection is incor Check the antenna connection If the mes rect sage fails to disappear even after the engine is switched off on contact your dealer or the nearest authorized Pioneer service center for gt assistance re Check Tuner The SiriusXM Connect Vehicle Tuner Check the tuner connection and battery vol s connection is incorrect tage If the message fails to disappear even Q a after the engine is switched off on contact your dealer or the nearest authorized Pioneer service center for assistance No Signal The SiriuSXM Connect Vehicle Tuner Verify that your vehicle is outdoors with a is having difficulty receiving the clear view of the southern sky SiriusXM satellite signal e Verify that the SirlusXM magnetic mount antenna is mounted on a metal surface on the outside the vehicle e Move the SiriusXM antenna away from any obstructions No Content TuneScan is not available Perform the operation with another preset channel Channel Not Available The channel that you have re Check the SiriusXM channel lineup quested is not a valid SiriusXM channel Subscription Updated Press This product has detected a change Touch Enter to clear the message Enter to Continue in your SiriuSXM
218. he disc Select a file that can be played Select a file that can be played Page 245 Page 259 e Retry e f the message appears frequently consult your dealer Register this product to the DivX VOD con tents provider Select a file that can be played Select a file that can be played Page 245 Page 259 Action Reference e Turn the ignition switch OFF and back ON e Disconnect the USB storage device e Change to a different source Then return to the USB storage device Select a file that can be played Page 245 Page 259 Follow the external storage device USB SD instructions to disable security The protected files are skipped Appendix Appendix GS Message Cause Action Reference Protect All the files on the connected exter Replace the external storage device USB nal storage device USB SD are SD embedded with DRM Incompatible USB The connected USB storage device Disconnect your device and replace it with a e Format the SD memory card It is recom mended that you use SD Formatter for for matting SD memory cards Page 243 Check USB The USB connector or USB cable is Check that the USB connector or USB cable short circuited is not caught in something or damaged is not Supported by this product compatible USB storage device gt Incompatible SD The SD memory card is not sup e Remove your device and replace it with a D ported by this product compatible SD memory
219. he following screen appears 184 En Ay Default 7 Set the guidelines by dragging the four points 8 Touch the following keys to adjust the position of the point if necessary Moves the point to the left Moves the point to the right Moves the point upward Moves the point downward Extends the line to the left and right from the current center point of the dis tance guideline The adjustment points on the lateral coordinates at both ends will also move Shortens the line from the left and right to the current center point of the dis tance guideline The adjustment points on the lateral coordinates at both ends will also move Resets the settings of the distance and vehicle width guidelines and adjust ment points to the default Default O When a point is moved the distance from the initial value is displayed at the bottom of the screen Setting the second camera input You can view images of the second camera a front camera etc on the screen of this pro duct Chapter Setting the second camera activation O To view images of the second camera on the screen of this product 2nd Camera Input needs to be set to On 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order ka gt Ef The System screen appears 3 Touch Camera settings The following screen appears System Camera
220. he language settings selected in DVD DivX selected in DVD DivX Setup Setup The picture is extremely unclear The disc features a signal to prohibit distorted and dark during play copying Some discs may have back this iPod cannot be operated The iPod is frozen An error has occurred Cables are not connected correctly Sound from the iPod cannot be The audio output direction may heard switch automatically when the Bluetooth and USB connections are used at the same time Problems with the phone screen Symptom Cause Your phone is out of range for ser vice Dialing is impossible because the touch panel keys for dialing are inactive The connection between the cellular phone and this product cannot be established now Problems with the Application screen Symptom Cause Action Reference Switching to a selected language is not possi ble if the language selected in DVD DivX Setup is not recorded on the disc Page 213 Since this product is compatible with the copy guard analog copy protect system the picture may suffer from horizontal stripes or other imperfections when a disc with that kind of protection signal is viewed on some displays This is not a malfunction e Reconnect the iPod with the USB interface cable for iPod iPhone e Update the iPod software version e Reconnect the iPod with the USB interface cable for iPod iPhone e Park your vehicle in a safe place
221. he mes sage fails to disappear even after the engine is switched off on contact your dealer or an authorized Pioneer Service Station for assis tance Wait until this product returns to a tempera ture within the normal operating limits Follow the instructions displayed on the screen If this does not solve the problem contact your dealer or an authorized Pioneer Station for assistance Contact your dealer or an authorized Pioneer Station for assistance Check the antenna connection If the mes sage fails to disappear even after the engine is switched off on contact your dealer or an authorized Pioneer Station for assistance Contact your dealer or an authorized Pioneer Station for assistance Contact your dealer or an authorized Pioneer Station for assistance Contact your dealer or an authorized Pioneer Station for assistance En Appendix Appendix Appendix Message Cause Action Detected unusual speed The speed pulse cannot be detected Contact your dealer or an authorized Pioneer pulses correctly Station for assistance Detected changes in the in Changes in the installation angle or Wait until the sensor learning finishes stallation angle or position position are detected The in dash receiver is updat ing the sensor learning data Speed pulse wire is not con Speed pulse wire is not connected The speed pulse cannot be detected if the nected The system will oper speed pulse wire is not co
222. he on screen keyboard 27 On first time startup of the navigation system 28 How to use the Navigation menu screen Operating the Navigation menu screen 29 D How to use the map How to read the Map screen 31 AV information bar 31 Operating the Map screen 32 Changing the scale of the map 32 Smart Zoom 32 Switching between 2D 3D and 2D North up views 32 Scrolling the map to the position you wantto see 33 Control keys on the scrolled map 33 Understanding the route guidance 34 Frequently shown route events 34 Browsing the data field 35 When the system cannot receive a GPS signal 35 D Searching for a destination Searching for a location by address 37 Searching for Points of Interest POI 38 Searching for POIs using preset categories 38 Searching for POIs by categories or directly from the name of the facilities 39 Searching for providers nearby that offer emergency or roadside assistance services 40 Selecting a destination from stored locations 41 Selecting a destination from stored routes 41 Selecting a location you searched for recently 42 History 42 Smart History 42 Searching for a location using Combined Search 43 Searching for a location by the coordinates 44 Searching for a location by scrolling the map 44 Using the Map Location screen 45 D Checking and modifying the current route Modifying the route 46 Building a route using Route Planner 4
223. hing gt gt skips to the next song dur ing TuneScan or to the next channel during category scan 3 Cancels scan play and returns to the ori ginal channel Using category scan You can scan each channel in the selected ca tegory 1 Touch the following key Displays the list screen 2 Touch the desired category 3 Touch the following key Performs scan tuning in the se lected category The live broadcast for each channel in the current ca tegory plays for six seconds at a time Using TuneMix TuneMix plays a unique blend of songs from music channels stored in the current SiriuSXM Preset Band O SXV300 or later SiriusXM Connect vehicle tuner Sold separately is required to use this function O If fewer than two music channels are stored as presets in the current band the message No qualified TuneMix music channels in this band is displayed and you cannot use TuneMix Add more music channels to presets O TuneMix may take a few minutes to be come available after the unit is turned on or the preset band is changed Usin O Ifthe same channels are stored in the pre set channel list the channels are counted as one O The channels that parental lock is applied to cannot be played back by the TuneMix function Touch the following key Plays back the songs from the music channels stored as presets in the current band Tune Mix To cancel TuneMix tou
224. hing the media file type on page 107 4 Switches between playback and pause 2 Uses Sound Retriever function gt For details refer to Setting the Sound Retriever function on page 222 3 Plays files in random order gt For details refer to Playing tracks in ran dom order on page 106 Sets a repeat play range gt For details refer to Setting a repeat play range on page 106 5 Searches for the part you want to play gt For details refer to Searching for the part you want to play on page 107 Hides the touch panel keys Touching this area hides the touch panel keys 1 Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display the touch panel keys again 7 Displays the DVD menu gt For details refer to Operating the DVD menu on page 107 Switches the subtitle language gt For details refer to Switching the subtitle language on page 108 Switches the audio language gt For details refer to Switching the audio language on page 108 20 Stops playback 21 Changes the wide screen mode gt For details refer to Changing the wide screen mode on page 223 d Moves ahead one frame frame by frame playback or slows down playback speed slow motion playback gt For details refer to frame by frame play back on page 108 gt For details refer to Slow motion playback on page 108 23 Performs an operation such as resuming that is stored on the disc gt For details refer to Returning to a spec
225. hone Book 81 Navigation info window 179 History 82 AV App Guide Mode 179 Dial 81 AV Source Settings Voice recognition function 86 MIXTRAX Settings 178 95 Radio Settings 101 102 161 164 SiriusXM Settings 165 166 170 Tag Forwarding 221 Bluetooth Audio 179 Ever Scroll 180 Input Output Settings Smartphone Setup 88 AV Input 180 AUX Input 173 AppRadio Video Adjustment 136 Camera settings Appendix ED Appendix Theme menu Camera View 182 Theme E Back Camera Input 181 Background 2nd Camera Input 184 Fr Illumination Reverse Gear Setting 181 57 Theme Parking Assist Guide 183 eal Splash Screen Back Camera Reverse Video 182 2nd Camera Reverse video 185 Parking Assist Guide Adjust 183 Background 207 Demo MoE O O 2 Illumination 208 System Language 186 Theme 909 Restore Settings 226 Clock 909 A oettings O settings A Splash Screen 210 Audio Settings 226 Export 044 Theme Settings 226 Bluetooth Settings 226 Keyboard 186 Beep Tone 186 Touch Panel Calibration 187 Dimmer Settings 187 Dimmer Trigger 187 Day Night 188 Dimmer Duration 188 Driving Position 139 Picture Adjustment 189 System Information Firmware Information 190 Firmware Update 190 3D Calibration Status 191 Connection Status 192 OEM Settings 151 256 En Appendix Appendix OS Audio menu Video Setup menu Audio Video Setup li W li YY DVD DivX Setup ivr e q Yz Mute Level Yz Video Signal Setting Oo re 8 8
226. i fied scene on page 108 24 Resumes playback Bookmark 104 En ED Playingadse O O o gt gt For details refer to Resuming playback Bookmark on page 109 Displays the DVD menu keypad gt For details refer to Operating the DVD menu using touch panel keys on page 109 6 Changes the viewing angle Multi angle gt For details refer to Switching the multi angle DVD display on page 109 Selects the audio output gt For details refer to Selecting the audio output on page 109 m Chapter Playingadiss O g Reading the screen for audio Playing tracks in random order Example CD Indicator Meaning D Does not play tracks in random order ry Plays all tracks in the current disc in meee andom order EQ tinamiil Setting a repeat play range Indicator Meaning mri Func S Repeats just the current track dsip e BulKeld Repeats the current disc Repeats just the current chapter Reading the screen for video Example DVD Repeats just the current title 3 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time within the current file 4 Track number indicator Shows the number of the track currently play ing when available Audio channel indicator Shows the current audio channel type such as Mch Multi channel Digital sound format indicator Shows which digital sound format surround sound format has been selected D Samplin
227. iPod En 97 gt For details refer to Storing song informa tion to an iPod iTunes Tagging on page 221 9 Performs manual tuning or seek tuning gt For details refer to Manual tuning on page 99 gt For details refer to Seek tuning on page 99 Displays the preset channels gt For details refer to Se ecting a preset channel from the preset channel list on page 100 4 Recalls the preset channel stored to a key from memory with a single touch of the key Stores the current broadcast frequency to a key for later recall by continuing to touch the key gt For details refer to Storing broadcast fre quencies on page 100 Reading the screen Band indicator Shows the tuned band FM1 FM2 FM3 or AM 2 Detailed information Main channel e Call sign program service or fre quency Shows the call sign the program ser vice or the frequency of the broadcast station currently being received e Song title Shows the title of the current song when available e Artist performer name 98 En ED HD Radio reception Shows the artist performer name for the song currently playing when avail able Multicast channels e Multicast channel number and song title Shows the numbers of multicast chan nels and the song titles O The information is not displayed if there is no corresponding intorma tion O The currently tuned multicast chan nel is displayed at the top of
228. iPod touch 2nd generation iPod touch 1st generation iPod classic iPod nano 6th generation iPod nano 5th generation iPod nano 4th generation iPod nano 38rd generation ing order 3 Touch AV Source Settings The following screen appears T System MIXTRAX Settings Radio Settings SinusXM Settings Tag Forwarding Bluetooth Audio 4 Touch Tag Forwarding repeatedly until the desired setting appears USB1 default Transfers the song information to your iPod which is connected to USB port 1 O The iTunes Tagging function is available when the song information is available O This function is available for the following iPod models suo eiado uowwo O The version of itunes must be 7 4 or higher Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ka gt EE The System screen appears En 221 Chapter e USB2 Transfers the song information to your iPod which is connected to USB por 2 Depending on when the song information is stored information for the previous song or the song after the current song may also i be stored 5 Tune into a broadcast station When the song information is received Tag is displayed while the desired song is being 7 Connect your iPod The song information is transferred to your broadcast and the touch panel key becomes iPod active Radio for AVIC 5100NEX gt For details refer to T
229. ial startup of the navigation system O The first time that the MAP button is pressed the navigation system also begins its initial startup After a short pause the splash screen comes on for a few seconds The Language screen appears 3 Select the language that you want to use on the screen then touch Select The EULA screen appears 4 Read the terms carefully checking the details and then touch Accept if you agree to the conditions The Usage Reports screen appears 5 Touch Yes If you touch Yes the software collects usage information and GPS logs that may be used for improving the application and the quality and coverage of maps 28 En KD Basic operation O If you do not wish to activate information collection touch No The configuration wizard starts 6 Touch Next The Voice Language screen appears 7 Select the language that you want to use for voice guidance messages then touch Next ln li 8 If needed modify the unit settings then touch Next The Route Preferences screen appears 9 If needed modify the default route planning options then touch Next 10 Touch Activate then Next A message saying that the connected online features are activated appears if you activate these services right away gt For details refer to Online Services set tings on page 69 O You will need to install the AVICSYNC App on your iPh
230. ice gui The audio mix menu is displayed for four dance of the navigation system set the seconds If the screen disappears press the audio mix function to off VOL button again The screen reap O Ifthe screen is switched to the Map screen pears when the audio mix function is turned on the message NOTE Navigation Sounds are unavailable with the current app amp source selections Do you want to out A WARNING Certain uses of an iPhone or a smartphone may not be legal while driving in your juris diction so you must be aware of and obey any such restrictions If in doubt as to a particular function only perform it while the car is parked No feature should be used unless it is safe to do so under the driving conditions you are experiencing Pandora operations You can enjoy Pandora by connecting an iPhone or a smartphone that has the Pandora application installed Important e Requirements to access Pandora using Pioneer car audio video products gt For details refer to Chapter 13 e Please update the firmware of the Pandora ap plication to the latest version before use e The latest version of the Pandora application can be downloaded from the iTunes App Store or Google Play e Create a free or a paid account online You can create the account in the Pandora appli cation from your iPhone or from the website http www pandora com register e f the Data Plan for your iPhone does not pro vide
231. iffer ence and daylight saving time that you set are used e Manual Time Zone if Auto Unavailable The time zone setting changes automati cally if automatic change is available Otherwise the present setting value that you set is used e Manual Time Zone in Current Zone The present setting value that you set are used in the current time zone If your vehi cle moves to another time zone the time zone setting changes automatically Time Zone You can set the time difference Chapter Customizing preferences of the navigation dH Daylight Saving Time You can turn on or off the daylight saving time for this navigation system Display settings Menu Animations When animation is turned on the keys on the menus and keyboard screens appear in an animated way Screen transitions are also ani mated Day Skin Theme You can select the style and colors of the navi gation menu used in the daytime Night Skin Theme You can select the style and colors of the navi gation menu used in the nighttime Traffic settings Traffic You can set to enable or disable the TMC recei ver that can receive real time traffic informa tion Data Source You can select what data source you want to use for receiving real time traffic information Online is available only if the device is en abled Show Traffic Info You can select whether to show icons relevant to traffic incidents and lines indicating the traffic flow on the
232. ilable No Name is displayed if there is no corresponding infor mation 4 Album title Shows the title of the album of the current file when available No Title is displayed if there is no corresponding information Pause indicator 6 Album artwork Album art of the current song is displayed if it is available m 130 En Chapter 8100NEX 7100NEX If an Android Auto compatible device is con nected to this product you can listen to the music output from the Android device with this product and control the playback directly from this product O This function is available only when Android Auto is turned on Start the Android Auto before using this function gt For details refer to Using Android Auto on page 138 Current track information e Application name Shows the application name when available No Name is displayed if there is no corresponding information e Song title Shows the title of the song currently playing when available No Title is displayed if there is no corresponding information EJ Artist name Shows the artist name for the song cur rently being played when available Using the touch panel keys No Name is displayed if there is no Displays the Time and date setting corresponding information screen e J Album title gt For details refer to Setting the time and date on page 221 2 Displays the Setting menu screen
233. ile from the list related to the song currently playing link search 114 Playing files in random order 114 Setting a repeat play range 115 en 5 Switching the media file type 115 Operating with the hardware buttons 115 18 Playing compressed video files Using the touch panel keys 116 Reading the screen 117 Starting procedure for Disc 117 Starting procedure for USB SD 117 Selecting files from the file name list 117 Setting a repeat play range 118 Frame by frame playback 118 Slow motion playback 118 Switching the media file type 118 Operating with the hardware buttons 118 Playing compressed still image files Using the touch panel keys 119 Reading the screen 119 Starting procedure 119 Selecting files from the file name list 120 Playing files in random order 120 Setting a repeat play range 120 Switching the media file type 120 Setting the slideshow interval 120 Operating with the hardware buttons 121 Using an iPod Using the touch panel keys for audio 122 Using the touch panel keys for video 122 Using the touch panel keys for iTunes Radio 123 Reading the screen for audio 123 Reading the screen for video 124 Reading the screen for iTunes Radio 124 Starting procedure 125 Setting the shuffle play 125 Setting a repeat play range 125 Selecting song or video sources from the playlist screen 126 Using iTunes Radio 127 Playing back songs similar to the current song 127 C6 En Setting the current s
234. ind files to play back using the list of the files and folders stored on a disc or in an external storage device USB SD 1 Touch the following key Displays the list of the files or folders stored on a disc or in the external storage device USB SD O Touch the File tab to display the file folder list for an external storage device USB SL 2 Touch a file on the list to play back O Files are played back in file number order Touching a folder on the list shows its con tents You can play a file on the list by touching it m 414 En Selecting a file from the list related to the song currently playing link search You can select files to play back using the ca tegory list for the files in an external storage device USB SD O This function is available for the external storage device USB SD only 1 Touch the following key Displays the list of the files or folders stored in the external sto rage device USB SD O Ifthe File list is displayed touch the Tag tab to display the category list 2 Touch the desired category to display the file list The list screen appears 3 Touch the item that you want to refine Refine the item until the desired song title or file name is displayed on the list O Touching All on the list includes all op tions in the current list For example if you touch All after touching Artists you can proceed to the next screen wit
235. information about the names O of the parts and the main features using the but MAP button tons e Press to display the Map screen O gt For details of the operations refer to E 7100NEX How to use the screens on page 22 9 e Press and hold to display the rear view e camera image 9 O This function is available only when Back Camera Input or 2nd Cam era Input is set to On HOME button e Press to display the Top menu screen gt For details of the operations refer to How to use the screens on page 22 e Press and hold to activate the voice re cognition function gt For details refer to Using the voice re cognition function on page 86 MODE button e Press to switch between the Application screen and the AV operation screen O If the display cannot switch from the AV operation screen to the Applica tion screen when the MODE button is pressed the display will turn off gt For details of the operations refer to How to use the screens on page 22 e Press and hold to turn the display off when the Application screen is available gt For details refer to Turning off the dis play on page 20 2OOLO VO Go D D TRK button M LCD screen Press to perform manual seek tuning fast forward reverse and track search controls 2 Remote control sensor O The remote control CD R33 sold sepa 4 button rately is available For details
236. ing compatibility issues with future firmware ver sions of smartphone compatibility issues with future versions of the connected content ap plication s for the smartphone changes to or discontinuation of the connected Content ap plication s or service by its provider uoi epineu y JO SadUdAaJaI1d Hulziwio sny5 En 71 Chapter ED Customizing preferences of the navigation e Pioneer is not liable for any issues that may arise trom incorrect or flawed app based con tent e The content and functionality of the supported applications are the responsibility of the App providers What is the AVICSYNC App The AVICSYNC App is a dynamic companion app that you can use to connect your iPhone or smartphone to a compatible Pioneer navi gation system Once linked the navigation system communi cates with your iPhone or smartphone to share information such as contacts naviga tion history planned routes POI favorites and even where you parked your vehicle With the AVICSYNC App your navigation sys tem can also access Premium connected ser vices such as real time local search and weather traffic parking and gas price data lookup to ensure that you ll have all the infor mation you need to reach your desired desti nation As new mapping data becomes available you can use the AVICSYNC App to review pur chase download and transfer updated map ping content directly to the compatible Pioneer navigation system
237. int to delete only the nearest waypoint In such case the route is recalcu lated 9 NO4 UdIIND y HulAyipow pue Hurpay gt Chapter KD Checking and modifying the current route Watching the simulation of the route You can run a simulation of the navigation for the current route as a demonstration Follow the steps below Jumps to the previous gui dance point maneuver Pauses the simulation 1 Seta route to your destination For details refer to Chapter 5 Jumps to the next guidance point maneuver 2 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears Increases the speed of the si mulation to four eight or 16 times the normal speed Touching the key again returns a to the normal speed Displays the navigation menu on _ the Map screen i Touch Close to stop the simulation 4 Touch Route Summary The Route Summary screen appears 3 Touch the following key h gt lt 5 Touch the following key JEIILA Displays the shortcuts 6 Touch Simulation The simulation starts from the starting point of the route and using a realistic speed it leads you through the whole recommended route O During simulation you can use the follow ing control keys they disappear after a few seconds but you can view them again by touching the map 50 En Storing a location in Saved Location Storing your favorite locations in Saved Loca tion allows you
238. ion failed Retry appears Touch Yes to reconnect Deleting a registered device When you have already registered three Bluetooth devices and you want to add an other one you must first delete one of the re gistered devices O Ifa registered phone is deleted all the phone book entries and call history lists that correspond to the phone will be also cleared A CAUTION Never turn this product off while the paired Bluetooth device is being deleted 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order ks gt The Bluetooth screen appears 3 Touch Connection The following screen appears A Connection 1 My Bluetooth Device MY PHONE 02 MY PHONE 03 4 Touch the following key i Aii Deletes a paired device A confirmation message appears 5 Touch Yes The device is deleted Connecting a registered Bluetooth device manually Connect the Bluetooth device manually in the following cases e Two or more Bluetooth devices are regis tered and you want to manually select the device to be used e You want to reconnect a disconnected Bluetooth device e Connection cannot be established automa tically for some reason To start the connection manually carry out the following procedure 1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech nology on your devices O For some Bluetooth devices no specific ac tion is necessary
239. ired and total distance of selected route alterna tives Touch any of the route alternatives to see it on the map O If more than three route alternatives have been found More Results appears Touch More Results to show the other routes gt For information about route calculation conditions refer to Route Planning Method on page 64 6 Touch Select The selected route is applied as your current route Checking detour routes You can check for detour routes that avoid the selected sections or streets or that avoid the road ahead You can also check for alternative routes 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 2 Touch the following key Displays the navigation menu on the Map screen 3 Touch Detours amp Alternatives 4 Touch one of the options e Alternative Routes Shows the alternative routes gt For details refer to Checking route alter natives on page 47 48 En e Avoid Special Sections Shows the route avoiding certain sections Touch the list item to select the section you want to avoid The distance and time differ ence suggested route current route and the section avoided are shown Touch Ac cept to apply the suggested route e Avoid Specific Road Shows the route avoiding certain road Touch the list item to select the road you want to avoid Distance and time difference suggested route current route section avoided are shown Touch Accept to apply the sugg
240. isplayed on the camera image after a little while Be sure to check the conditions around the ve hicle even before the guidelines and the message are displayed Camera for Camera View mode Camera View can be displayed at all times e g when monitoring an attached trailer etc Please note that with this setting the camera image is not resized to fit and that a portion of what is seen by the camera is not viewable A CAUTION Check to make sure settings for rear view camera displays a mirror reversed image O Immediately verify whether the display changes to a rear view camera image when the shift lever is aligned to REVERSE R from another position O When the screen changes to full screen rear view camera image during normal driving switch to the opposite setting in Reverse Gear Setting Setting rear view camera activation To view images of the rear view camera on the screen of this product Back Camera Input needs to be set to On 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order ka gt EE The System screen appears 3 Touch Camera settings The following screen appears System Camera View Back Camera Input 2nd Camera Input T Reverse Gear Setting r Parking Assist Guide 4 Touch Back Camera Input repeatedly until the desired setting appears e Off default Turns the back camera input setting
241. isplays the shortcuts e Delete All Deletes all waypoints and the destina tion Touch Continue Without Route to cancel the planned route e Optimize Waypoints Changes the order of waypoints automa tically so that the route can be easily tra veled If the resulting order is the same as the current order this option is inva lid e Optimize Route Changes the order of all waypoints and the destination automatically so that the route can be easily traveled If the re sulting order is the same as the current order this option is invalid OIIO Chapter Checking and modifying the current route 06 Changing the starting position The starting position for route can be changed from the current position 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 2 Touch the following key Displays the navigation menu on the Map screen 3 Touch Route Planner or My Route 4 Touch Current GPS Position The pop up menu appears 5 Touch Set Start Point or Change Start Point and then touch OK 6 Search for a location 7 Touch Set Start Point or Change Start Point The selected position is set as the starting po sition for route calculation 8 Touch Show Route or Continue With out Route The system starts route recalculation after Show Route is touched and then the Route Summary screen appears After Start Navigation is touched your navigation system starts the route guidance
242. jammed under the brake or gas pedal For details refer to the iPod manuals iPod and iPhone Made for iPod l iPhone Appendix Appendix OS Made for iPod and Made for iPhone mean e Latest version of the Pioneer compatible con that an electronic accessory has been de nected content application s for the smart signed to connect specifically to iPod or phone available from the service provider iPhone respectively and has been certified by downloaded to your smartphone the developer to meet Apple performance e Acurrent account with the content service standards provider gt Apple is not responsible for the operation of e Smartphone Data Plan p this device or its compliance with safety and Note if the Data Plan for your smartphone gt regulatory standards does not provide for unlimited data usage ad 2 Please note that the use of this accessory with ditional charges from your carrier may apply a iPod or iPhone may affect wireless perfor for accessing app based connected content mance via 3G EDGE and or LTE 4G networks iPhone iPod iPod classic iPod nano and e Connection to the Internet via 3G EDGE LTE iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc regis 4G or Wi Fi network tered in the U S and other countries e Optional Pioneer adapter cable connecting your iPhone to this product Lightning Limitations Lightning is a trademark of Apple Inc e Access to app based connected content will d
243. ker output You can set the frequency range for the sound output from the front and rear speakers This function is available only when main audio is available 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow Bg ED The Audio screen appears 3 Confirm that Rear Speaker is set to On O The default setting is On 4 Touch Crossover The Cutoff screen appears 198 En 5 Touch the following keys to select Front or Rear Selects the adjustable previous speak er Selects the adjustable next speaker 6 Touch HPF to turn on 7 Drag the line graph horizontally to ad just the range of cut off frequency from 50 Hz to 200 Hz O The default setting is 100 Hz 8 Drag the tip of the slope to adjust the range of level between 6 dB oct and 18 dB oct O The default setting is 12 dB oct Using the subwoofer output This product is equipped with a subwoofer out put mechanism which can be turned on or off O This function is available only when main audio is available 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow Bg ED The Audio screen appears 3 Touch Subwoofer to set the subwoo fer output On The default setting is Off 4 Touch Subwoofer Settings The Cutoff screen ap
244. le Language The pop up menu appears 5 Touch the desired language When you select Others a language code input screen is shown Input the four digit code of the desired language then touch B gt For details refer to Language code chart for DVDs on page 219 The subtitle language is set O If the selected language is not available the language specified on the disc is displayed O You can switch the subtitle language by touching the subtitle language switching key during playback O The setting made here will not be affected even if the subtitle language is switched during playback using the subtitle language switching key Setting the audio language You can set the preferred audio language 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order 40 The Video Setup screen appears 3 Touch DVD DivX Setup The following screen appears Video Setup Subtitle Language Audio Lanquage Menu Language Multi Angle TV Aspect 4 Touch Audio Language The pop up menu appears 5 Touch the desired language When you select Others a language code input screen is shown Input the four digit code of the desired language then touch B gt For details refer to Language code chart for DVDs on page 219 The audio language is set J ejd oapin y dn 6u3 a5 O If the selected language is not available the language speci
245. les If there are no play able files in folder 01 root folder playback starts from folder 02 Switching the browse mode This product supports two types of browse modes Folder Browse mode and Music Browse mode O The browse modes are available only for the external storage device USB SD Music Browse mode Displays a song title artist name album title and genre in the current file information dis play area on the AV operation screen Select when you want to play music files narrowed down by acategory of song title artist name aloum title or genre en 113 sajlj O1IPNe passaidwiod bulAe d Chapter Playing compressed audio files If connecting an external storage device USB SD this product accesses the database of music files with tag information and switches to the Music Browse mode automatically Folder Browse mode Displays a folder name and file name in the current file information display area on the AV operation screen Select when you want to search for folders or music Tiles on the list screen O You can switch between the browse modes for file search by touching the tabs and se lecting a file on the list screen Touch the following key repeatedly until the desired setting appears Switches the display information between the tag information title artist name album title etc and the file folder name information Selecting files from the file name list You can f
246. ll need this number to activate your sub scription 3 Activate the service either online or by phone In the USA you can activate online or by call ing SiriusXM Listener care e Visit www siriusxm com activatenow e Call SiriusXM Listener Care at 1 866 635 2349 For Canadian Subscriptions please contact e Visit www sinusxm ca activatexm 156 En the SiriusxM satellite radio e Call XM customer Care at 1 877 438 9677 m The SiriusXM satellites will send an activation message to your tuner When the tuner has re ceived the message Subscription Updated is displayed Once you have subscribed SiriusXM satellites will send an activation message to your tuner The activation process usually takes 10 to 15 min utes but may take up to an hour in some cases Do not turn off this product while the activation message is displayed m Using the touch panel keys Live display i fo CEOL HMB 0 wO Replay display Caliente Juanes Loco De Amor D Displays the source list gt For details refer to Selecting a front source on the source list on page 25 2 Selects a band 3 Displays the Time and date setting screen gt For details refer to Setting the time and date on page 221 4 Displays the Setting menu screen Usin 5 Recalls equalizer curves gt For details refer to Using the equalizer on page 202 6 Selects a channel from the list gt
247. lows you to view the shortcuts and enables you to use the following func tions e View on Map Shows the trip log on the map screen e Export Track Log Exports the track log currently selected to an external storage device Chapter Checking useful information about your trip CH Setting the trip logger 1 Record the trip log 2 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 3 Touch the following key Displays the navigation menu on the Map screen 4 Touch Useful Information The Useful Information screen appears 5 Touch Trip Monitor The Trip Monitor screen appears 6 Touch and then touch Trip Monitor Settings The setting screen appears 7 Touch any of the items to change the settings e Enable Auto Saving Sets whether automatic trip logging is acti vated or not e Save Track Log Track logs the sequence of the positions given by the GPS receiver can be saved to gether with trip logs You can activate the track logger whenever the trip logger is acti vated O Trip Database Size indicates the cur rent data size of the trip log track log in cluded Editing a trip log 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 2 Touch the following key Displays the navigation menu on the Map screen 3 Touch Useful Information The Useful Information screen appears 4 Touch Trip Monitor The Trip Monitor screen appears 5 Touch and then touch
248. ls refer to Frequently shown route events on page 34 3 Shows the distance to the next guidance point maneuver 4 Shows the second maneuver arrow 5 Indicates the current location of your vehicle The apex of the triangular mark indicates your orientation and the display moves automati cally as you drive 6 Displays the data field Touching this field displays the Trip Compu ter screen Touch and hold down this key and then select the values that you wish to have displayed to customize the data fields in the corner of the Map screen gt For details refer to Data Fields on page 67 D Shows the name of the street or city that your vehicle is traveling on or in Indicates the current route The route currently set is highlighted in color on the map 9 Displays the Navigation menu screen Indicates the progress to the final destination m dew y asn 0 MOH AV information bar AV information is displayed at the bottom of the Map screen Pine St Displays the source list gt For details refer to Selecting a front source on the source list on page 25 2 Shows the current status of AV source briefly 3 You can turn on or off the communication be tween the AVICSYNC App and the navigation system by touching the key 4 Displays the Phone menu screen gt For details refer to Displaying the phone menu on page 80 m Operating the Map screen Changing the scale of the map
249. ls that are created by the SiriusXM Programming de partment allowing you to discover new chan nels Featured Favorite channels are dynamic and can change often allowing you to dis cover new channels This function is available only when SiriusXM is selected as the source 1 If this function is turned on Featured will be available as a band selection O The featured seasonal theme will be auto matically updated You can set whether to be notified of the update gt For details refer to Setting the update notification for Featured Favorites on page 168 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ka gt EE The System screen appears 3 Touch AV Source Settings The following screen appears System MIXTRAX Settings Radio Settings SinusXM Settings r Tag Forwarding Bluetooth Audio OPE 9 1 2 ES GINXSNIS 34 Huisn 4 Touch SiriusXM Settings The following screen appears System Tune Start Parental Control Alert List f Team Settings Featured Favorites 5 Touch Featured Favorites repeatedly until the desired setting appears e On default Activates the Featured Favorite function e Off Deactivates the Featured Favorite function O If the setting is changed to Off while lis tening to the channel in Featured band the channel does not change and the band dis play on the screen changes
250. ly on roads and can correct your position by ad justing it to a nearby road This is called map matching J amp With map matching Without map matching Handling large errors Positioning errors are kept to a minimum by combining GPS dead reckoning and map matching However in some situations these functions may not work properly and the error may become bigger Appendix When positioning by GPS is impossible e GPS positioning is disabled if signals can not be received from more than two GPS satellites e n some driving conditions signals from GPS satellites may not reach your vehicle In this case it is impossible for the system to use GPS positioning Under elevated roads or similar structures In tunnels or en closed parking garages When driving When driving through among high build a dense forest or tall ings trees e fa car phone or cellular phone is used near the GPS antenna GPS reception may be lost temporarily e Do not cover the GPS antenna with spray paint or car wax because this may block the reception of GPS signals Snow buildup can also degrade the signals so keep the antenna clear O Ifa GPS signal has not been received for a long time your vehicle s actual position and the current position mark on the map may diverge considerably or may not be up dated In such case once GPS reception is restored accuracy will be recovered En x ipu ddy
251. m OS 1 Insert the SD memory card into the SD card slot or plug the USB storage device into the USB connector gt For details refer to Plugging in a USB sto rage device on page 19 gt For details refer to nserting and ejecting an SD memory card on page 18 A message confirming whether to import the stored setting data appears 2 Touch Import Data import starts When the data is successfully imported an import complete message is displayed The source is turned off and the Bluetooth connection is disconnected before the pro cess starts Chapter Setting up the video player 35 Setting the top priority languages You can assign the top priority language to the top priority subtitle audio and menu in initial playback If the selected language is recorded on the disc subtitles audio and menu are dis played or output in that language O This setting is available only when Disc is selected as the source Setting the subtitle language You can set a desired subtitle language When available the subtitles will be displayed in the selected language 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order gt J The Video Setup screen appears 3 Touch DVD DivX Setup The following screen appears Video Setup Subtitle Language Audio Language Menu Language 7 Multi Angle TV Aspect 4 Touch Subtit
252. ment 194 Using balance adjustment 194 Switching sound muting attenuation 195 Adjusting source levels 195 Adjusting the filter 198 Adjusting the front and rear speaker output 198 Using the subwoofer output 198 Selecting the listening position 199 Adjusting the speaker output levels finely 199 Adjusting the time alignment 200 Using the automatic sound levelizer 202 Using the equalizer 202 Recalling equalizer curves 202 Customizing the equalizer curves 203 Using the auto adjusted equalizer 203 Adjusting the equalizer curve automatically Auto EQ 203 Before operating the Auto EQ function 204 Performing Auto EQ 204 D Theme menu Selecting the background display 207 Changing to the background display image stored on the external storage device USB SD 207 Setting the illumination color 208 Selecting the color trom the preset colors 208 Creating a user defined color 209 Selecting the theme color 209 Selecting the clock image 209 Changing the preinstalled splash screen 210 Changing to the splash screen stored on the external storage device USB SD 210 Replicating the settings 211 Exporting Theme settings 211 Importing Theme settings 212 Setting up the video player Setting the top priority languages 213 Setting the subtitle language 213 Setting the audio language 213 Setting the menu language 214 Setting the angle icon display 214 Setting the aspec
253. method The route planning method types are as follows e Fast Calculates a route with the shortest travel time to your destination as a priority Usual ly the best selection for fast and standard cars e Easy Results in a route with fewer turns and no difficult maneuvers With this option you can make this system to take for example the freeway instead of a series of smaller roads or streets e Short Calculates a route with the shortest dis tance to your destination as a priority 64 En Usually practical for slower vehicles Rarely practical to use to search for shorter routes for normal vehicles regardless of the speed e Economical Calculates a route that is quick and saves fuel Navigation Mode You can enable or disable off road navigation e On road The route is planned towards the destina tion along the roads on the map e Off road The route is planned towards the destina tion in a straight line not along the roads on the map Highways When this function is turned off the route is calculated prioritizing the avoidance of free ways This function is useful when you want to avoid freeways when you are driving a slow car or you are towing another vehicle Period Charge When this function is turned off the route is calculated prioritizing the avoidance of toll roads This function is useful when you want to avoid toll roads with restricted time access that re quire you to purchase a sep
254. mp or to delete the value first O You can change the display format of the la titude and longitude to any of the following formats decimal degrees degrees and dec imal minutes or degrees minutes and deci mal seconds m When entering the coordinates in UTM for mat touch fj then UTM Coordinates 7 Enter the longitude value and touch Go O When a value is already entered in the text field touch amp or to delete the value first 44 En KD Searching for a destination The searched location appears on the Map screen 8 Touch Select as Destination on the Map Location screen gt For details on the operations in the Map Location screen refer to Using the Map Location screen on page 45 After touching Select as Destination the Route Summary screen appears and count down begins When the countdown ends the guidance automatically starts If the screen is touched anywhere during the countdown the countdown stops and the screen will stay as it iS gt For details on the operations in the Route Summary screen refer to Checking route information and preferences on page 48 9 Touch Start Navigation Your navigation system starts the route gul dance gt For details of the route guidance refer to Understanding the route guidance on page 34 Searching for a location by scrolling the map Specifying a location after scrolling the map enables you to set the posi
255. n 5 Dimensions W x H x D Weight nsessesssunennrereererrerssnssns 73 7 g 0 2 lbs Q AVIC 8100NEX a Chassis ene 178mm x 100mm x Display 164mm Screen size aspect ratio Tin X 3 7 8in x 6 1 2 in AVIC 8100NEX eessecssesseeees 6 95 inch wide 16 9 NOSE wsesssssssssssessssseesenes 171mm x 97mm x 21mm AVIC 7100NEX civcsscsicaces 6 95 inch wide 16 9 6 3 4 in x 3 7 8in x AVIC 6100NEX asesessessesseee 6 2 inch wide 16 9 7 8 in AVIC 5100NEX uneessssseesseees 6 2 inch wide 16 9 AVIC 7100NEX Effective display area icc en 178mm x 100mm x AVIC 810ONEX aeesesstesesseeee 156 6 mm x 81 6 mm 164mm 6 1 8 in X 3 1 4 in Tin X 3 7 8in x 6 1 2 in AVIC 7100NEX ecscsssesseeeses 156 6 mm x 81 6mm NOSE caidestitieen 171mm x 97mm x 20mm 6 1 8 in x 3 1 4 in 6 3 4 in x 3 7 8in x AVIC 61 OONEX cccossssessess 137 5 Mmm Xx 77 3 MM 3 4 in 5 3 8 in x 3 in AVIC 6100NEX AVIC 5100NEX AVIC 5100NEX storssasnessuesen 137 5 MM x 77 3 MM CHASSIS cesssscssssecsseeeees 178mm x 100mm x 5 3 8 in x 3 in 164mm PIXEIS reine a 1 152 000 2 400 x 480 Tin xX 3 7 8 ine x 6 172 in Display method ssesssrrsseerrrererren TFT Active matrix driving NOSE sc iwicascetenns 170mm x 97 mm x 8mm Color SVSTOMN 1 duusenscacenmcanncnenn PAL NTSC PAL M PAL N 6 3 4 in X 3 7 8in x SECAM compatible 3 8 in Tolerable temperature range Weight Power Off sccesinsinataieaniacnnntia 4 F to 176 F AVIC 8100NEX neesssssessesees 2 1 kg 4 6 Ibs AVIC 7100NEX onssas
256. n O When you use an iPhone this key is not available 4 Displays the menu screen O When you use an iPhone this key is not available Displays the Phone menu screen Chapter suoi ed1 dde suoudyiews 10 BUOUd INOA Buisn En 133 22 Usino gt For details refer to Displaying the phone menu on page 80 6 Displays the current source O0 In AppRadio Mode App control side bar will appear O If you press the HOME button twice the App control side bar will disappear Press the HOME button twice again and the App control side bar will appear Starting procedure When connecting an iPhone or smartphone to this product you must select the method for connecting your device Settings are required according to the connected device gt For details refer to Chapter 13 The procedure varies depending on the type of device For iPhone with a 30 pin connector users 1 Connect your iPhone For details of the connections refer to the Installation Manual 2 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 3 Touch APPS A message which notifies you that your iPhone can launch the application appears on the screen A message which asks you whether you want to launch your application appears on your iPhone 4 Use your iPhone to launch the applica tion The AppRadio app is launched 5 Touch OK on the screen of this pro duct The AppRadio Mode screen Application menu screen appears
257. n again Chapter Using hands free phoninc Cz Changing the phone settings Answering a call automatically This product automatically answers incoming calls to the connected cellular phone so you can answer calls while driving without taking your hands off the steering wheel When Auto Answer is set to On an in coming call will be automatically answered in 5 seconds 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order ks gt The Bluetooth screen appears 3 Touch Auto Answer repeatedly until the desired setting appears e Off default Turns the automatic answering off e On Turns the automatic answering on Switching the ring tone You can select whether or not to use this pro duct s ring tone 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order ks gt The Bluetooth screen appears 3 Touch Ring Tone repeatedly until the desired setting appears e On default Turns the ring tone on e Off Turns the ring tone off Inverting names in the phone book When your device is connected to this pro duct the first and last names of your contacts may be registered to the phone book in reverse order You can use this function to change the order back Inverting the names in the phone book 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2
258. n this product is installed at an extreme angle exceeding the limitation of the installing angle NOK Inst Angle will be displayed When the angle of this product has been changed NOK Vibration will be displayed 4 Speed Pulse s6ul 9S Wia sAs Chapter E9 Audio adjustments Using fader balance adjustment You can select a fader balance setting that provides an ideal listening environment in all occupied seats This function is available only when main audio is available This function is available only when Rear Speaker is set to On gt For details refer to Adjusting the front and rear speaker output on page 198 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow E ED The Audio screen appears 3 Touch Fader Balance The Fader Balance screen appears 4 Touch the following keys to adjust the front rear speaker balance Each time you touch the keys the front rear speaker balance moves towards the front or rear O Front25 to Rear25 is displayed as the front rear speaker balance moves from the front to rear T The default setting is F R O L R 0 Set Front and Rear to 0 when using a dual speaker system Moves towards the front Moves towards the rear 194 En 5 Touch the following keys to adjust the left right speaker balance Each time you tou
259. nd a large parking lot When you drive around a traffic circle A iO When starting driving immediately after starting the engine Append ix MD Appendx SSOC CS lt 73PTTSC lt Route setting information Route search specifications Your navigation system sets a route to your destination by applying certain built in rules to the map data This section provides some use ful information about how a route is set A CAUTION When a route is calculated the route and voice guidance for the route are automatically set Also for day or time traffic regulations only infor mation about traffic regulations applicable at the time when the route was calculated is consid ered One way streets and street closures may not be taken into consideration For example if a street is open during the morning only but you arrive later it would be against the traffic regula tions so you cannot drive along the set route When driving please follow the actual traffic signs Also the system may not know some traf fic regulations e The calculated route is one example of the route to your destination decided by the na vigation system while taking the type of streets or traffic regulations into account It is not necessarily an optimum route In some cases you may not be able to set the streets you want to take If you need to take a certain street set a waypoint on that street e f the destination is to
260. nd all audio files in the Bluetooth audio player Operating with the hardware buttons Press the TRK button You can skip files forward or backward Press and hold the TRK button You can perform fast reverse or fast for ward m J ejd oipne yz oo an g e bulsn Usin SiriusXM satellite radio operations You can use this product to control a SiriusXM Connect Vehicle Tuner sold separately For information on how to install the SiriusxM Connect Vehicle Tuner consult the installation guide included with the tuner Only SiriusXM brings you more of what you love to listen to all in one place Get over 140 channels including commercial free music plus the best sports news talk comedy and entertainment Welcome to the world of satel lite radio A SiriusXM Vehicle Tuner and Sub scription are required For more information visit www siriusxm com Subscribing to the SiriusxM Satellite Radio service 1 Select SiriusXM as the source You should be able to tune in to Channel 1 If you cannot get Channel 1 ensure that your SiriuSXM Connect Vehicle Tuner is installed correctly as described in the tuner installation guide 2 Switch to Channel 0 and check the Radio ID The SiriusXM Radio ID can be found by tuning in to Channel 0 The Radio ID can also be found at the bottom of the SiriusXM Connect Vehicle Tuner screen Note that the SiriuSXM Radio ID does not in clude the letters O S or A You wi
261. ne or a smartphone may not be legal while driving in your juris diction so you must be aware of and obey any such restrictions If in doubt as to a particular function only perform it while the car is parked No feature should be used unless it is safe to do so under the driving conditions you are experiencing When you connect an iPhone or a smartphone with the Aha Radio installed you can control view and or listen to Aha Radio content from this product In this chapter iPhone and iPod touch will be referred to as iPhone For details concerning operations refer to the Helo and Tips section within the Aha Radio application O Aha Radio stations may require initial setup or sign in before the station can be accessed O Be sure to read Using app based connected content before you perform this operation gt For details refer to Using app based con nected content on page 251 Notes e Certain functionality of the Aha Radio service may not be available when accessing the ser vice through this product including but not limited to creating new Aha stations deleting Aha stations recording shouts by voice ad justing Aha Radio App settings logging into Facebook creating a Facebook account log ging into Twitter or creating a Twitter account e Aha Radio is a service not affiliated with Pioneer More information is available at http www aharadio com e A specific version of the Aha Radio ap
262. ning can also be contigured to to the default settings incorporate dimension weight and freight hazard restrictions for maps that contain 1 Press the MAP button such data The Map screen appears To enhance the route accuracy correctly select a vehicle type that is similar to the 2 Touch the following key condition of your vehicle _ e Car Se Displays the navigation menu on Maneuver restrictions and directional He Map Screen constraints are taken into account when planning a route 3 Touch to show the next page Roads are used only if access for cars is allowed 4 Touch Settings Private roads and resident only roads The Settings screen appears are used only if they are inevitable to reach the destination Walkways are excluded from routes e Emergency Displays the shortcuts All maneuvers available at intersections are taken into account Directional constraints are taken into 5 Touch the following key uoi epineu y JO S9dUdAaJaI1d Hulziwio sny 6 Touch Reset All Settings account in the same way as travel in the A confirmation message appears opposite direction is allowed at low speeds 7 Touch OK Only private roads that need to be used The recorded contents are cleared to access the destination are included C1 If you touch Factory Reset on the short Walkways are excluded from routes cut all data relevant to navigation includ
263. nnected correctly ate in simple hybrid mode Pandora Message Cause Action Communication error oc iPod failure Disconnect the cable from the iPod Once the curred iPod s main menu is displayed reconnect the iPod and reset it Error 19 Communication failed Disconnect the cable from the iPod Once the iPod s main menu is displayed reconnect the iPod and reset it Skip limit reached Skip limit reached e Do not exceed the skip limit e Due to music licensing restrictions Pandora limits the total number of skips per hour Check Device Device error message displayed in Please check your connected device Pandora application Incompatible USB The connected USB storage device Disconnect your device and replace it with a is not Supported by this product compatible USB storage device Check USB The USB connector or USB cable Check that the USB connector or USB cable has short circuited is not caught in something or damaged The connected USB storage device Disconnect the USB storage device and do consumes more than maximum al not use it Turn the ignition switch to OFF lowable current then to ACC or ON and then connect a com pliant USB storage device Aha Radio Message Cause Action Communication Error iPod failure Disconnect the cable from the iPod Once the iPod s main menu is displayed reconnect the iPod and reset it Error 02 6X iPod failure Disconnect the cable from the iPod Once t
264. nnot be viewed while your vehicle is in motion To view video images you must stop in a safe place and apply the parking brake Using the touch panel keys Example Disc Ty 2 V F Wi fn TON AY ee i Ch a a TaT ef My Ag ye Ae Pipes TM ae Hi E ns ay Md EZ y Pi Yy a LON A TE ate H 4 ee eke Cn Z 5 patti A T AET A 4 2 Er h 4 Ay y i N E i p pe Ye Displays the source list gt For details refer to Selecting a front source on the source list on page 25 2 Displays the Time and date setting screen gt For details refer to Setting the time and date on page 221 3 Displays the Setting menu screen 4 Recalls equalizer curves gt For details refer to Using the equalizer on page 202 Selects a file from the list gt For details refer to Selecting files from the file name list on page 117 6 Hides the touch panel keys Touching this area hides the touch panel keys O Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display the touch panel keys again 116 En D Sets a repeat play range gt For details refer to Setting a repeat play range on page 118 Switches the subtitle language With DivX featuring multi subtitle recordings you can switch between subtitle languages during playback 9 Displays the Phone menu screen gt For details refer to Displaying the phone menu on page 80 Skips files forward or backward di Switches the audio langu
265. ns refer to the In stallation Manual as Y S00 OV Oe CO Mini jack extension cable 2 Microphone for acoustical measurement sold separately Chapter sjuawjsnipe oipny Chapter E9 Audio adjustments 10 Touch Front Left or Front Right to se lect the current listening position 11 Touch Start A 10 second countdown starts 1 The Bluetooth connection is disconnected before the process starts 12 Exit the vehicle and keep the doors closed until the countdown finishes When the countdown finishes a measure ment tone noise is emitted from the speakers and the Auto EQ measurement begins 13 Wait until the measurement is com pleted When Auto EQ is completed a message is dis played indicating that the measurement is completed O Ifthe vehicle s acoustics cannot be mea sured correctly an error message will be displayed T The measurement time varies depending on the type of vehicle To stop the measurement touch Stop 14 Store the microphone carefully in the glove compartment or another safe place If the microphone is subjected to direct sun light for an extended period high tempera tures may cause distortion color change or malfunction 206 En Chapter Thememenu 9 Selecting the background display The background display can be selected from 8 different preset displays for the AV operation screen and 5 different preset displays for the Top menu
266. o 10 dB is displayed as the dis tance to be corrected is increased or de creased e Front Left Changes the speaker level of the front left speaker e Front Right 200 En E9 Audio adjustments Changes the speaker level of the front right speaker e Rear Left Changes the speaker level of the rear left speaker e Rear Right Changes the speaker level of the rear right speaker e Subwoofer Changes the speaker level of the subwoofer speaker If you touch Apply Auto EQ the result of A EQ amp TA Measurement will be applied to the speaker level setting To use this function the vehicle s acoustics must be measured in advance Adjusting the time alignment By adjusting the distance from each speaker to the listening position time alignment is able to correct the time required for sound to reach the listening position O This function is available only when main audio is available O This function is available only when Rear Speaker is set to On gt For details refer to Adjusting the front and rear speaker output on page 198 This function is available only when Sub woofer is set to On gt For details refer to Using the subwoofer output on page 198 This function is available only when the lis tening position setting is set to Front Left or Front Right gt For details refer to Selecting the listen ing position on page 199 1 Measure the distance
267. o all Adjusting the speaker output levels finely Fine adjustments of the speaker output level can be made by listening to audio output O This function is available only when main audio is available This function is available only when Rear Speaker is set to On gt For details refer to Adjusting the front and rear speaker output on page 198 This function is available only when Sub woofer is set to On gt For details refer to Using the subwoofer output on page 198 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow Bg BD The Audio screen appears sjuaujsnipe oipny 3 Touch Speaker Level The Speaker Level screen appears 4 Touch the following keys to select the listening position if necessary Selects the listening position e Off Changes the listening position setting to off e Front Left Changes the listening position setting to front left e Front Right Changes the listening position setting to front right e Front Changes the listening position setting to front e All Changes the listening position setting to all O If you change the listening position setting the output levels of all the speakers will change in conjunction with the setting 5 Touch the following keys to adjust the speaker output level Decreases the speaker level Increases the speaker level Ol 24 dB t
268. o corresponding infor mation O Nothing is displayed if the song cur rently playing is in a format which does not support these functions Folder Browse mode fF File name 112 En Shows the name of the file currently playing e Ej Folder name Shows the name of the folder contain ing the file currently playing 2 Current time and date 3 Album artwork Album art of the current song is displayed if it is available 4 Playback condition indicator Indicates the current playback condition Playing files in random order Indicator Meaning Does not play files in random order Plays all files within the repeat range in random order Setting a repeat play range for Disc Indicator Meaning aa Repeats just the current file Repeats just the current folder Repeats all compressed audio files Setting a repeat play range for Music Browse mode Indicator Meaning h Repeats just the current file Repeats all compressed audio files Chapter Playing compressed audio files Setting a repeat play range for Folder Browse mode Indicator Meaning Repeats just the current file Repeats just the current folder J e Repeats all compressed audio files Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time within the current file m Starting procedure for Disc 1 Display the AV source selection screen gt For details of the operations refer to
269. o far there may be in stances where the route cannot be set It you want to set a long distance route going across several areas set waypoints along the way e During voice guidance turns and Intersec tions from the freeway are announced However if you pass intersections turns and other guidance points in rapid succes sion some may delay or not be announced e tis possible that guidance may direct you off a freeway and then back on again e In some cases the route may require you to travel in the opposite direction to your En current heading In such cases you are in structed to turn around so please turn around safely by following the actual traffic rules e In some cases a route may begin on the opposite side of a railway or river from your actual current location If this happens drive towards your destination for a while and try route calculation again e When there is a traffic congestion ahead a detour route may not be suggested if driv ing through the traffic congestion would still be better than taking the detour e There may be instances when the starting point the waypoint and the destination point are not on the highlighted route e The number of traffic circle exits displayed on the screen may differ from the actual number of roads Route highlighting e Once set the route is highlighted in bright color on the map e The immediate vicinity of your starting point and destination may not b
270. o mid low e MID Changes the ASL level to mid e MID HIGH Changes the ASL level to mid high e HIGH Changes the ASL level to high J Using the equalizer The equalizer lets you adjust equalization to match the vehicle interior acoustic character istics as desired 202 En E9 Audio adjustments Recalling equalizer curves There are seven stored equalizer curves that you can easily recall at any time Here is a list of the equalizer curves Equalizer curve S Bass is a curve in which only low pitched sound is boosted Powerful is a curve in which low and high pitched sounds are boosted Natural is a curve in which low and high pitched sounds are slightly boosted Vocal is a curve in which the midrange which is the human vocal range is boosted Flat is a flat curve in which nothing is boosted Custom1 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre ate If you select this curve the effect is applied to all AV sources Custom2 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre ate If you select this curve the effect is applied to all AV sources O This function is available only when main audio is available The default setting is Powerful When Flat is selected no supplement or correction is made to the sound This is useful to check the effect of the equalizer curves by switching alternatively between Flat and a set equalizer curve 1 Press the HOME button to display the T
271. o the instruction manual of your devices O Set the device visible to other devices 2 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 3 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order k gt D The Bluetooth screen appears 4 Touch Connection The following screen appears Chapter Connection 5 Touch the following key Starts searching The system searches for Bluetooth devices waiting for a connection and displays them in the list if a device is found Connection MY PHONE 03 My Bluetooth Device MY PHONE 02 O Up to 20 devices will be listed in the order that the devices are found 6 Wait until your Bluetooth device ap pears in the list O If you cannot find the Bluetooth device that you want to connect check that the device is waiting for a Bluetooth wireless technol ogy connection 7 Touch the name of the Bluetooth device you want to register While connecting Pairing Please wait is displayed If the connection is established Paired is displayed O If your device supports SSP Secure Simple Pairing a six digit number appears on the display of this product Touch Yes to pair ing the device O Ifthe connection fails Error is displayed In such cases try again from the begin ning CM The PIN code is set to 0000 as the default but can be changed gt For details refer to Entering the PIN code for Bluetooth wireles
272. o the AV input 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order gt t The Video Setup screen appears 3 Touch Video Signal Setting The following screen appears 7 Video Setup r N AUX Camera 4 Touch AV The pop up menu appears 5 Touch the item you want to set e Auto default 176 En ED Using AV input Adjusts the video signal setting automati cally PAL Sets the video signal to PAL NTSC Sets the video signal to NTSC PAL M Sets the video signal to PAL M PAL N Sets the video signal to PAL N SECAM Sets the video signal to SECAM Using MIXTRAX MIXTRAX is original technology for creating non stop mixes of selections from your audio library complete with Du effects that make them sound as if a Du is right there with you playing the music O You can turn MIXTRAX on by touching MIXTRAX on the playback screen of com pressed audio files gt For details refer to Using the touch panel keys on page 111 Touch panel keys Exits the MIXTRAX screen 2 Displays the LinkGate screen Touch the desired item Songs related to the selected item are played 3 Specifies the BPM The original BPM is not displayed during play back 4 Displays the item selection screen gt For details of the operations refer to Se lecting an item to play songs on page 177 Displays
273. o this product via Bluetooth connection gt For details of the Bluetooth connection refer to Chapter 11 Setting the device connection method If you want to use the application for iPhone or smartphone on this product you must se lect the method for connecting your device Settings are required according to the con nected device 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow Am The System screen appears 3 Touch Input Output Settings 88 En 4 Touch Smartphone Setup The Smartphone Setup screen appears 5 Configure the following settings e Device Select the device to be connected e Connection Select the connection meth od O Configure the settings correctly according to the device to be connected and the con nection method to be used For details refer to nformation on the connections and functions for each de vice on page 90 O If you change the setting the confirmation screen appears Touch OK The setting will change after the following processes are automatically executed The source is turned off AppRadio Mode or MirrorLink mode is exited The smartphone connection USB and Bluetooth is disconnected To cancel touch Cancel O The setting cannot be changed for a while after the setting is changed m iPod compatibility This product supports only the following iPod models and iPod so
274. oO o Reading the screen for video O This information is not available while playing iTunes Radio PZ Genre Shows the genre of the current file when available No Genre is dis played if there is no corresponding infor mation O This information is not available while playing iTunes Radio e JY Station Shows the station name of the song cur rently being played O This information is available while playing iTunes Radio 2 Current time and date 3 Album artwork Reading the screen for Album art of the current song is displayed if it iTunes Radio is available 4 Playback condition indicator Indicates the current playback condition mlO 49 My Setting the shuffle play EQ intil P Pr Zz Indicator Meaning Plays back songs or videos in random order within the se lected list Selects an album randomly and then plays back all songs in that album in order Current track information Setting a repeat play range e Song title l being played when available No Title is displayed if there is no corre sponding information EJ Artist name Shows the artist name for the song cur rently being played when available Play time indicator No Name is displayed if there is no Shows the elapsed playing time within the corresponding information current file e J Album title Shows the title of the album of the cur rent file when available No
275. ocation appears on the Map screen If you touch fj you can sort the results or show the locations of all facilities on the map 7 Touch Select as Destination on the Map Location screen gt For details on the operations in the Map Location screen refer to Using the Map Location screen on page 45 After touching Select as Destination the Route Summary screen appears and count down begins When the countdown ends the guidance automatically starts If the screen is touched anywhere during the countdown the countdown stops and the screen will stay as it iS Chapter Searching for a destination 05 gt For details on the operations in the Route Summary screen refer to Checking route information and preferences on page 48 8 Touch Start Navigation Your navigation system starts the route gul dance gt For details of the route guidance refer to Understanding the route guidance on page 34 Searching for POIs by categories or directly from the name of the facilities You can search for POIs by their categories and subcategories You can also search for POls by their names in each of their cate gories 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 2 Touch the following key Displays the navigation menu on the Map screen 3 Touch New Route The New Route to screen appears 4 Touch Places The Places screen appears 5 Touch Search Among
276. ollowing key repeatedly until the desired setting appears on the AV SiriusXM operation screen The touch panel key on which the artist name song title category name or content text is dis celethe Sound Retriever unction played The information on the song on air is stored in this product While the information is being acquired f Tag Mode1 default Activates the Sound Retriever function Mode2 is displayed r l When it is completed 6 Tag turns off and jis Activates the Sound Retriever function displayed Off Deactivates the Sound Retriever func tion Mode has a stronger effect than Mode1 m O The song information for up to 50 songs can be stored in this product 222 En Chapter Changing the wide screen m When a video is viewed in a wide screen mode mode that does not match its original as pect ratio it may appear different You can set the screen size for the video and O The video image will appear coarser when JPEG images viewed in Zoom mode m O This setting is available only when you stop your vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake O The default setting is Full for video and Normal for JPEG images suo l eiado uowwoy 1 Touch the following key Displays the setting screen to select the appropriate screen ratio for the play back video gt O The appearance of this key changes accord ing to the curr
277. ollowing keys in the follow Am The System screen appears 3 Touch Input Output Settings The following screen appears 4 System T Smartphone Setup AV Input AUX Input 4 Touch AV Input The pop up menu appears 5 Touch the item you want to set e Off default Deactivates the AV source e Source Displays the video image output by the con nected external device e Camera Displays the image output by the connected external camera o If Camera is selected 2nd Camera Input is automatically set to On 1 If Off or Source is selected 2nd Cam era Input is automatically set to Off Setting the rear view camera The following two functions are available A se parately sold rear view camera e g ND BC6 is required for utilizing the rear view camera function For details consult your dealer Rear view camera This product features a function that automati cally switches to the full screen image of the rear view camera installed on your vehicle When the shift lever is in the REVERSE R po sition the screen automatically switches to full screen rear view camera image Chapter O If the shift lever is aligned to the REVERSE R position immediately after the system of this product is started up only the camera image will be displayed and the parking as sist guidelines will not be displayed The parking assist guidelines will be d
278. ome off during play back and prevent ejection of the discs which may result in damage to the equipment e o clean a disc wipe it with a soft cloth moving outward from the center e Condensation may temporarily impair the built in drive s performance Leave it to ad just to the warmer temperature for about Appendix Appendix OS one hour Also wipe any damp discs with a soft cloth e Playback of discs may not be possible be cause of disc characteristics disc format recorded application playback environ ment storage conditions and so on e Road shocks may interrupt disc playback e Read the precautions for discs before using them Ambient conditions for playing a disc e Atextremely high temperatures a tempera ture cutout protects this product by switch ing it off automatically e Despite our careful design of the product small scratches that do not affect actual operation may appear on the disc surface as a result of mechanical wear ambient conditions for use or handling of the disc This is not a sign of the malfunction of this product Consider it to be normal wear and tear m Playable discs DVD Video and CD DVD and CD discs that display the logos shown below generally can be played on this built in DVD drive DVD Video _ CD oS DIGITAL AUDIO x pu ddy Appendix MD Append SC C C SSSSC lt C S S Ol Bye is a trademark of DVD Format Logo Licensing
279. on menu on the Map screen 3 Touch Useful Information The Useful Information screen appears 4 Touch the desired menu item A Useful information e Parking Checks for parking lots near your current lo cation For details refer to the manual for AVICSYNC on our website e Fuel Prices Displays recent gas prices of gas stations near the current location along the current route or in the town For details refer to the manual for AVICSYNC on our website e Weather Checks the weather forecast for your cur rent location along your route around your destination as well as for your saved loca tions O For details refer to the manual for AVICSYNC on our website Where Am I Displays a special screen with information about the current position and a key to search for nearby emergency or roadside assistance Services The screen provides the following informa tion Latitude and longitude coordinates of the current position in WGS84 format Address details of the current position when available The nearest city Next crossing road street Previous crossing road street O Ifthe current street is displayed below the current position marker on the map touch it to open the Where Am 1 screen When you are driving without a planned route touch the current street or the arrows at the top section of the Map screen to open the Where Am I screen O To save the
280. on switch to OFF and then to module of this product ON If the error message is still displayed after per forming the above action please contact your dealer or an authorized Pioneer Service Sta tion Android Auto Message Cause Action Reference Android Auto has stopped The connected device is not compa Check if the device is compatible with tible with Android Auto Android Auto The startup of Android Auto failed Disconnect the cable from the smartphone for some reasons and then connect the smartphone again after a few seconds e Restart the smartphone e Turn the ignition switch to OFF and then to ON If the error message is still displayed after per forming the above action please contact your dealer or an authorized Pioneer Service Sta tion The time set in this product is not Check if GPS signals are received and the correct time is correctly set Bluetooth pairing failed The Bluetooth pairing failed for Pair this product with the device manually Please pair your Android some reasons Page 74 Page 77 phone manually 234 En Appendix Appendix GS MirrorLink Message Cause The application list could not be read out Failed to load the application list There is no supported applica No supported applications can be tion on your MirrorLink de found vice Communication error oc curred Launching the application failed Failed to display the screen of The image size is too large
281. one or smartphone first in order to be able to use online services which re quire a paid subscription Service coverage for each online service may vary depending on the content provider providing the ser vice gt For details refer to Expanding the use of the navigation functions on page 71 11 Select the connected services you want to use then touch Next The initial setup is now complete The Map screen appears and you can start using the navigation system Chapter How to use the Navigation menu screen CH Operating the Navigation menu screen 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 2 Touch the following key Displays the navigation menu on the Map screen The following screen appears Touch panel keys Page 1 O 4 A A z 20 Q Touch panel keys Page 2 oO B You will see the following keys when you are navigating without a planned route Returns to the Map screen 2 Searches for your destination by the ad dress or coordinates or searches for the se lected place of interest etc gt For details refer to Chapter 5 3 Builds your route or edits the route cur rently set gt For details refer to Building a route using Route Planner on page 46 4 Displays the Traffic Summary screen gt For details refer to Checking the traffic incidents on the map on page 5d O For AVIC 5100NEX this key becomes
282. ong not to be played back again 127 Adding the current song to the wish list 127 Using this product s iPod function from your iPod 128 Changing the speed of audiobook playback 128 Displaying lists related to the song currently playing link search 129 Operating with the hardware buttons 129 Playing back music from a music app other than iPod music as the iPod source 129 Using the touch panel keys 129 Reading the screen 130 21 Playing music output from the Android Auto compatible device Using the touch panel keys 131 Reading the screen 131 Starting procedure 132 22 Using your iPhone or smartphone applications Using AppRadio Mode 133 Using the touch panel keys App control side bar 133 Starting procedure 134 Using the keyboard 135 Adjusting the image size For smartphone users 136 Displaying the image of your application iPhone with 30 pin connector 137 Displaying the image of your application iPhone with Lightning connector 137 Displaying the image of your application smartphone 138 Using Android Auto 138 Starting procedure 139 Setting the driving position 139 Adjusting the volume 140 Using MirrorLink mode 140 Using the touch panel keys App control side bar 140 Starting procedure 140 Using the audio mix function 141 23 Streaming Pandora Pandora operations 142 Using the touch panel keys 142 Reading the screen 143 Starting procedure 143 For
283. ont source on the source list on page 25 Streaming Pandora 2 Displays the Time and date setting screen gt For details refer to Setting the time and date on page 221 3 Displays the Setting menu screen 4 Recalls equalizer curves gt For details refer to Using the equalizer on page 202 Touching the key displays the list of your Pandora stations gt For details refer to Selecting a Pandora station from the list on page 145 6 Displays the Phone menu screen gt For details refer to Displaying the phone menu on page 80 D Switches to the next or previous page of touch panel keys Touching the key gives a Thumbs Down to the track currently playing and skips to the next track O This function is not available when using a shared station 9 Touching the key gives a Thumbs Up to the track currently playing O This function is not available when using a shared station Switches between playback and pause di Uses Sound Retriever function gt For details refer to Setting the Sound Retriever function on page 222 2 Adds information for the track currently playing to bookmarks O Songs added to bookmarks cannot be viewed from this product 3 Creates a new station gt For details refer to Creating a station on page 145 Chapter Reading the screen PANDORA Vlla 29 eA Current track information e Shows the Pandora station name the tuner i
284. op menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow E ED The Audio screen appears 3 Touch Graphic EQ The Graphic EQ screen appears 4 Touch the equalizer you want Chapter Audio adjustments 33 Customizing the equalizer curves You can adjust the currently selected equalizer curve setting as desired Adjustments can be made with a 13 band graphic equalizer O This function is available only when main audio is available T Ifyou make adjustments when a curve S Bass Powerful Natural Vocal or Flat is selected the equalizer curve set tings will be changed to Custom1 auto matically O Ifyou make adjustments when the Cus tom2 curve is selected for example the Custom2 curve will be updated O Custom1 and Custom2 curves can be created common to all sources 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow B BD The Audio screen appears 3 Touch Graphic EQ The Graphic EQ screen appears 4 Touch one of the keys to select a curve that you want to use as the basis of custo mizing 5 Touch the frequency for which you want to adjust the level O If you trail a finger across the bars of multi ple equalizer bands the equalizer curve set tings will be set to the value of the touched point on each bar Using the auto adjusted equalizer You can
285. or AVIC 8100NEX AVIC 7100NEX and AVIC 6100NEX Android Auto for AVIC 8100NEX and AVIC 7100NEX 190 En MirrorLink AUX Internal navigation system MIXTRAX images output from the external device Rear view camera m Displaying the firmware version 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow Am The System screen appears 3 Touch System Information The following screen appears System Firmware Information E EAEG 3D Calibration Status r Connection Status 4 Touch Firmware Information The Firmware Information screen appears O You can check the open source licenses of the functions that this product is equipped with under License on the Firmware In formation screen m Updating firmware CAUTION e Never turn this product off eject the SD mem ory card or disconnect the USB storage device while the firmware is being updated e You can only update the firmware when the ve hicle is stopped and the parking brake is en gaged Chapter O Use the USB port to update the firmware using a USB storage device O SD memory card is available for AVIC 8100NEX and AVIC 7100NEX 1 Download the firmware update files 2 Connect a blank formatted SD mem ory card or USB storage device to your computer and then locate the correct up date file and copy it onto the SD memory ca
286. or smartphone users 8100NEX 7100NEX 6100NEX Black dots may appear on the screen when using AppRadio Mode with an Android de vice connected to this product 136 En our iPhone or smartphone applications A CAUTION This setting is available only when you stop your vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake O This function can be set under the follow ing conditions When an Android device is connected to this product using CD AH200 sold separately and when AppRadio Mode is available after a Bluetooth connection using SPP Serial Port Profile has been established O If this setting has not been set the setting screen automatically appears in the follow ing cases When entering AppRadio Mode after a Bluetooth connection using SPP Serial Port Profile has been established When a Bluetooth connection using SPP Serial Port Profile has been estab lished in AppRadio Mode 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow A M The System screen appears 3 Touch Input Output Settings 4 Touch AppRadio Video Adjustment The confirmation screen appears 5 Touch OK our iPhone or smartphone applications 6 Touch the following keys to adjust the line to fit smartphone image size Moves the line to the left Moves the line to the right Moves the line upward Moves the line downward 7 Touch P
287. original route You can choose from one of the following op tions e Touch Dismiss or just ignore the message if you want to keep the original route e Touch Preview to see an overview of the original route and the detour to make the decision You can accept the detour as shown in the preview or increase the free way segment bypassed before accepting e Turn to the suggested new direction and the route will be automatically recalcu lated uoi epineu y JO s 2U 1 4J 1d Hurz WOZSNI Chapter ED Customizing preferences of the navigation Offer Real time Route Alternatives Alternative routes can be suggested when driving on normal roads Ihis navigation sys tem will select a different turn in the upcom ing intersection and offer you a different route for the next section of the route You cannot however modify the offered detour Offer Parking Around Destination Parking at the destination may not be easy to find in city areas As you approach the destina tion this navigation system can offer parking category places near your destination Touch EJ to open a top down map with the destina tion and the offered parking places The route is calculated by selecting one of the parking places Offer Hints Upon Detour If you leave the recommended route and sud denly exit the freeway this navigation system offers different alternatives near the exit like gas stations or restaurants Also if there are avoidable par
288. ormatting function on a com puter do not comply with the SD standard Problems such as that those cards cannot be read or written could occur It is recom mended that you use a dedicated formatter to avoid such problems All of the data stored on an SD memory card will be de leted when the card is formatted Back up any needed data beforehand as necessary A dedicated formatter for SD memory cards can be obtained from the following site httos www sdcard org USB storage device compatibility gt For details about USB storage device com patibility with this product refer to Specifi cations on page 259 Protocol bulk You cannot connect a USB storage device to this product via a USB hub Partitioned USB storage device is not com patible with this product Firmly secure the USB storage device when driving Do not let the USB storage device fall onto the floor where it may become jammed under the brake or gas pedal There may be a slight delay when starting playback of audio files encoded with image data Some USB storage devices connected to this product may generate noise on the radio Do not connect anything other than the USB storage device The sequence of audio files on USB sto xipusddy rage device For USB storage device the sequence is differ ent trom that of USB storage device acteristics file format recorded applica tion playback environment storage conditions and so on En 243 Appen
289. ot be operated until playing back is started e This product corresponds to a DivX Tile dis play of up to 1590 minutes 43 seconds Search operations beyond this time limit are prohibited e if multiple subtitles are programmed to dis e DivX VOD file playback requires supplying play within a very short time frame such as the ID code of this product to the DivX VOD 0 1 seconds the subtitles may not be dis provider Regarding the ID code refer to played at the correct time Displaying your DivX VOD registration code on page 216 e Plays all versions of DivX video except for DivX 7 with standard playback of DivX media files e For more details about DivX visit the follow ing site http www divx com DivX subtitle files e Srt format subtitle files with the extension srt can be used e Only one subtitle file can be used for each DivX Tile Multiple subtitle files cannot be associated e Subtitle files that are named with the same character string as the DivX Tile before the extension are associated with the DivX file The character strings before the extension 244 En Appendix Media compatibility chart General Appendix SD memory card DVD R R SL R USB storage de DL DVD RW vice Media CD R RW File system ISO9660 level 1 ISO9660 level 2 Romeo Joliet UDF 1 02 1 50 2 00 2 01 2 50 ISO9660 level 1 ISO9660 level 2 Romeo Joliet UDF 1 02 1 50 2 00 2 01 2 50 FAT16 FAT3
290. ou can check the details of the traffic inci dents Touch the relevant event to display the location on the map m Turning the traffic information on or off The traffic information feature is turned on by default To enable or disable the TMC feature perform the following procedure 56 En O If you turn the traffic information feature off Traffic on the navigation menu disap pears 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 2 Touch the following key I Displays the navigation menu on the Map screen 3 Touch to show the next page 4 Touch Settings The Settings screen appears 5 Touch to show the next page 6 Touch Traffic The Traffic Settings screen appears 7 Touch Traffic to turn the switch on or off The feature is enabled or disabled gt For details refer to Traffic settings on page 69 Chapter Checking useful information about your trip CH Checking useful information The Useful Information menu contains var ious information to support your driving O The online function in Parking Weath er and Fuel Prices can be used if you connect an iPhone or a smartphone that has the AVICSYNC App installed gt Be sure read Expanding the use of the navigation functions page 71 before using the AVICSYNC function 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 2 Touch the following key Displays the navigati
291. ouch USB2 on the AV source selec tion screen 4 Use the touch panel keys on the screen to control the playback gt For details refer to Using the touch panel keys on page 131 O The Android Auto function may not oper ate properly if the Bluetooth connection with the Android Auto compatible device is terminated 132 En our iPhone or smartphone applications A WARNING Certain uses of an iPhone or a smartphone may not be legal while driving in your juris diction so you must be aware of and obey any such restrictions If in doubt as to a particular function only perform it while the car is parked No feature should be used unless it is safe to do so under the driving conditions you are experiencing Using AppRadio Mode You can control applications for an iPhone or a smartphone directly from the screen AppRadio Mode In AppRadio Mode you can operate applica tions with finger gestures such as tapping dragging scrolling or flicking on the screen of this product gt For details of AppRadio Mode compatible devices refer to AopRadio Mode Compatibil ity on page 89 O In this chapter iPhone and iPod touch will be referred to as iPhone O For AVIC 5100NEX users AppRadio Mode is only available on an iPhone O The compatible finger gestures vary de pending on the application for an iPhone or a smartphone O When an application not compatible with AppRadio Mode is started depending on th
292. our iPhone When you tap the text input area of an applica tion for iPhone a keyboard will be displayed on the screen You can input the desired text directly from this product O The language preference for the keyboard of this product should be same as the set ting on your iPhone If the settings for this product and the iPhone are different you may be unable to enter characters properly Chapter suoi ed1 dde auoudyiews 10 BUOUd INOA Huisn En 135 Chapter 22 Usino 1 Set the keyboard language gt For details of the operations refer to Setting the keyboard language with the application for iPhone on page 186 2 Start up the AppRadio Mode gt For details refer to Starting procedure on page 134 3 Touch the text input area on the appli cation operation screen A keyboard for entering text appears Enters the characters 2 Deletes the entered text one letter at a time beginning at the end of the text 3 Confirms the entry and allows you to pro ceed to the next step 4 Hides the keyboard and the text can now be entered using the keyboard of the iPhone Changes the iPhone keyboard layout O The iPhone keyboard layouts that can be selected by tapping depends on the setting for Hardware Keyboard Layout set on your iPhone 6 Switches to a keyboard offering numeric characters and symbols Converts the case of the keyboard charac ters Adjusting the image size F
293. our trip CH 6 Touch Current Milometer Value and then enter the current odometer value 7 Touch Fuel Amount to enter the amount of fuel pumped this time 8 Touch Fuel Price Unit to enter the fuel unit price this time 9 Touch Add The View Consumption Entry screen ap pears 10 Touch Done The entry is created and the fuel consumption is displayed O To delete an entry touch to display the shortcut for deletion Setting the car maintenance schedule 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 2 Touch the following key Displays the navigation menu on the Map screen 3 Touch Useful Information The Useful Information screen appears 4 Touch Fuel Consumption The Fuel Consumption screen appears 5 Touch FE diz ANOA YNOGe UO eEWOJU Nyasn Hurppsuy 6 Touch Maintenance Schedule 7 Touch Add or the one of entries 8 Enter the name date and mileage for the reminder 9 Touch Done To delete an entry touch to display the shortcut for deletion m Chapter ED Customizing preferences of the navigation Customizing the navigation settings You can configure the navigation settings and modify the behavior of this system 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 2 Touch the following key Displays the navigation menu on the Map screen 3 Touch to show the next page 4 Touch Settings The Settings screen appears e
294. p menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ka gt bd The Favorites screen appears 3 Touch the desired item Removing a shortcut 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 220 En Chapter Setting the time and date You can change the date display format and the time format 1 Touch the current time on the screen to display the Time and date setting screen The following screen appears 1 0238 Month Date d m m d Time Format 12hour 24hour 2 Touch the item you want to set Month Date e m d default Changes the date display format to month date e d m Changes the date display format to date month Time Format e 12hour default Changes the display to 12 hour format with am pm e 24hour Changes the display to 24 hour format m Storing song information to an iPod iTunes Tagging You can store song information to the iPod when this product receives song information The songs will appear in a playlist called Tagged playlist in iTunes the next time you synchronize your iPod You can directly buy the songs via this product Depending on when the song information is stored information for the previous song or the song after the current song may also be stored Be sure to confirm the song before you purchase It iPhone 4s iPhone 4 iPhone 3GS iPhone 3G iPhone iPod touch bth generation iPod touch 4th generation iPod touch 3rd generation
295. pears 2 Touch Set Alert for artist or song or touch Team1 or Team2 for game The song artist or game is memorized to an alert list When a program that matches a keyword memorized to the alert list is broadcast a beep sounds and a message is displayed 3 Touch Jump to switch to the channel You can listen to the track You can enable or disable alerts by setting the alert function Notification may not be provided depending on the status of this product Ifyou touch Stay the channel will not switch m Setting the program you want to be alerted for 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen Chapter OIPEs 9 1 2 ES GINXSNLIS 343 Huisn Chapter Usin the SiriusxM satellite radio 2 Touch the following keys in the follow Am The System screen appears 3 Touch AV Source Settings The following screen appears System MIXTRAX Settings Radio Settings SinusXM Settings r Tag Forwarding Bluetooth Audio 4 Touch SiriusXM Settings The following screen appears A System Tune Start Parental Control Alert List Team Settings Featured Favorites 5 Touch Alert List The Alert List screen appears 6 Touch the artist name song title or team you want to be alerted for when available The alert indicator is highlighted and the alert setting is enabled Ifyou touch the indicator highlighted the alert settin
296. pears Chapter Audio adjustments 33 5 Touch the following keys to select Subwoofer Selects the adjustable previous speak er Selects the adjustable next speaker gt 6 Touch LPF to turn on 7 Touch the following keys to select the phase of subwoofer output Sets the phase of subwoofer output to normal Sets the phase of subwoofer output to reverse 8 Drag the line graph horizontally to ad just the range of cut off frequency from 50 Hz to 200 Hz O The default setting is 100 Hz 9 Drag the tip of the slope to adjust the range of level between 6 dB oct and 18 dB oct O The default setting is 18 dB oct Selecting the listening position You can select a listening position that you want to make as the center of sound effects O This function is available only when main audio is available 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow D The Audio screen appears 3 Touch Listening Position The Listening Position screen appears 4 Touch the desired position e Off default Changes the listening position setting to off e Front Changes the listening position setting to front e Front L Changes the listening position setting to front left e Front R Changes the listening position setting to front right e All Changes the listening position setting t
297. peats just the current file A Repeats just the current folder Music Browse mode default Repeats all files A Repeats just the current file Folder Browse mode default Repeats all files Ee Repeats the current folder By Repeats just the current file J Switching the media file type When playing a digital media containing a mixture of various media file types you can switch between media file types to play 1 Touch the following key Displays the pop up menu for selecting a media file type to play on the disc or in the external storage device USB SD 2 Touch the item you want to set e Music Switches the media file type to music com pressed audio e Video Switches the media file type to video e CD DA Switches the media file type to CD audio data CD DA e Photo Switches the media file type to still image JPEG data Operating with the hardware buttons Press the TRK button You can skip files forward or backward Press and hold the TRK button You can pertorm fast reverse or fast for ward m sajlj O1IPNe passaidwiod bulAe d Chapter KD Playing compressed video files You can play compressed video files stored on a disc or in an external storage device USB SD using the built in drive of this product This section describes how gt For details refer to Media compatibility chart on page 245 A CAUTION For safety reasons video images ca
298. plica tion must be installed on your iPhone or smartphone to enjoy Aha Radio content on this product Because the application for the iPhone or smartphone is not provided by Pioneer the re quired version of the application may not yet be available at the time of purchase of this product En Availability version and update information can be found at http www pioneerelectronics com aharadio Using the touch panel keys h aha radio EEEN a Bo Displays the source list gt For details refer to Selecting a front source on the source list on page 25 2 Displays the Time and date setting screen gt For details refer to Setting the time and date on page 221 3 Displays the Setting menu screen 4 Recalls equalizer curves gt For details refer to Using the equalizer on page 202 Selects an Aha Radio station from the list Touching this key displays the list of the avail able Aha Radio stations Touch the desired Aha Radio station to change Aha Radio sources Station List 6 Displays the Phone menu screen gt For details refer to Displaying the phone menu on page 80 T Performs additional functions of each sta tion or content currently playing O The icons displayed vary depending on each station or content Chapter Using Aha Radio 24 Indicator Meaning Touching the key discloses the current car location through Aha Radio Touching the key retweets the selecte
299. ppRadio Mode For details about the CarMediaPlayer refer to the information on our website A CAUTION For safety reasons video images cannot be viewed while your vehicle is in motion To view video images you must stop in a safe place and apply the parking brake 122 Ep Using the touch panel keys for audio Playback screen page 1 O The Best H Rock s Brilliance Pioneer D 00 0 Playback screen page 2 Brilliance Pioneer The Best Hi Rock Using the touch panel keys for video D W 6 4 Chapter CUsinganiPod CS Using the touch panel keys for iTunes Radio D a U 0 B Displays the source list gt For details refer to Selecting a front source on the source list on page 25 2 Displays the Time and date setting screen gt For details refer to Setting the time and date on page 221 3 Displays the Setting menu screen 4 Recalls equalizer curves gt For details refer to Using the equalizer on page 202 Selects a track from the list gt For details refer to Selecting song or video sources from the playlist screen on page 126 6 Switches the control mode to App Mode gt For details refer to Using this product s iPod function from your iPod on page 128 D Displays the Phone menu screen gt For details refer to Displaying the phone menu on page 80 Switches to the next or previous pa
300. ppears 5 Touch the desired application icon The desired application is launched and the application operation screen appears O Some applications may not launch depend ing on the state of the connected device If it does not launch launch the application according to the application startup mes sage Touch to mute Touch again to unmute 2 Sets whether to switch the sound mix func tion on or off e Left tab The audio mix function is en abled mix on The App volume is dis played If you touch the App volume the volume keys will be displayed e Right tab The audio mix function is dis 6 Operate the application abled mix off 3 Adjusts the application audio volume 7 Press the HOME button to go back to Each touch of or H increases or de the Top menu screen creases the volume level O The AV operation screen and the Applica tion screen can be switched by pressing the suo es1 dde suoudj iews 10 aUOUd ANOA Huisp Using the audio mix function MODE button You can output audio mixing AV source and 3 The right tab is not displayed on the AV op an application for iPhone or smartphone eration screen when the AppRadio Mode or MirrorLink J You cannot adjust the volume of the main mode is used sound on the screen Press the VOL When the audio mix function is set to on button to adjust the volume of the main the voice guidance of the navigation sys sound o tem is not output To output the vo
301. ppears on page 202 wae Hides the touch panel keys Touching this area hides the touch panel keys OR eli O Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to TY AV Input display the touch panel keys again YY AUX Input 6 Displays the Phone menu screen gt For details refer to Displaying the phone menu on page 80 D Switches the operation screen en 173 4 Confirm that AUX Input is turned on O The default setting is On 5 Display the AV source selection screen gt For details of the operations refer to Dis playing the AV operation screen on page 24 6 Touch AUX on the AV source selection screen The image is displayed on the screen 7 Use the touch panel keys on the screen to control the external unit gt For details refer to Using the touch panel keys on page 173 Setting the video signal When you connect this product to an AUX equipment select the suitable video signal setting O You can operate this function only for the video signal input into the AUX input 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order gt t The Video Setup screen appears 3 Touch Video Signal Setting The following screen appears M Video Setup N AUX Camera 4 Touch AUX The pop up menu appears 174 En ED Using an AUX source 5 Touch the item you want to set e Auto default Adjusts the video signal
302. r 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order tS System Camera View 57 Back Camera Input 2nd Camera Input 7 Reverse Gear Setting The System screen appears Parking Assist Guide 3 Touch Camera settings 4 Touch Camera View repeatedly until The following screen appears the desired setting appears e Off default System Turns the camera view setting off Oe cariera View e On Turns the camera view setting on If no operations are performed for seven sec Back Camera Input 2nd Camera Input onds after the AV operation screen is dis Reverse Geer Setting played the camera view will appear AEE H automatically O Ifyou touch the screen while the camera 4 Touch Parking Assist Guide repeatedly a view is displayed the displayed image will until the desired setting appears o turn off temporarily e Off default fap When the camera view of both rear view cam Hides the guidelines Z era and second camera are available the key e On v to switch the display appears Displays the guidelines oo When the shift lever is aligned to the RE rhe video may appear reversed VERSE R position after setting the rear view camera the rear view image appears O If you press and hold the MAP button the rear view image disappears m Setting guidelines on the rear view image Switches the display between rear view A CAUTION image and second camera image l e When adj
303. r to Checking route information and preferences on page 48 7 Touch Start Navigation Your navigation system starts the route gul dance gt For details of the route guidance refer to Understanding the route guidance on page 34 Selecting a destination from stored routes Storing routes you use frequently saves time and effort O This function is not available if no routes have been registered in Saved Routes gt For details refer to Storing a route in Saved Routes on page 52 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 2 Touch the following key Displays the navigation menu on the Map screen 3 Touch New Route The New Route to screen appears 4 Touch to show the next page uol eul sap e 104 Bulyusieas 5 Touch Saved Routes The Saved Routes screen appears 6 Touch the entry you want The Route Planner screen appears O You can add waypoints or change the final destination on the Route Planner screen gt For details refer to Building a route using Route Planner on page 46 7 Touch Show Route After touching Show Route the Route Summary screen appears and countdown begins When the countdown ends the gui dance automatically starts If the screen is touched anywhere during the countdown the countdown stops and the screen will stay as it iS gt For details on the operations in the Route Summary screen r
304. r to Displaying the phone menu on page 80 6 Displays the current source O In MirrorLink mode App control side bar will appear O If you press the HOME button twice the App control side bar will disappear Press the HOME button twice again and the App control side bar will appear Starting procedure When connecting a MirrorLink device to this product you must select the method for con necting your device Settings are required ac cording to the connected device gt For details refer to Chapter 13 O Turn off the AVICSYNC App function for using MirrorLink mode 1 Unlock your MirrorLink device 2 Connect your MirrorLink device to this product via the separately sold USB inter face cable for use with MirrorLink devices CD MU200 gt For details of the connections refer to the Installation Manual Chapter 3 Press the HOME button to display the put Navigation Sounds instead of App Top menu screen based Audio is displayed To output 4 Touch APPS voice guidance for the navigation system if the launcher application is installed in the HOU ESUENES MirrorLink device the application launches 1 Start up the AppRadio Mode or If not the Application menu screen will ap MirrorLink mode pear 2 Press the VOL button The audio mix menu will be displayed on the screen O It the AVICSYNC App function is not turned off a message confirming whether to turn off the AVICSYNC App function a
305. r to Registering your Bluetooth de vices on page 74 O The cable connection method varies de pending on your device gt For details of the connections refer to the Installation Manual 5100NEX Connect via USB or Bluetooth gt For details of the Bluetooth connection refer to Registering your Bluetooth de vices on page 74 O The cable connection method varies de pending on your device gt For details of the connections refer to the Installation Manual 144 En 23 Streaming Pandora 3 Display the AV source selection screen gt For details of the operations refer to Dis playing the AV operation screen on page 24 4 Touch Pandora on the AV source selec tion screen When you touch Pandora this product will start establishing a Bluetooth connection After the connection is successfully estab lished the touch panel key on the Pandora screen is activated 5 Use the touch panel keys on the screen to control the Pandora application gt For details refer to Using the touch panel keys on page 142 For smartphone users O Turn off the AVICSYNC App function for using Pandora with a smartphone if the smartphone is connected with the HDMI or Bluetooth selected for Connection in Smartphone Setup 1 Unlock your smartphone 2 Connect your smartphone 8100NEX 7100NEX 6100NEX Connect via Bluetooth or HDMI and Bluetooth gt For details of the Bluetooth connection
306. r trip 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 2 Touch the following key Displays the navigation menu on the Map screen 3 Touch Useful Information The Useful Information screen appears 4 Touch Trip Monitor The Trip Monitor screen appears A list of trip logs already recorded appears A blank list appears if you have not recorded any trip logs yet 5 Touch Start New Recording The trip logger is activated The touch key changes to Stop Recording Touching Stop Recording allows you to deactivate the trip logger 58 En 1 If there is not enough space in the built in memory the oldest trip log will be overwrit ten by the new one O Ifyou want the system to always activate the trip logger whenever the GPS signal is available turn on Enable Auto Saving gt For details refer to Enable Auto Saving on page 59 Browsing the trip log 1 Record the trip log 2 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 3 Touch the following key I Displays the navigation menu on the Map screen 4 Touch Useful Information The Useful Information screen appears 5 Touch Trip Monitor The Trip Monitor screen appears O To export all trip logs touch Export All 6 Touch any of the items to see the de tails The screen showing the trip log in detail ap pears O To display the trip log on the map touch Visible on Map to tick the check box Touching al
307. rce selection screen The Bluetooth screen appears Chapter Using a Bluetooth audio player 26 7 Use the touch panel keys on the screen to control the Bluetooth audio player gt For details refer to Using the touch panel keys on page 153 Selecting files from the file name list The file name list lets you see the list of track titles for the Bluetooth audio player and lets you select one of them to play back O This function is only available when the connected Bluetooth audio player supports AVRCP 1 4 1 Touch the following key Displays the file name list The following screen appears 2 Touch a file on the list to play back O Touching a folder on the list shows its con tents You can play a file on the list by touching it Playing files in random order All of the files within the repeat play range can be played at random by only touching a single key O This function is only available when the connected Bluetooth audio player supports AVRCP 1 3 Touch the following key repeatedly until the desired setting appears Turns random play on or off Setting a repeat play range The repeat play range can be changed by only touching a single key O This function is only available when the connected Bluetooth audio player supports AVRCP 1 3 Touch the following key repeatedly until the desired setting appears Changes the repeat play range be tween the current file a
308. rd or USB storage device 3 Turn the source off gt For details refer to Turning off the AV source on page 25 4 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 5 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order ka gt EE The System screen appears 6 Touch System Information The following screen appears System Firmware Information Firmware Update 3D Calibration Status i Connection Status 7 Touch Firmware Update The Firmware Update screen appears 8 Touch Continue to display the data transfer mode 1 Follow the on screen instructions to finish updating the firmware This product will reset automatically after the firmware update is completed if the up date is successful O When the firmware update starts the source is turned off and the Bluetooth con nection is disconnected O If an error message appears on the screen touch Continue to proceed and start the recovery sequence m Checking sensor learning status and driving status O This product can automatically use its sen sor memory based on the outer dimensions of the tires 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order ka gt A The System screen appears 3 Touch System Information The following screen appears System Firmware Information Firmware Update 3D Calibration Status f Conn
309. reen appears 3 Touch the following key i Deletes the phone number Receiving a phone call You can answer an incoming call to your cellu lar phone via this product Ends the call Hburuoud 3a 1j3 spuey buisn Chapter ED Using hands free phonino Answering an incoming call This product informs you that it is receiving a call by displaying a message and producing a ring sound O You can set the system to automatically an swer incoming calls If this product is not set to automatically answer incoming calls answer the calls manually gt For details refer to Answering a call automatically on page 85 O The registered name appears if the phone number of the received call is already regis tered in Phone Book 1 Touch the following key Answers an incoming call Rejects an incoming call The rejected call is recorded in the missed call history list gt For details refer to Dialing from the history on page 82 2 Touch the following key The call ends 84 En Ends the call Minimizing the dial confirmation screen O The dial confirmation screen cannot be minimized on the AV operation screen O AV sources cannot be selected even if the dial confirm screen is minimized while talk ing on the phone 1 Touch the following key The dial confirmation screen is minimized ee 2 Touch the following key Displays the dial confirmation scree
310. review O Confirm that the whole image fills the screen 8 Touch OK O If you want to adjust the setting again from the beginning touch RESET Displaying the image of your application iPhone with 30 pin connector You can set an image of an application for iPhone which is not compatible with AppRadio Mode to be shown on the screen O Depending on the type of application you may not be able to see the image on the screen O You can only control the application on the connected device O When you touch the display in this func tion Don t Touch mark appears on the upper right corner of the screen 1 Connect your iPhone For details of the connections refer to the Installation Manual 2 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 3 Touch APPS A message which notifies you that your iPhone can launch the application appears on the screen A message which asks you whether you want to launch your application appears on your iPhone 4 Use your iPhone to refuse to launch the application 5 Touch OK on the screen of this pro duct The black screen appears 6 Launch an application on your iPhone An image of the application appears on the screen 7 Press the HOME button to return to the Top menu screen Displaying the image of your application iPhone with Lightning connector You can set an image of an application for smartphone which is not compatible with AppRadio
311. rform fast reverse For video e Press to perform fast reverse e Press to change the fast reverse speed Pr For audio Press and hold to perform fast forward For video e Press to perform fast forward e Press to change the fast forward speed lt lt Press to return to the previous track chap ter P Press to go to the next track chapter a Press to stop playback If you resume playback playback will start from the point where you stopped Touch the key again to stop playback completely FOLDER P CH e Press to select the next or previous disc or folder Chapter Basic operation 02 e Press to recall radio station frequencies assigned to preset channel keys MUTE D Press to mute Press again to unmute MENU 2 Press to display the DVD menu during DVD D playback v TOP MENU A warnine O Press to return to the top menu during DVD Keep the battery out of the reach of children 7 playback Should the battery be swallowed consult a doctor immediately ad AUDIO e Batteries battery pack or batteries installed must not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine fire or the like Press to change the audio language during DVD playback SUBTITLE Press to change the subtitle language dur A ing DVD playback CAUTION ANGLE Remove the battery if the remote control is not Press to change the viewing angle during used for a month or longer DVD playback e There is a danger of explosion if the battery is
312. rning off the ignition switch ACC OFF is displayed A message about the map database After you start using this product a message related to map data may be displayed O This message is displayed the first time you turn on this product each month m Turning off the display You can turn off the display at night or when the screen is too bright When the Application screen is available Press and hold the MODE button The display turns off Ifyou touch the screen when the display is off it reverts to the original screen When the Application screen is not available Press the MODE button The display turns off C If you touch the screen when the display is off it reverts to the original screen J 20 En Chapter Basic operation 02 uol e1ado diseg Chapter KD Basic operation How to use the screens Switching screens using the touch panel keys IRE EJ r rilliance Pioneer 22 En Basic operation Switching screens using the hardware buttons 4 Top menu screen This is the starting menu to access the de sired screens and operate the various func tions O If you press the HOME button the Top menu screen is displayed O APPS is displayed when AppRadio Mode or MirrorLink mode is on O Android Auto is displayed when Android Auto is on for AVIC 8100NEX and AVIC 7100NEX 2 Time and date setting screen You can set the tim
313. rrectly The standard transfer rate is 4 Mbps for CDs and 10 08 Mbps for DVDs En 247 Appendix Appendix Video files compatibility USB SD mp4 MPEG 4 H 264 File extension avi mov f4v H 263 mkv Compatible video MPEG 4 H 264 MPEG 4 H 264 MPEG 4 H 264 H264 H 263 codec H 263 Xvid VC 1 Xvid H 263 ae Compatible audio MP8 AAC MP3 AAC Vor MP3 AAC MP3 AAC codec LPCM bis Maximum frame rate Maximum playback Tomna time vob MP3 AAC 30 fps File extension 3gp W H 264 MPEG 2 mv asf flv Compatible video MPEG 4 H 264 WMV VC 1 WMV VC 1 H 264 codec H 263 codec Maximum frame rate Maximum playback en ea wites time MP3 AAC LPCM 30 fps Common notes Files may not be played back properly de pending on the environment in which the file was created or on the contents of the file This product may not play back files de pending on the application used to encode the files This product may not operate correctly de pending on the application used to encode WMA files Depending on the version of Windows Media Player used to encode WMA files album names and other text information may not be correctly displayed There may be a slight delay when starting playback of audio files encoded with image data This product is not compatible with packet write data transfer En This product can recognize up to 32 char acters beginning
314. rsor to the initial position and the map scale to the Initial scale 4 Shows the route setting preferences for route calculation Touch the keys to activate or deac tivate the preference ae Calculates the route prioritizing gt aL the use of freeways when the key is activated Calculates the route prioritizing the use of per use charged toll roads when the key is activated a SG Calculates the route prioritizing the use of ferries when the key is activated Calculates the route prioritizing the use of carpool and HOV lanes when the key is activated 5 Returns to the previous screen 6 Sets the cursor position to your destination or waypoint Displays the shortcuts e Detailed Information Shows the detailed information of the point e Save Location Saves the displayed location as your fa vorite location The saved location can be easily recalled later e Places Around Cursor Searches for POIs around the displayed location Touch the POI to show the Map Location screen and also set the POI as the destination or waypoint m uol euljsap e 104 Bulusjeas Chapter KD Checking and modifying the current route Modifying the route When navigation is already started there are several ways to modify the current route The following sections describe some of those op tions Building a route using Route Planner The Route Planner or My Route fe
315. s are those of their respective owners m SiriusxM satellite radio e Sirius XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc All rights reserved HD Radio Technology e HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation U S and Foreign Patents HD Radio and the HD HD Radio and Arc logos are pro prietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp m xipusddy SDHC SDHC Logo is a trademark of SD 3C LLC WMA WMV Windows Media is either a registered trade mark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries O This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft Licensing Inc DivX DIVX Appendix MD Appendx SOC S SSSCC lt CSC S DivX Certified devices have been tested for high quality DivX divx avi video playback When you see the DivX logo you know you have the freedom to play your favorite DivX movies DivX DivX Certified and associated logos are trademarks of DivX LLC and are used under license This DivX Certified device has passed rigor ous testing to ensure it plays DivX videos To play purchased DivX movies first register your device at vod divx com Find your registra tion code in the DivX VOD section of your de vice setup menu gt For details refer to Displa
316. s connection on page 77 O Once the connection is established the de vice name is displayed Touch the device name to disconnect After the device is successfully registered a Bluetooth connection is established from the system The profile icons displayed on the registered device list screen light up as follows Lights up when your mobile device is successfully connected with the HFP Hands Free Profile Lights up when your audio device is successfully connected with the A2DP Advanced Audio Distribu tion Profile AVRCP Audio Video Remote Control Profile Lights up when the Bluetooth con nection is established with the SPP Serial Port Profile After pairing the phone book registered in the device may be automatically trans mitted to this product m f you touch the following key you can switch the display between the device names and Bluetooth device addresses Pairing from your Bluetooth devices You can register a Bluetooth device by setting this product to standby mode and requesting a connection from the Bluetooth device O Before registration make sure that Visibi lity in the Bluetooth menu is set to On Switches between the device names and Bluetooth device ad dresses JIA P Y OO SaN g Le Burpp uuo pue Hu yzs H yY gt For details refer to Switching visibility on page 77 1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech nology on your devices O For
317. s currently tuned in to e i Track title Shows the title of the current track EJ Artist name Shows the artist name for the track cur rently playing e J Album title Shows the title of the album of the cur rent track O The information is not displayed if there is NO corresponding information 2 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed time remaining time and time bar of the current track J eesOpued Hurwiess S Starting procedure When connecting an iPhone or smartphone to this product you must select the method for connecting your device Settings are required according to the connected device gt For details refer to Chapter 13 For iPhone with a 30 pin connector users 1 Unlock your iPhone 2 Connect your iPhone O Connect via USB or Bluetooth gt For details of the Bluetooth connection refer to Registering your Bluetooth de vices on page 74 3 Display the AV source selection screen gt For details of the operations refer to Dis playing the AV operation screen on page 24 4 Touch Pandora on the AV source selec tion screen 5 Use the touch panel keys on the screen to control the Pandora application gt For details refer to Using the touch panel keys on page 142 For iPhone with a Lightning connector users 1 Unlock your iPhone 2 Connect your iPhone 8100NEX 7100NEX 6100NEX O Connect via USB Bluetooth or HDMI and Bluetooth gt For details of the Bluetooth connection refe
318. s follows e Mirror The video on the front screen of this pro duct is output to the rear display Not all videos or sounds can be output to the rear display e DVD CD The video and sound of DVDs are output to the rear display Compatible file types are DVD V Video CD DivX MPEG 1 MPEG 2 and MPEG 4 only e USB iPod The video and sound of the USB storage de vice or iPod are output to the rear display The port that supports the rear display will only be USB port1 Compatible file types are MPEG 4 H 264 WMV MKV and FLV only e SD The video and sound of the SD memory cards are output to the rear display Compatible file types are MPEG 4 H 264 WMV MKV and FLV only 224 En BET Other functions e AV The video and sound of the AV input are output to the rear display The video image and sound are output only when AV has both video and sound The video image and sound are output only when AV Input is set to Source gt For details refer to Setting AV input on page 180 e OFF Nothing is output to the rear display m Touch the following key Closes the Rear screen You can also select Rear on the source list gt For details refer to Selecting a front source on the source list on page 25 O For AVIC 8100NEX and AVIC 7100NEX users Video files on the external storage device USB SD are not available as a source for the rear display
319. sFlash List The SportsFlash List screen appears 6 Touch Edit List Available leagues and teams are displayed O Touch a league to narrow down the options as necessary 7 Touch the teams to register to the SportsFlash List O A check mark appears for the selected item e Touch Clear All to cancel all the selec tions 8 Touch Prioritize to register the se lected teams as the prioritized teams O You can select up to five prioritized teams for SportsFlash 1 Prioritize is not available if not more than five teams are registered in the SportsFlash list The teams are automatically registered as the prioritized teams O If tive teams are already registered as the prioritized teams remove a check mark from one of the teams in the list on the Prioritize List screen before adding an other team m Restoring the SiriusXM settings to the default You can restore the SiriusXM settings to the default O This setting is available only when you stop your vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake A CAUTION Do not turn off the engine while restoring the set tings 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 170 En 2 Touch the following keys in the follow A M The System screen appears 3 Touch AV Source Settings The following screen appears A System VY MIXTRAX Settings Radio Settings SinusXM Settings f Tag Forwarding Bluetooth Audio
320. screen Adds a waypoint Displays route alter natives parts of the route to avoid or spe cific roads in your planned route to avoid Displays the route in its full length on the map and displays route parameters and route alternatives Deletes your route or removes a waypoint Suspends and re sumes the route gui dance GOA G 6 amp 30 En Chapter How to use the map Ce Most of the information provided by your naviga tion system can be seen on the map You need to become familiar with how information appears on the map How to read the Map screen OQO Trinity Pine St O0S O The following information marked with an asterisk appears only when a route is set O Depending on the conditions and settings some items may not be displayed O AV information is displayed at the bottom of the Map screen O You can select whether you want to see the speed limit sign on the map all the time If you exceed the speed limit the sign color will change gt For details refer to Warnings settings on page 66 1 Shows the number and name of the street to be used or next guidance point 2 Shows the next guidance point maneuver Both the type of the event turn traffic circle exiting freeway etc and its distance from the current position are displayed A smaller icon shows the type of the second next maneuver if it is near the next maneuver gt For detai
321. screen Furthermore you can change the background display to other images imported from an external storage de vice USB SD 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order gt Ci The Theme screen appears 3 Touch Background The following screen appears illumination Theme O You can also change the screen for settings by touching Illumination Theme or Clock on this screen Background 4 Touch Home or AV to switch the screen displays O The setting contents can be memorized se parately for the AV operation screen and the Top menu screen 5 Touch the item you want to set e Preset displays Selects the desired preset background dis play Gree CUSTOM Displays the background display image im ported from the external storage device USB SD gt For details refer to Changing to the back ground display image stored on the exter nal storage device USB SD on page 207 off Hides the background display Changing to the background display image stored on the external storage device USB SD You can change the background display image to an image imported from the external storage device USB SD O Background display image must be used within the following formats JPEG image Tiles jpg or jpeg Allowable data size is 10 MB or smaller Allowable image size is 4000 pixels x 4000 pi
322. search for the song video or radio stations you want to play from the playlist screen 1 Touch the following key Displays the list of the category The ROOT screen appears 2 Touch the following keys to switch the music or video category list if Switches to the music category list Switches to the video category list O The video category list icon is not available when using iPod function with an iPhone 6 Plus iPhone 6 iPhone 5s iPhone 5c iPhone 5 or iPod touch 5th generation 3 Touch the category you want to search for ROOT J5 Playlists s Artists Albums A Songs Podcasts Category lists for music e Radio iTunes Radio e Playlists e Artists e Albums e Songs 126 En e Podcasts e Genres e Composers e Audiobooks Category lists for video e Video Playlists e Movies e Music Videos e TV Shows e Video Podcasts O Category items that do not correspond to the connected iPod are not displayed O Radio is displayed only if iTunes Radio is available on the iPod 4 Drag the Initial Search Bar to find a file by the initial character of the file name The alphabet corresponding to the current po sition on the Initial Search Bar is displayed and the list scrolls as the bar is slid O The Initial Search Bar is not displayed in the top category list or the song list Playlists 1g My Songs j g New Songs 4g Old Songs a Top 10 JS Top 100
323. selections are canceled lf you touch Select All all the items are selected m Specifying the playback portion You can specify the playback portion Touch the following key repeatedly until the desired setting appears Changes the playback portion default Plays back a middle portion E Plays back a long portion Plays back a short portion O The most suitable sound effect is automati cally applied when switching to the next song m Setting the flash pattern The flashing color changes with the changes in the sound and bass levels 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 178 En 2 Touch the following keys in the follow A M The System screen appears 3 Touch AV Source Settings The following screen appears A System 7 MIXTRAX Settings Radio Settings SinusXM Settings r Tag Forwarding Bluetooth Audio 4 Touch MIXTRAX Settings 5 Touch Flash Pattern The pop up menu appears 6 Touch the item you want to set e Sound1 default to Sound6 The flash pattern changes according to the sound level Select a desired mode e L Pass1 to L Pass6 The flash pattern changes according to the bass level Select a desired mode e Random1 The flash pattern changes randomly ac cording to the sound level mode and low pass mode e Random2 The flash pattern changes randomly ac cording to the sound level mode e Random3 The flash pa
324. setting automati cally e PAL Sets the video signal to PAL e NTSC Sets the video signal to NTSC e PAL M Sets the video signal to PAL M e PAL N Sets the video signal to PAL N e SECAM Sets the video signal to SECAM m Switching the operation screen You can switch between the screen to operate music files and that to operate video files Touch the following key Switches between the screen to operate video files and that to oper ate music files Chapter Using AV input 30 You can display the video image output by the device connected to this product gt For details of the connection method refer to the Installation Manual A CAUTION For safety reasons video images cannot be viewed while your vehicle is in motion To view video images you must stop in a safe place and apply the parking brake Using the touch panel keys a Displays the source list gt For details refer to Selecting a front source on the source list on page 25 2 Displays the Time and date setting screen gt For details refer to Setting the time and date on page 221 3 Displays the Setting menu screen 4 Recalls equalizer curves gt For details refer to Using the equalizer on page 202 Hides the touch panel keys Touching this area hides the touch panel keys O Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display the touch panel keys again 6 Displays the Phone menu screen
325. shortcuts 10 Touch Done Deleting stored routes 6 Touch Save Route 1 Press the MAP button The Save Route screen appears The Map screen appears 7 Enter the name if needed and then 2 Touch the following key touch the following key Displays the navigation menu on Saves the route as a new route the Map screen under Saved Routes 3 Touch New Route The New Route to screen appears a D Q T ob D f Q r 9 Editing the stored route 4 Touch to show the next page 3 Stored routes can be edited later 5 Touch Saved Routes D The Saved Routes screen appears 5 Renaming stored routes 6 Touch the following key oO 1 Press the MAP button Q The Map screen appears SILLLL Displays the shortcuts A 2 Touch the following key S 9 Displays the navigation menu on 7 Touch Edit 4 CNE AAR SOTERN 8 Touch the item you want to deleteand 3 M e touch Delete T 3 Touch New Route O Ifyou touch and then touch Delete D The New Route to screen appears All all entries can be deleted a 4 Touch f to show the next page 9 Touch Delete 5 Touch Saved Routes 10 Touch Done The Saved Routes screen appears 6 Touch the following key Saving a location as an alert point ea a You can save any map location such as a school zone or railroad crossing as an alert point 7 Touch Edit To use this function activate the
326. st You can select files to view using the Tile name list of the files stored on a disc or in the exter nal storage device USB SD 1 Touch the following key Displays the list of the files or folders stored on a disc or in the external storage device USB SD En s j O PIA passaidwod HulKeld Chapter KD Playing compressed video files 2 Touch a file on the list to play back O Files are played back in file number order and folders are skipped if they contain no files If folder 01 root folder contains no files playback commences with folder 02 O Touching a folder on the list shows its con tents You can play a file on the list by touching it Touch the playback sign of the thumbnail to preview the file m Setting a repeat play range The repeat play range can be changed by only touching a single key Touch the following key repeatedly until the desired setting appears 7 a Changes the repeat play range or GA default Repeats all files Repeats just the current folder e o gt Repeats just the current file J Frame by frame playback This lets you move ahead one frame at a time during pause O This function is available while a com pressed video file stored on a disc is being played Touch I gt during pause The video advances one frame each time I gt is touched To return to normal playback touch gt H With some discs images may be uncle
327. starts the route gul dance gt For details of the route guidance refer to Understanding the route guidance on page 34 Smart History Smart History suggests these previously used locations as destinations based on your navi gation habits using parameters like the cur rent time of day the day of week and the current location Chapter Searching for a destination 05 Smart History items are shown inthe New 6 Enter the name address or category of Route to screen for easy access the destination you are looking for then touch the following key Peg Displays the Search Results screen 7 Touch the entry you want The searched location appears on the Map screen g 8 Touch the right of the list to narrow down the search results Searching for a location using Combined Search The Combined Search feature lets you quickly find a place by its name and search area O The Combined Search function also searches your stored data os Califomia Kitchen Cici s Pi Domino s uol eul sap e 104 Bulusieas 1 Press the MAP button Shows the conditions that are currently se The Map screen appears lected 2 Touch this key to show the other conditions 2 Touch the following key alin f you touch a map data provider logo you can a narrow down the list of results by showing the re Displays the navigation menu on the Map screen sults from the provider 9 Tou
328. street on which the next gui dance point is located the name of the street that the vehicle is currently traveling on the estimated time of arrival and warn ing icons etc are displayed This is not displayed for some sources This is not displayed when Navigation info window is set to Off Chapter Basic operation 02 gt For details refer to Navigation info win dow on page 179 Selecting a front source on the AV source selection screen 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following key AV Displays the AV source selection screen 3 Touch the source icon you want to se lect The AV operation screen of the selected source appears Selecting a front source on the source list This function is not available during a call via this product 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the AV operation key ml 0 31 AV operation key The AV operation screen appears 3 Touch the following key Displays the source list 4 Touch the source key you want to se lect The AV operation screen of the selected source appears Camera View is available only when Back Camera Input or 2nd Camera Input is set to On Selecting a rear source You can select a source output to the rear dis play gt For details of the operations refer to Se ect ing the video for the rear display on page 9
329. subscription sta tus Channel Not Subscribed Call The channel that you have re Check the content of your SiriusXM subscrip SiriusXM to Subscribe quested is not included in your tion package SiriusXM subscription package Channel Locked Please Enter Locked by the radio Parental Control Release the channel lock the Lock Code feature Artist Unavailable The alert memo function is not avail Perform the operation with another channel able Song Unavailable The alert memo function is not avail Perform the operation with another channel able Team Unavailable The alert memo function is not avail Perform the operation with another channel able Alert Memory Full You can The memory is Tull Clear the alert list Page 170 manage alert memory in the alert list Memory Full The memory has become full while Resume playback playback was paused Memory Nearly Full The memory has become nearly full Resume playback while playback was paused Appendix MD Appendx SC C CSCS 7 7 3 gt ETCS lt S S S Disc Cause The disc is dirty The disc is scratched Message Error O2 XX FF FF The disc is loaded upside down There is an electrical or mechanical error Different Region Disc The disc does not have the same re Action Reference Clean the disc Replace the disc Check that the disc is loaded correctly Press the RESET button Page 12 gion number as this product Unplayable Disc This type of
330. system formance with some USB storage devices After a short pause the splash screen comes O Connection via a USB hub is not possible on for a few seconds O A USB cable is required for connection The Select Program Language screen ap pears Plugging in a USB storage device 2 Touch the language that you want to Plug a USB storage device into the USB use on screen cable 3 Touch the following key gt Displays the Smartphone Setup screen 4 Touch the item you want to set For details refer to nformation on the con nections and functions for each device on page 90 5 Touch the following key USB cable 2 USB storage device Displays the Top menu screen Unplugging a USB storage device f you touch gy the display returns to the pre Pull out the USB storage device after vious screen m checking that no data is being accessed Chapter KD Basic operation Regular startup Start the engine to boot up the system After a short pause the splash screen comes on for a few seconds The screen shown will differ depending on the previous conditions O Enter the password for the anti theft func tion if the password entry screen appears I The terms appear if the screen displayed last was the navigation screen Read the terms carefully checking the de tails and then touch OK if you agree to the conditions After you touch OK the screen that was displayed just before tu
331. t x Shuffle Touch J to switch to the station list Touch H to switch to the genre list Touching plays only one track based on particular musical characteristics one at a time from several shuffled stations T Stations indicated by f are shared sta tions When you touch A Z or Date the list items can be sorted A Z Sorts the items in the list alohabeti cally Ly oy Date Sorts the items in the list in the order of the dates the items were created Ifyou touch fE the station will be deleted A message prompting you to delete the sta tion appears Touch Yes The station will be deleted To cancel touch No Creating a station You can create up to 100 stations by a song or an artist T You can also create a station by selecting a station in the genre list Stations cannot be created in the following Cases There is no response for 15 seconds The number of created stations reaches 100 1 Touch the following key 2 Touch the desired item e Track Create a station by the song currently being played e Artist Create a station by the artist of the song currently being played To cancel creating a new station touch Cancel Operating with the hardware buttons Press the gt gt TRK button You can skip songs forward m c Displays the pop up menu eesOpued Hurwiess S Chapter ED Using Aha Radio A WARNING Certain uses of an iPho
332. t For details refer to Switching the media file type on page 120 Switches between playback and pause 5 Changes the wide screen mode gt For details refer to Changing the wide screen mode on page 223 Reading the screen Example USB Current time and date 2 Current file information e Fj File name Shows the name of the file currently playing e Ej Folder name Shows the name of the folder contain ing the file currently playing J Starting procedure 1 Display the AV source selection screen gt For details of the operations refer to Dis playing the AV operation screen on page 24 2 Insert the SD memory card into the SD card slot or plug the USB storage device into the USB connector gt For details refer to Plugging in a USB sto rage device on page 19 gt For details refer to nserting and ejecting an SD memory card on page 18 En sajlj ewl jj1 s passasadwod bulAe d Chapter ED Playing compressed still image files 3 Touch USB or SD on the AV source selection screen The image is displayed on the screen 4 Use the touch panel keys on the screen to control the external storage device USB SD gt For details refer to Using the touch panel keys on page 119 O Playback is performed in order of folder numbers Folders are skipped if they con tain no playable files If there are no play able files in folder 01 root folder playback starts from folder 02 S
333. t disruption of the video in the form of disturbances such as spots or colored stripes Maintaining the LCD screen e When removing dust trom or cleaning the LCD screen first turn this product off and then wipe the screen with a soft dry cloth e When wiping the LCD screen take care not to scratch the surface Do not use harsh or abrasive chemical cleaners xipusddy Appendix MD Appendx SSS C CS SSC C CSSC S LED light emitting diode backlight A light emitting diode is used inside the dis play to illuminate the LCD screen e At low temperatures using the LED back light may increase image lag and degrade the image quality because of the character istics of the LCD screen Image quality will improve with an increase in temperature e The product lifetime of the LED backlight is more than 10000 hours However it may decrease if used in high temperatures e Ifthe LED backlight reaches the end of its product lifetime the screen will become dimmer and the image will no longer be visible In that case please consult your dealer or the nearest authorized Pioneer Service Station 254 En Appendix Appendix OS Display information Phone menu System menu Phone Book System Andy 57 Navigation Related Settings Bob LY AV Source Settings Bob LY Ever Scroll xipusddy Edward Sy Input Output Settings John i T Camera settings Preset Dial 83 Navigation Related Settings P
334. t ratio 215 Setting parental lock 215 Setting the code number and level 215 Displaying your DivX VOD registration code 216 Displaying your DivX VOD deregistration code 217 Automatic playback of DVDs 217 Setting the video signal for the rear view camera 218 Language code chart for DVDs 219 amp Favorite menu Creating ashortcut 220 Selecting ashortcut 220 Removing ashortcut 220 37 Common operations Setting the time and date 221 Storing song information to an iPod iTunes Tagging 221 Setting the Sound Retriever function 222 Changing the wide screen mode 223 Other functions Selecting the video for the rear display 224 Setting the anti theft function 224 Setting the password 224 Entering the password 225 En 9 Deleting the password 225 Forgotten password 226 Restoring this product to the default settings 226 Restoring the default settings 226 Appendix Troubleshooting 227 Error messages 229 Positioning technology 236 Positioning byGPS 236 Positioning by dead reckoning 236 How do GPS and dead reckoning work together 236 Handling large errors 237 When positioning by GPS is impossible 237 Conditions likely to cause noticeable positioning errors 238 Route setting information 240 Route search specifications 240 Handling and care of discs 240 Built in drive and care 241 Ambient conditions for playing a disc 241 Playable discs 241 DVD Video and C
335. tails refer to Selecting a front source on the source list on page 25 2 Displays the MIXTRAX screen gt For details refer to Chapter 31 3 Displays the Time and date setting screen gt For details refer to Setting the time and date on page 221 4 Displays the Setting menu screen 5 Recalls equalizer curves gt For details refer to Using the equalizer on page 202 Selects a file from the list gt For details refer to Selecting files from the file name list on page 114 Displays a list related to the song cur rently playing link search gt For details refer to Selecting a file from the list related to the song currently play ing link search on page 114 T Switches the text display between tag in formation and file folder information gt For details refer to Reading the screen on page 112 gt For details refer to Switching the browse mode on page 113 Displays the Phone menu screen gt For details refer to Displaying the phone menu on page 80 Switches to the next or previous page of touch panel keys Skips files forward or backward di Changes the playback point by dragging the key gt For details refer to Operating the time bar on page 27 2 Switches the media file type gt For details refer to Switching the media file type on page 115 3 Switches between playback and pause Displays the album list This function is available only when playing Tiles in an external
336. tart function m Chapter OPE 33111872S GINXSNLIS 34 Huisn En 161 Chapter Usin the SiriusxM satellite radio Using TuneScan When you activate the TuneScan feature you will hear a few seconds of the songs which have not been listened to from each of the music channels stored as presets on the cur rent band This function is available only when the channel that is tuned in to supports the Tu neScan function O If fewer than two music channels are stored as presets in the current band the message No Content is displayed and you cannot perform scan tuning Add more music channels as presets O0 TuneScan may take a few minutes to be come available after the unit is turned on or the preset band is changed 1 Touch the preset channel list display key The preset channel list appears 2 Touch the following key Scans music channels in the cur rent band for songs plays a found song for a few seconds and then continues to scan another song Each song on the current channel plays for a few seconds at a time Caliente Juanes Loco De Amor Continues playing the current scanning song or channel O You can stop the TuneScan feature to listen to the current song and remain lis tening to the channel itis on 2 Skips forward or backward 162 En Touching ka skips to the previous song during TuneScan or to the previous channel during category scan Touc
337. tatus GPS Antenna Back Signal Indicates the connection status of the GPS When the shift lever is shifted to R the antenna the reception sensitivity and from signal switches to High or Low One of how many satellites the signal is received these is displayed depending on the vehi cle Signal com Used in posi D iDataLink munication tioning When the optional iDatalink adapter is con Orange Yes Yes nected and the protocol version matches OK is displayed If the version does not match Unsupported Version is dis played If the optional iDatalink adapter is not connected NOK is displayed J Yellow Yes No O When the GPS antenna is connected to this product OK is displayed When the GPS antenna is not connected to this product NOK is displayed O If reception is poor please change the installation position of the GPS antenna 2 Positioning Status Displays the positioning status 3D posi tioning 2D positioning or no positioning the number of satellites used for position ing orange and the number of satellites whose signal has been received yellow If signals from more than three satellites are received the current location can be mea sured gt For details refer to Positioning technol ogy on page 236 3 Installation Indicates whether the installation position of this product is correct or not If installed correctly OK appears Whe
338. tem screen appears 3 Touch Dimmer Settings The following screen appears 188 En 4 System Dimmer Trigger Day Night 4 Touch Day Night The pop up menu appears 5 Touch the item you want to set e Day default Deactivates the dimmer function e Night Activates the dimmer function J Setting the duration of time for the dimmer function to be active You can set the duration of time for the dim mer function to be active O This function is available only when Dim mer Trigger is set to Time gt For details refer to Setting the dimmer function on page 187 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow Am The System screen appears 3 Touch Dimmer Settings The following screen appears Chapter System Dimmer Trigger Dimmer Duration 4 Touch Dimmer Duration The duration setting bar appears 5 Touch the desired points on the dura tion setting bar or slide the cursors to spe cify the start time and the end time respectively The time display format depends on the Time Format setting O The value displayed at the center of the duration setting bar 12 for 12 hour format and 00 for 24 hour format indicates mid night The values to the left of the value at the center are for the afternoon and the va lues to the right of value at the center are for the morning The
339. tent services using this product by the App providers En 251 Appendix MD Appendx SOC S SSSCC lt CSC S e Availability of AppRadio Mode and Android Auto functionalities is determined by the App provider and not determined by Pioneer e AppRadio Mode and Android Auto allow access to applications other than those listed subject to limitations while driving but the extent to which content can be used is deter mined by the App providers Pandora Pandora the Pandora logo and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered trade marks of Pandora Media Inc Used with per MISSION Pandora is currently available in the United States Australia and New Zealand Aha Radio Aha Aha Radio and the Aha and Aha Radio logos are either the trademarks or the regis tered trademarks of Harman International In dustries Incorporated HDMI Hami HIGH DEFINITION MULTIMEDIA INTERFACE The terms HDMI and HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries 252 En MHL MHL the MHL Logo and Mobile High Defini tion Link are trademarks or registered trade marks of MHL LLC in the United States and other countries IVONA Text to Speech Text to Speech Svona An Amazon Company Notice regarding video viewing Remember that use of this system for com merci
340. the playback list screen gt For details of the operations refer to Se lecting songs not to be played on page 177 Sets to the original BPM Beats Per Minute Specifies the playback portion gt For details of the operations refer to Specifying the playback portion on page 178 Touch to select a track Touch and hold to fast forward or rewind Chapter 9 Turns on or off the MIXTRAX original visual display Pauses and starts playback di Displays the item selected on the LinkGate screen or item selection screen m Selecting an item to play songs You can specify an item to play songs related to It 1 Touch the following key Displays the item selection screen 2 Touch the following keys to select the item XVYLXIIN Buisn Displays the MIX pattern list Displays the tag list Q Displays the file list 3 Select an item in the list Songs related to the selected item are played Selecting songs not to be played You can select items or songs not to be played 1 Touch the following key Displays the playback list screen en 177 Chapter BET Using MIXTRAX 2 Touch the following key Displays the Playback not al lowed screen 3 Touch Songs Artists or Albums 4 Touch the box on the left of the item or song that you do not want to play An icon is displayed Items displayed with the icon will not be played lf you touch Unselect All all the
341. thod 3 Press the RESET button gt For details of the operations refer to Reset ting the microprocessor on page 12 O Some of the settings and recorded con tents will not be reset Restoring the default settings Resets various settings registered to this pro duct to the default settings O This setting is available only when you stop your vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake A CAUTION Do not turn off the engine while restoring the set tings 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 226 En 2 Touch the following keys in the follow A M The System screen appears 3 Touch Restore Settings The following screen appears System All Settings Audio Settings Theme Settings 7 Bluetooth Settings 4 Touch the item you want to initialize e All Settings e Audio Settings O This setting is available when the source is turned off e Theme Settings e Bluetooth Settings A message confirming whether to initialize the settings appears O If you want to return settings or recorded content to the default touch All Settings O Some of the settings configured on the Theme setting will not be reset O The settings for My Vehicle are not reset 5 Touch Restore When the selected item is successfully initia lized a completion message appears The source is turned off and the Bluetooth connection is disconnected before the pro cess starts J
342. tically set to the same level as the USB port to which the device is connected The source level ad justment volume that is automatically set varies depending on whether the device is connected to USB port 1 or USB port 2 O When an iPod iPhone with a Lightning connector is connected to USB port 1 or USB port 2 using a USB interface cable for iPod iPhone CD U52 sold separately the source level adjustment volume is auto matically set to the same level as the USB port to which the iPod iPhone with a Light ning connector is connected The source level adjustment volume that is automati cally set varies depending on whether the iPod iPhone with a Lightning connector is connected to USB port 1 or USB port 2 O When an Android Auto compatible device for AVIC 8100NEX and AVIC 7100NEX ora MirrorLink device is connected to USB port 2 the source level adjustment volume is automatically set to the same level as USB port 2 m sjuaujsnipe oipny En 197 Chapter E9 Audio adjustments Adjusting the filter The following adjustments can be made dur ing filter adjustments Make the appropriate adjustments for the reproduced frequency band and characteristics of the connected speaker unit t Level dB l 0 20 100 1k 10k Frequency Hz Reproduced frequency band 2 Slope adjustment 3 Cut off frequency of the LPF 4 Cut off frequency of the HPF Adjusting the front and rear spea
343. tilize the information for your reference 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 40 En KD Searching for a destination 2 Touch the following key I Displays the navigation menu on the Map screen 3 Touch Useful Information The Useful Information screen appears 4 Touch Help Nearby The Help Nearby screen appears The preset search categories are as follows e Car Repair e Health e Police e Gas Station 5 Touch the category you want The results appear in a list 6 Touch the POI you want The searched location appears on the Map screen If you touch fj you can change the sort method of the results 7 Touch Select as Destination on the Map Location screen gt For details on the operations in the Map Location screen refer to Using the Map Location screen on page 45 After touching Select as Destination the Route Summary screen appears and count down begins When the countdown ends the guidance automatically starts If the screen is touched anywhere during the countdown the countdown stops and the screen will stay as it iS Chapter Searching for a destination 05 gt For details on the operations in the Route Summary screen refer to Checking route information and preferences on page 48 8 Touch Start Navigation Your navigation system starts the route gul dance gt For details of the route guidance refer to
344. ting in possible da mage to the LCD screen When not using this product avoid exposing it to direct sunlight as much as possible e The LCD screen should be used within the temperature ranges shown in Specifica tions Appendix Appendix OS e Do not use the LCD screen at temperatures higher or lower than the operating tem perature range because the LCD screen may not operate normally and could be da maged e The LCD screen is exposed in order to in crease its visibility within the vehicle Please do not press strongly on it as this may damage it e Do not push the LCD screen with excessive force as this may scratch it e Never touch the LCD screen with anything besides your finger when operating the touch panel functions The LCD screen can scratch easily Liquid crystal display LCD screen e fthe LCD screen is near the vent of an air conditioner make sure that air from the air conditioner is not blowing on it Heat trom the heater may break the LCD screen and cool air from the cooler may cause moist ure to form inside this product resulting in possible damage e Small black dots or white dots bright dots may appear on the LCD screen These are due to the characteristics of the LCD screen and do not indicate a malfunction e The LCD screen will be difficult to see if it is exposed to direct sunlight e When using acellular phone keep the an tenna of the cellular phone away from the LCD screen to preven
345. tion as a destina tion or waypoint 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 2 Touch and drag the screen to scroll the map to the position you want 3 Touch the location that you want to se lect as your destination The cursor appears Chapter Searching for a destination 05 4 Touch Select as Destination After touching Select as Destination the Route Summary screen appears and count down begins When the countdown ends the guidance automatically starts If the screen is touched anywhere during the countdown the countdown stops and the screen will stay as it is gt For details on the operations in the Route Summary screen refer to Checking route information and preferences on page 48 5 Touch Start Navigation Your navigation system starts the route gul dance gt For details of the route guidance refer to Understanding the route guidance on page 34 Using the Map Location screen Once a location is searched the Map Loca tion screen appears You can select some op tions for the route or displayed map location before route calculation 0 0 O Ifyou touch the map the cursor is placed at that position Also you can scroll the map by dragging the map Zoom in zoom out O You can also pinch or expand the map to zoom in or out 2 Cancels the Map Location screen and dis plays the map of the current position 3 Returns the cu
346. tly O This function may not work properly with some DVD disc content In that case use touch panel keys to operate the DVD menu 1 Touch the screen to display the touch panel keys 2 Touch the following key dsip e bulKeld MENU Displays the touch panel keys to oper ate the DVD menu MENU 3 Touch the desired menu item En Switching the subtitle language You can switch the subtitle language while a disc is playing when the disc has multilingual data multi subtitle Touch the following key repeatedly until the desired setting appears Changes the subtitle language You can specify the desired lan Test guage as the default subtitle lan guage gt For details refer to Setting the top priority languages on page 213 Switching the audio language You can switch the audio language while a disc is playing when the disc has multilingual data multi audio Touch the following key repeatedly until the desired setting appears Changes the audio language You can specify the desired lan 2D guage as the default audio lan ae guage gt For details refer to Setting the top priority languages on page 213 Frame by frame playback This lets you move ahead one frame at atime during pause Touch I gt during pause The video advances one frame each time I gt is touched To return to normal playback touch gt A T With some discs images may be unclear
347. to SXM1 J En 167 Chapter Usin Setting the update notification for Featured Favorites You can set whether to be notified when the featured seasonal theme is updated O This function is available only when SiriusXM is selected as the source and Featured Favorites is set to On gt For details refer to Setting the Featured Favorites function on page 167 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ka gt EE The System screen appears 3 Touch AV Source Settings The following screen appears Tt System MIXTRAX Settings Radio Settings SinusXM Settings Tag Forwarding Bluetooth Audio 4 Touch SiriusXM Settings The following screen appears A System Tune Start Parental Control Alert List r Team Settings Featured Favorites 168 En the SiriusxM satellite radio 5 Touch Featured Band Update Mes sages repeatedly until the desired setting appears e On default Activates the update notification function e Off Deactivates the update notification function m Using the SportsFlash function The SportsFlash function notifies you with a pop up message if a notable event occurs in the game of your favorite sports teams even if you are listening to another channel By touch ing Play on the pop up message displayed on the screen the radio switches to the chan nel
348. to activate Bluetooth wire less technology For details refer to the instruction manual of your devices 2 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 3 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order k gt The Bluetooth screen appears 4 Touch Connection The following screen appears Connection 1 My Bluetooth Device MY PHONE 02 MY PHONE 03 5 Touch the name of the device that you want to connect Switching visibility This function sets whether or not to make this product visible to other devices Initially this function is set to on 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order ks gt The Bluetooth screen appears 3 Touch Visibility repeatedly until the desired setting appears e On default Turns the visibility on e Off Turns the visibility off Entering the PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection To connect your Bluetooth device to this pro duct via Bluetooth wireless technology you need to enter a PIN code on your Bluetooth device to verify the connection O The default code is 0000 but you can change it with this function Chapter JIA P Y OO aN g Le bul DDUUOD pue Hulia sIbay 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order ks gt The Bluetooth screen appears 3 Touch
349. ts of the original route ahead like a tunnel atoll road or a ferry you will find them in the list in case you want to bypass them with the help of this navigation system Regional settings Language This key displays the current language of the user interface By touching the key you can select a new language from the list of avail able languages This system will restart if you change this setting Voice Language This key displays the current voice guidance profile By touching the key you can select a new voice guidance language from the list of available languages and speakers Touch any of these keys to hear a sample voice prompt Units and Formats You can set the various units to be used by this system 68 En O This system may not support all the listed units in some voice guidance languages O You can also set other country specific units used to display different values in this system Distance The unit of distance can be changed Fuel Economy The unit of fuel mileage can be changed Weight The unit of weight can be changed Coordinate Display Format The format of the coordinates can be chan ged Currency The currency unit can be set Time Zone By default the time zone is taken from the map information and adjusted according to your current location e Automatic Time Zone The time zone setting changes automati cally e Manual Time Zone The present setting value for the time d
350. ttern changes randomly ac cording to the low pass mode e Off The flash pattern does not flash J Chapter Navigation info window 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order You can set whether to display the guidance information of the navigation on the AV opera tion screen x i 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen The System screen appears 2 Touch the following keys in the follow 3 Touch Navigation Related Settings ing order The following screen appears Tt System 7 Navigation info window ka gt Ef The System screen appears AV App Guide Mode 3 Touch Navigation Related Settings The following screen appears 4 System 4 Touch AV App Guide Mode repeat f Navigation info window edly until the desired setting appears AV App Guide Mode e On default Switches from the AV operation screen or the Application screen to the map screen e Off Does not switch the screen m s6ul 9sS W JZS S 4 Touch Navigation info window re peatedly until the desired setting appears Activating the Bluetooth e On default di Displays the navigation information bar audio source e Off You need to activate the Bluetooth audio Does not display the navigation information source in order to use a Bluetooth audio bar player 1 Press the HOME button to display the Setting automatic switching OP menu screen to the navigation screen 2
351. ty for AM to level 2 strongest signals while lower settings 3 Touch AV Source Settings The following screen appears Switching the seek mode You can select the method of seek tuning O This setting is available only when HD Radio is selected as the source 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen A System MIXTRAX Settings Radio Settings uoi da dau OIPeY GH SinusXM Settings f Tag Forwarding Bluetooth Audio 2 Touch the following keys in the follow 4 Touch Radio Settings ing order The following screen appears i ad Blending The System screen appears 3 Touch AV Source Settings The following screen appears System MIXTRAX Settings 5 Touch Local The pop up menu appears Radio Settings SinusXM Settings 6 Touch the item you want to set FM r Tag Forwarding Off default Bluetooth Audio Turns the seek tuning setting off Levelt 4 Touch Radio Settings Sets the level of sensitivity for FM to level 1 The following screen appears e Level2 Sets the level of sensitivity for FM to level 2 e Level3 Blending Sets the level of sensitivity for FM to level 3 e Level4 Sets the level of sensitivity for FM to level 4 System e Off default Turns the seek tuning setting off e Levelt 5 Touch Seek repeatedly until the de sired setting appears e Seek All default Seeks stations from both analog and digital
352. unes tagging indi cator on page 94 gt For details refer to Using the touch panel keys on page 93 HD Radio for AVIC 8100NEX AVIC 7100NEX and AVIC 6100NEX gt For details refer to Tunes tagging indi cator on page 98 gt For details refer to Using the touch panel keys on page 97 SiriusXM gt For details refer to Tunes tagging indi cator on page 158 gt For details refer to Using the touch panel keys on page 156 O Ifthe iPod is already connected the song information will be transferred to your iPod every time you touch the touch panel key on which song information is displayed When the song information transfer to your iPod is completed f disappears O When the song information transfer is com pleted the information stored in this pro duct will be automatically deleted O If you turn off this product or disconnect the iPod while transferring song informa tion the transfer may not successfully com plete O While this product is storing song informa tion transfer to an iPod is not possible m Setting the Sound Retriever function The touch panel key on which song informa The Sound Retriever function automatically tion is displayed enhances compressed audio and restores rich HD Radio for AVIC 8100NEX AVIC 7100NEX S and AVIC 6100NEX The touch panel key on which the song title or artist name is displayed 6 Touch the following key Radio for AVIC 5100NEX Touch the f
353. usXM Settings r Tag Forwarding Bluetooth Audio 4 Touch SiriusXM Settings The following screen appears A System Tune Start Parental Control Alert List Team Settings Featured Favorites 5 Touch SportsFlash repeatedly until the desired setting appears e On default Activates the SportsFlash function e Off Deactivates the SportsFlash function m the SiriusXM satellite radio Selecting teams for SportsFlash This function is available only when SiriusXM is selected as the source and SportsFlash is set to On gt For details refer to Using the Sports Flash function on page 168 O Up to 50 teams can be registered as the tar get of SportsFlash O It five prioritized teams are registered noti fication messages for the teams other than the prioritized teams may not be displayed 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ka gt EE The System screen appears 3 Touch AV Source Settings The following screen appears System MIXTRAX Settings Radio Settings SinusXM Settings r Tag Forwarding Bluetooth Audio 4 Touch SiriusXM Settings The following screen appears System Tune Start Parental Control Alert List Team Settings Featured Favorites Chapter OPE 9 1 2 ES GINXSNLIS 34 Huisn Chapter Usin the SiriusxM satellite radio 5 Touch Sport
354. usting the guidelines be sure to park the vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake Displaying the parking e Before getting out of the car to place the markings be sure to turn the ignition switch assist guidelines a 1 Press the HOME button to display the e The range projected by the rear view camera Top menu screen is limited Also the vehicle width and distance guidelines displayed on the rear view camera image may differ from the actual vehicle width and distance The guidelines are straight lines e The image quality may deteriorate depending on the usage environment such as at night or in dark Surroundings 1 Park your vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake 2 Using packing tape or similar place markings approximately 25 cm 9 7 8 in from each side of the vehicle and approxi mately 50 cm 1 ft 8 in and 2 m 6 ft 7 in from the rear bumper 2 m 6 ft 7 in a 50 cm 1 ft 8 in i i 25 cm ieee in Markings Markings 25cm 9 7 8 in e Rear bumper 3 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 4 Touch the following keys in the follow a BE The System screen appears 5 Touch Camera settings The following screen appears T System Camera View Back Camera Input 2nd Camera Input Reverse Gear Setting t Parking Assist Guide 6 Touch Parking Assist Guide Adjust T
355. vX VOD video on de mand content on this product you must first register this product with your DivX VOD con tent provider You do this by generating a DivX VOD registration code which you submit to your provider O Keep a record of the code as you will need it when you register this product to the DivX VOD provider O This setting is available only when Disc is selected as the source 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order gt t The Video Setup screen appears 3 Touch DVD DivX Setup The following screen appears A Video Setup Subtitle Language Audio Lanquage Menu Language T Multi Angle TV Aspect 4 Touch DivX VOD The DivX VOD screen appears Chapter Setting up the video player 35 O If a registration code has already been acti vated it cannot be displayed 5 Touch Registration Code Your 10 digit registration code is displayed O Make a note of the code as you will need it when you register with a DivX VOD provider m Displaying your DivX VOD deregistration code A registration code registered with a deregis tration code can be deleted O This setting is available only when Disc is selected as the source 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order gt J The Video Setup screen appears 3
356. vailable when using iPod function with an iPhone 6 Plus iPhone 6 iPhone 5s iPhone 5c iPhone 5 or iPod touch 5th genera tion O This function is not available for some media or sources Operating the on screen keyboard q w e y u h r t d f g Displays the characters that are entered If there is no text in the box an informative guide with text appears 2 Moves the cursor to the right or left for a num ber of characters equivalent to the number of touches 3 Enters the characters in the text box 4 Deletes the input text to the left of the cursor one letter at a time Continuing to touch the key deletes all of the text Confirms the entry and proceeds to the next step 6 Enters a space A space equivalent to the number of touches is inserted D Switches between alphabet and numbers symbols Switches between capital and lower case letters m Chapter uol e1ado diseg On first time startup of the navigation system When you use the navigation function for the first time an initial setup process starts auto matically Follow the steps below CM You can change the language and GPS log setting later using Regional and Usage Reports in the Settings screen Other settings can be restarted later using Start Configuration Wizard in the Settings screen 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys Initiates the init
357. vices on the smartphone xipusddy When problems occur with this product an error message appears on the display Refer to the table below to identity the problem then take the suggested corrective action If the error persists record the error message and contact your dealer or your nearest Pioneer service center Common Message Cause AMP Error This product fails to operate or the speaker connection is incorrect the protective circuit is activated TEMP The temperature of this product is outside the normal operating range Product overheat System will be shut down automatically in 1 minute Restart the pro duct by ACC Off On may fix this problem If this message keeps showing up it is possi ble that some problem oc cured in the product The temperature is too high for this product to operate Positioning is not possible due to the hardware Please contact your dealer or Pioneer service center The location display is not possible due to hardware failure No GPS antenna Check con nection GPS reception is lost GPS antenna problem de GPS antenna lead is short circuited tected Contact dealer or ser vice center Calibration will start but may The speed pulse sensor is not con be inaccurate without speed nected correctly pulse Sensor error Please contact An error has occurred with the sen your dealer or Pioneer Service sor Center Action Check the speaker connection If t
358. want to set e Preset images Selects the desired preset clock image off Hides the clock display O You can preview the lop menu screen or the AV operation screen by touching Home or AV respectively m Changing the preinstalled splash screen You can change the splash screen to other images preinstalled in this product 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 210 En HE hemem OS 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order ac The Theme screen appears 3 Touch Splash Screen The following screen appears 4 Touch the item you want to set e Preset images Selects the desired preset splash screen image custom Displays the splash screen image imported from the external storage device USB SD gt For details refer to Changing to the splash screen stored on the external storage device USB SD on page 210 Changing to the splash screen stored on the external storage device USB SD You can change the splash screen to other images imported from the external storage de vice USB SD A CAUTION Do not turn off the engine while importing an image from the external storage device USB SD 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen Chapter Thememenu 9 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order ac The Theme screen appears 3 Touch Splash Screen The following screen appears
359. ward the top of the screen e North up The map display always has north at the top of the screen O The map orientation is fixed at Heading up when the 3D map screen is displayed 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 2 Touch the following key Displays the navigation menu on the Map screen 3 Touch the following key Each time you touch the key the setting changes Indicates 2D Heading up view mode is currently selected Indicates 3D Heading up view mode is currently selected Indicates 2D North up view mode is currently selected 4 Touch the following key Returns to the Map screen O If you press the MAP button you can return to the Map screen Chapter How to use the map Ce For information on the controls when the 3 Touch the following key scrolled map is displayed refer to Contro keys on the scrolled map on page 33 Zooms in Scrolling the map to the position you want to see Zooms out m 1 Press the MAP button fe The Map screen appears Changes the map view mode the z map mode currently selected is re 2 Touch and drag the map in the desired shown c direction to scroll D If you place the cursor on the desired location ct Tilts up gt a brief overview about the location will appear M at the top of the screen showing the street 3 name and other information for the location amp Tilts down 3 Touch the following key The map returns to th
360. warnings beforehand and set the alert types en 53 gt For details refer to Warnings settings on page 66 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 2 Scroll the map and select a location The cursor appears at the selected point Place Charles De Gaulle 3 Touch the following key Displays the shortcuts o edita previously saved alert point touch 4 Touch Add Alert Points The Add New Alert Point screen appears 5 Set the necessary parameters e Alert Type Sets the type of the alert point e Speed Limit Sets the speed limit for this alert point it applicable e Direction Sets the direction from which you expect the alert to come from 6 Touch Save The location is saved as a new alert point gt For details refer to Warnings settings on page 66 O The warning for road safety cameras like speed cameras is disabled when you are in certain countries where warnings for road safety cameras are prohibited However you are fully responsible for ensuring that 54 En this feature is legal in the country where you intend to use it J Editing the stored alert points Stored alert points can be edited later 1 Press the MAP button The Map screen appears 2 Scroll the map to the stored alert point 3 Touch the following key 4 Touch Edit Alert Points Displays the shortcuts 5 Set the necessary parameters m If you touch
361. when Android Auto is on O SD is available for AVIC 8100NEX and AVIC 7100NEX only m Setting the anti theft function You can set a password for this product If the back up lead is cut after the password is set this product prompts for the password at the time of next boot up Setting the password 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow A M Chapter Other functions N The System screen appears 2 Touch Go When the correct password is entered this 3 Touch Area1 followed by Area2 and product will be unlocked then touch and hold Area3 Area1 Area2 Area3 Deleting the password The current password and password hint can Navigation Related Settings be deleted Ra 1 Press the HOME button to display the YY Ever Scroll Top menu screen Input Output Settings suoipuny 19410 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order The Anti theft Setting Menu screen ap pears en E i 4 Touch Set Password Camera settings The Password Entry screen appears The System screen appears 5 Enter the password you want to set 3 Touch Area1 followed by Area2 and 5 to 16 characters can be entered for a then touch and hold Area3 password Area1 Area2 Area3 oo E Navigation Related Settings 6 Touch Go The Hint Entry screen appears 7 Enter a password hint LY AV Source Settings
362. where you are If you want to change the area to search set another country e City or ZIP Code By default your navigation system proposes the city town where you are You can select the city town using its postal code instead of its name e Street If the street name is not available touch Go to City and select the city town This way the center of the selected city town be comes the destination of the route e Select House Number or Intersection This item will be displayed after you have set a street If the house number is not available touch Go to Street and select the street This way the center of the se lected street becomes the destination of the route After you touch the selected address to finish the address search the searched location ap pears on the Map screen 6 Touch Select as Destination on the Map Location screen gt For details on the operations in the Map Location screen refer to Using the Map Location screen on page 45 uol eul sap e 104 Bulusjeas After touching Select as Destination the Route Summary screen appears and count down begins When the countdown ends the guidance automatically starts If the screen is touched anywhere during the countdown the countdown stops and the screen will stay as it iS gt For details on the operations in the Route Summary screen refer to Checking route information and preferences on page 48 7 Touch
363. xels or smaller A CAUTION Do not turn off the engine while importing an image from the external storage device USB SD nuaw swsaul 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow ing order ka gt K The Theme screen appears 3 Touch Background The following screen appears en 207 Chapter HE hemem OS Illumination Theme Background Clock EJ O You can also change the screen for settings by touching Illumination Theme or Clock on this screen 4 Touch the following key 5 Touch the desired external storage de vice USB SD The following screen appears Displays the list of the background dis play images stored on the external sto rage device USB SD Photol 6 Touch the image to use as the back ground display from the list The image is set as the background display O You can delete the imported image and re store the setting for the background display to the default by touching and holding the custom key m Setting the illumination color The illumination color can be selected from 5 different colors Furthermore the illumination can be switched between these 5 colors in order 208 En Selecting the color from the preset colors You can select an illumination color from the color list 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow
364. y You can change the language for caution messages with this setting e f the embedded language and the selected language setting are not the same text in formation may not display properly e Some characters may not be displayed properly 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 186 En 2 Touch the following keys in the follow Am The System screen appears 3 Touch System Language The pop up menu appears 4 Touch the desired language After the language is selected the previous screen returns 8 Setting the keyboard language with the application for iPhone You can use the keyboard in AppRadio Mode by setting the language of the keyboard for iPhone O This function is only available in AppRadio Mode on the iPhone 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen 2 Touch the following keys in the follow Am The System screen appears 3 Touch Keyboard The pop up menu appears 4 Touch the desired language After the language is selected the previous screen returns a Setting the beep sound 1 Press the HOME button to display the Top menu screen Chapter 2 Touch the following keys in the follow Am The System screen appears 3 Touch Beep Tone repeatedly until the desired setting appears e On default Sounds a beep e Off Does not sound a beep m Adjusting the response positions of the touch panel touch pan
365. ying your DivX VOD registration code on page 216 m AAC AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG 2 and MPEG 4 Sev eral applications can be used to encode AAC files but Tile formats and extensions differ de pending on the application which is used to encode This unit plays back AAC files en coded by iTunes Google Google Play Android and Android Auto android Google Google Play Android Android Auto and other marks are trademarks of Google Inc J 250 En MirrorLink MirrorLink Certified the Design Only Certifi cation Logo MirrorLink and the MirrorLink Logo are certification marks and trademarks of the Car Connectivity Consortium LLC Un authorized use is strictly prohibited MIXTRAX MIXTRAX is a trademark of the PIONEER CORPORATION Detailed information regarding connected iPod devices A CAUTION e Pioneer accepts no responsibility for data lost from an iPod even if that data is lost while using this product Please back up your iPod data regularly e Do not leave the iPod in direct sunlight for ex tended amounts of time Extended exposure to direct sunlight can result in iPod maltunc tion due to the resulting high temperature e Do not leave the iPod in any location with high temperatures e Firmly secure the iPod when driving Do not let the iPod fall onto the floor where it may be come

Pioneer AVIC 7100 NEX Operation Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents